europe Archives • A Passion and A Passport https://apassionandapassport.com/category/europe/ Proving Travel is Possible with a Full-Time 9-5 Tue, 14 Oct 2025 03:14:52 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=5.8.12 Day Trip to Procida from Naples: How to Spend One Perfect Day on Italy’s Pastel Paradise https://apassionandapassport.com/procida-day-trip/ https://apassionandapassport.com/procida-day-trip/#respond Mon, 13 Oct 2025 19:38:40 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=32815 Headed to Italy and planning a day trip to Procida? You’re in the right place! Here’s everything you need to know about spending one day in Procida from Naples.  When I originally booked my trip to Naples, I was thinking I’d take day trips to Capri and the Amalfi Coast. But then I started hearingContinue Reading

The post Day Trip to Procida from Naples: How to Spend One Perfect Day on Italy’s Pastel Paradise appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Headed to Italy and planning a day trip to Procida? You’re in the right place! Here’s everything you need to know about spending one day in Procida from Naples. 

When I originally booked my trip to Naples, I was thinking I’d take day trips to Capri and the Amalfi Coast. But then I started hearing about Procida, and just knew I needed to include this tiny island in my plans. And I’m SO glad I did my day trip to Procida from Naples ended up being one of my favorite days on my entire southern Italy trip!

So, if you’re craving a break from the crowds in Naples (I get it) or the glitz of Capri (yes, it’s a little stuffy), Procida (pronounced Pro-chee-dah) is your postcard-perfect escape! Think candy-colored houses, sun-bleached fishing boats, and a laid-back vibe that feels like stepping back in time. It’s just glorious!

If Capri is the glamorous movie star of the Bay of Naples, then Procida is her effortlessly cool little sister – the one who shows up in vintage linen, doesn’t care about the paparazzi, and somehow steals the scene anyway.

Just a short ferry ride from Naples or Ischia, this tiny island is bursting with pastel fishing villages, lemon groves, and old-world charm that feels refreshingly authentic. Often called a hidden gem of the Amalfi Coast (though technically it sits in the Bay of Naples), Procida is quieter and more low-key than its famous neighbors – and that’s exactly the point. 

Ready to trade crowds for cobblestones, and glamour for genuine charm? Here’s how to spend one day on Procida Italy’s most colorful island (or does that title belong to Burano?! I’ll let you decide). Just promise me one thing – you’ll say hi to Captain Domenico on his boat tour around the island! It was hands-down the highlight of my day!

Procida Day Trip Logistics

Where is Procida? 

Procida is a tiny island in the Bay of Naples, floating between the Italian mainland and the larger island of Ischia. It’s the smallest of the three main islands in the bay (Capri, Ischia, and Procida), and arguably the most authentic. And it’s the closest island to the shore, meaning it doesn’t take too long to get there (which is perfect if all you’ve got is a day in Procida)!

Only about 4 square kilometers in size, Procida sits roughly:

  • 40 minutes by ferry from Naples
  • 20-30 minutes by ferry from Ischia
  • And just a bit further from Capri

Because of its small size and its location in the Bay of Naples, Procida is best visited as a day trip from Naples, Ischia, or even Capri. It’s a world apart from the big-name hot spots like Rome, Venice, Florence, and Puglia, which are much farther away and not directly connected. But if you’re already in southern Italy like I was, it’s an easy (and incredibly rewarding) detour.

How to Get to Procida 

Planning a day trip to Procida is easy from anywhere in the Bay of Naples. Whether you’re coming from Naples, Ischia, Capri, or the Amalfi Coast, just hop on a ferry and you’ll be strolling those candy-colored streets in no time. 

Here’s how to plan your Procida day trip from each spot:

From Naples

  • Departure ports: Molo Beverello (fast hydrofoils) or Porta di Massa (slower ferries)
  • Operators: Caremar, SNAV, Medmar – I used Caremar and it was smooth.
  • Travel time: 40–60 minutes depending on the boat.
  • Cost: About €15–€20 each way. Buy at the port or book online in summer for early departures.
  • Tip: Don’t want to DIY? Try a Naples to Procida transfer with an island boat tour via GetYourGuide — perfect for a seamless Procida day trip. 

From Ischia

  • Departure port: Ischia Porto
  • Travel time: Just 20–30 minutes – the quickest hop of all.
  • Why it’s great: Ideal if you’re staying on Ischia and want an easy day trip to Procida without much planning.

From Capri

  • Connections: Occasional ferries, often with a transfer in Ischia or Naples.
  • Plan ahead: Schedules are limited and not daily.
  • My take: If you’re passing through Naples anyway, it’s usually simpler to stay a night there and go direct from Naples for your Procida day trip.

From the Amalfi Coast

  • Ports: Positano or Sorrento
  • Travel time: Around 2 hours one way.
  • Reality check: You’ll likely pass through Naples and lose a big chunk of your day. Spend a night in Naples if you can to maximize time on your day trip to Procida.

How I got to Procida:

When I visited this region of Italy, I based myself in Naples, which made Procida an easy and super convenient day trip. I booked a ticket on the Caremar ferry in advance because I was traveling during high season and wanted to snag an early morning time slot – the earlier you arrive, the more time you have to soak up the island before the midday crowds (and heat) roll in. 

For reference, I booked an 8:55am hydrofoil there and a 8:15pm ferry back to Naples. This was the perfect amount of time on the island for me, and I didn’t have to wake up at the crack of dawn. 

Psst – if you book in advance, you’ll need to collect your boarding pass at the ticket office. Make sure to get there early (about 45 minutes or so, possibly more if you’re traveling during high season).

Something to note: there’s two ports in Naples (Molo Beverello and Calata Porta di Massa); make sure to go to the correct one. Don’t make the same mistake I did… Thankfully they’re only about a 15 minute walk from each other, but still annoying to first walk to the wrong one and then realize you actually needed the other… Make sure to look on your ticket to see which port your boat is leaving from. Whoops!

Ferry tips from my experience:

  • Book early if you’re visiting in peak season – the boats do in fact fill up.
  • Aim for an early morning boat so you can really stretch your time on the island and enjoy the quieter morning vibe.
  • Don’t forget to check the return schedule when you arrive – the last ferries back to Naples and Ischia are usually in the evening, and you don’t wanna get stranded (unless, of course, you secretly do want an excuse to stay overnight – can’t say I’d blame you).
  • Sit outside if the weather’s good – the sea breeze and the views of Vesuvius and the bay are worth the salty hair. Plus, I got to see a stunning sunset on the way back!

How to Get Around Procida 

I walked all around Procida, and honestly? It was a lot of walking – but totally worth it. The island is only about 4 square kilometers, so it’s doable, but those hills, stairs, and cobblestones will definitely give your legs a workout. Like I said earlier: wear comfortable shoes – your feet will thank you. I wore sandals and they were fine, but in hindsight sneakers would’ve been much better.

If you’d rather save your energy (or just want to see more without the sweat), you have a few other options:

  • Local Minibuses: The buses are small, frequent, and inexpensive (about €1.50–€2 per ride if you buy a ticket at a shop, slightly more if you pay onboard).
    • The main operator is EAV Bus, which runs several routes circling the island.
    • You’ll find bus stops near the ferry terminal at Marina Grande and throughout the island – just look for the signs marked with Fermata.
    • The most useful routes for visitors are usually the L1 and L2, which hit the main areas like Marina Grande, Chiaiolella, and Terra Murata.
  • Bikes & E-bikes: Several rental shops near the marina offer bicycles or electric bikes by the hour or day – a good middle ground if you don’t want to walk the whole island but still want to go at your own pace.
  • Scooters: You can also rent a scooter if you’re comfortable navigating the narrow streets. Just watch out for the sharp curves and steep bits!

When to Visit Procida

You can technically visit Procida year-round, but some months are definitely better than others depending on what kind of experience you’re after – and how hot (or cool) you like it.

I visited Procida at the end of June, and it was absolutely gorgeous — sunny skies, long days, and the island in full bloom. Yes, it was high season, but to be honest, it didn’t feel exceptionally busy — especially compared to the super crazy crowds I’d just left behind in Naples. 

Part of that, I think, was thanks to my early start: I caught the 8:55am ferry from Naples and arrived at Procida before 10am. The island felt like it was still waking up – the streets were quiet, shutters were just starting to open, and for a good hour or so I wandered peacefully, soaking it all in before more visitors arrived.

High Season (June – August)

This is when the island is at its liveliest – hot weather, everything open, and plenty of events and festivals. Daytime temps average around 28–32°C (82–90°F), with July and August being the hottest months. That said, if you plan well and arrive early like I did, it can still feel calm and magical, even at the peak of summer.

Shoulder Seasons (April – May & September – October)

If you can swing it, these are arguably the best months to visit. The weather is still warm and pleasant, but the crowds thin out a bit. Daytime temperatures are typically 18–24°C (64–75°F) in spring and 22–27°C (72–81°F) in early fall. Ferries are less hectic, and you’ll have more space to wander without bumping elbows at every viewpoint.

Winter (November – March)

The island quiets down considerably in winter. Some restaurants and shops close for the season, and ferry schedules are reduced. Daytime temperatures hover around 10–15°C (50–59°F), so it’s much cooler, but you’ll have the island almost entirely to yourself.

BUT (yes, of course there’s a but, haha), I honestly wouldn’t recommend going in winter if you want the true Procida experience. Most of the restaurants will be closed, and it’ll be far too chilly to go for a swim in the turquoise waters (my favorite!).

Also, ferries are less frequent from November to March, so just keep that in mind if you’re visiting in the low season.

Is a day trip to Procida worth it?

I can say without hesitation: yes – absolutely. My day trip to Procida ended up being one of my favorite days in all of Italy.

The island’s charm is undeniable – pastel-colored houses stacked above the sea, quiet little alleys, fresh seafood, and a vibe that feels worlds away from the chaos of Naples. But what really made it special for me were the locals. I found them to be incredibly welcoming and genuinely happy that visitors are discovering and appreciating their island. (Just remember to be respectful – this is their home, not just a backdrop for your Instagram.)

At one point, a local fisherman – an older gentleman with the most genuine, kindest smile – even invited me into his traditional fisherman’s home. I’ll admit, I was a little wary at first (being invited into a stranger’s house can feel a bit unexpected, especially as a solo female traveler!), but it turned out to be one of those magical travel moments I’ll never forget. He was so proud to show me around, pointing out family heirlooms and telling stories about his life on the island. 

He even shared that he’s turning his home into an Airbnb – a clear sign of how Procida is slowly shifting to welcome more tourism. Whether that’s good or bad… I’m not sure yet. But it was such a privilege to glimpse his life and see firsthand both the pride locals have in their island and the changes they’re adapting to. I’ll never forget his sweet smile!

So yes – if you’re in Naples or Ischia and want a day filled with authenticity, beauty, and maybe even a few surprises, Procida is 100% worth it.

Is One Day in Procida Enough?

I think so! One day is plenty to see the highlights – especially if you catch an early ferry and stay until sunset (like I did).

With one day in Procida, you’ll have time to:

  • Explore the two main marinas
  • See the island’s most spectacular viewpoint
  • Enjoy a leisurely meal and gelato
  • Circle the island via boat trip (plus some swimming!)
  • Even sneak in some beach time if you’re quick

Of course, if you fall in love with the vibe (very possible), you might find yourself wishing you had another day to just chill by the sea with a spritz. But for most travelers (including myself), a full day is the perfect amount of time to soak in Procida’s charm. To be honest, I think more than a day (or two) would be overkill, unless you want a few exceptionally chill days.

Brief History of Procida 

Procida’s story stretches back thousands of years – this tiny island has seen it all, from ancient Greek settlers to Roman emperors and beyond. Its strategic location in the Bay of Naples made it a valuable spot for fishermen, traders, and rulers alike.

Over the centuries, Procida was shaped by waves of invaders and settlers: the Greeks established early colonies here, then the Romans took over, using the island as a quiet retreat. During the Middle Ages, Procida became an important defensive outpost with fortresses built to protect against pirates and rival powers.

For much of its history, Procida remained a humble fishing village – generations of locals making their living from the sea, crafting colorful boats and preserving their unique traditions. It wasn’t until recently that the island started to attract tourists looking for a more authentic and peaceful alternative to nearby Capri.

Interestingly, Procida was named Italy’s Capital of Culture in 2022 – kind of like how Matera was named the European Capital of Culture in 2019. This honor is a nod to Procida’s rich heritage and vibrant local arts scene. It’s a place where history isn’t just locked away in museums – it’s alive in every sun-washed alley and seaside terrace.

Things To Do in Procida in One Day

If you’ve only got one day on this charming little island (like I did), here’s how to make the most of it – with plenty of time for wandering, eating, and soaking in Procida’s pastel-colored magic.

8:55am: Catch the Early Ferry from Naples

Start your day trip to Procida bright and early with the Caremar 8:55 a.m. ferry from Naples (what I did!). I recommend booking your ticket in advance if it’s high season – not just to secure a spot, but also to snag an early time slot so you can enjoy more of the island before the other day-trippers arrive. 

Remember – get to the ferry terminal BEFORE your ferry departure time. This is when it leaves, so you’ll wanna get there about 45 minutes beforehand.

Arriving at Procida just before 10am, I immediately noticed how calm and sleepy Procida felt compared to chaotic Naples – it was such a breath of fresh air and my body instantly relaxed. 

Naples does get a bad rep, and even though I’ve taken more than a dozen solo trips around the world and wasn’t exactly worried during my time in Naples, I’ll admit I still felt a bit apprehensive because of all the stories I’d heard. Stepping onto Procida, though, I felt that weight lift and found myself feeling much more carefree.

10am: Coffee & a Lingua di Procida near Marina Grande

Once you step off the ferry at Marina di Procida, pop into Pasticceria Bar Roma (right by the port) and start your day the Procidani way – with a lingua di Procida and a coffee. This flaky, lemon custard-filled pastry is light, tart, sweet, and absolutely perfect with an espresso. Since it was invented right here on the island, it feels only right to enjoy it at the start of your adventure!

Afterwards, stroll around the little shops – they were just starting to open once I arrived! Lots of cute lemony stuff to check out (too bad my suitcase was already stuffed).

10:30am: Explore Marina di Corricella

Make your way to Marina di Corricella, the dreamy, iconic pastel harbor you’ve probably seen in every Procida photo. I walked here on foot (comfy shoes highly recommended – lots of stairs and uneven cobblestones), and because I arrived so early, it was practically empty. The streets were quiet, shutters were still closed, and it felt like the island was just beginning to wake up – truly magical. 

Once the restaurants began to open up, I could totally see why everyone is beyond obsessed with this idyllic little port. It’s just so adorable and picturesque! Truly the icon of Procida, and it’s oh so colorful (which I just love). 

This is also where I met that sweet older fisherman I was telling you about before!

While in Corricella, grab a lemon granita (I got mine at Chiaro di Luna cocktail bar e Gelateria Artigianale) and just sit by the water for a bit, soaking in the scene of fishing boats, colorful balconies, and locals going about their day. And wave to the fisherman — they’re so friendly!

12pm: Visit Casale Vascello

Head inland to find Casale Vascello, a tucked-away courtyard surrounded by historic homes with arched staircases, painted doors, and that timeless village vibe. It’s peaceful and worth a quick wander before lunch.

1pm: Lunch With a View

Lunch is an event here, and you have two excellent options:

  • If you’re more organized than me and made a reservation, head to La Lampara. This spot has some of the best views on the island, overlooking Corricella, with fantastic seafood, pasta, house wine, and a truly dreamy tiramisu.
  • If you didn’t book ahead (like me), don’t worry – I ended up at Il Pescatore and loved it. It’s right on the harbor, with views of the fishing boats and a breezy, relaxed vibe. The spaghetti al limone blew me away (my new favorite pasta dish), and their refreshing lemon salad – their specialty – was just what I needed.

2:30pm: Climb to Panoramica sulla Corricella

Next, make your way to one of the best viewpoints on the island: Panoramica sulla Corricella. The climb is pretty steep to be honest with lots of stairs (or you can catch the C2 bus from the port if you’d rather save your legs), but the view of the harbor below is worth every step – this is the best view of Procida in my opinion. Whatever you do, don’t miss this.

And it was way less crowded than I thought it’d be!

I admit I got a little lost with all the climbing (it’s hard to know exactly which steps to actually climb), but I eventually made it! And found some extra views I originally wouldn’t have along the way!

If you’re feeling adventurous, continue walking up to Palazzo D’Avalos, a faded but fascinating former palace and prison that’s being renovated. Even if the building itself isn’t much to see up close, the sea views from here are beautiful. 

I walked up and didn’t really think it was worth it (I was already pretty sweaty and hot), but you be the judge yourself!

3:30pm: See Procida by Boat

The perfect way to wind down your day is with a boat tour around the island. This is the exact boat tour I went on, and it was beyond fantastic. This is one of the best ways to see the island for sure. Honestly, I’d even say it was the highlight of my day.

Domenico, the skipper, was not only extremely kind, knowledgeable, and professional, but his boat was immaculate and extremely beautiful (and he’s not too bad looking himself, wink wink). We stopped at beautiful, hidden swimming spots with the most turquoise water I never would’ve found on my own, and of course seeing the island from the sea felt so special.

We cruised past landmarks like the Palazzo D’Avalos perched on its cliff, the Cave of the Marine Ox in Punta dei Monaci, Carbonchio Bay, the Bourbon Palace, Chiaiozza and its natural pool, Vivara Island, Postman Beach (Pozzovecchio), and the Punta Pioppeto Lighthouse. 

I chose the 3:30pm start time so I could explore the island in the morning and relax on the water in the afternoon – it was the perfect way to balance the day.

6pm: Gelato Before You Go

After docking back at the port, cap off your perfect day the Italian way – with a scoop (or two) of gelato. There’s plenty of little gelaterias near the ferry terminal, so grab a cone, stroll along the waterfront, and savor every bite. Because let’s be honest – no perfect day in Italy is complete without a gelato.

7 or 8pm (depending on month visited): Sunset Ferry Back

End your day by catching a ferry back to Naples at sunset. I got lucky and watched the sky turn shades of pink and gold over the Bay of Naples from the deck – the perfect, dreamy ending to an already unforgettable day.

More Things to Do in Procida (If You Have Extra Time)

If you’re lucky enough to move at a slower pace – or just want a few alternatives to the main itinerary – here are some extra ideas to round out your day:

Walk to Vivara Island

Connected to Procida by a small pedestrian bridge, Vivara Island is a protected nature reserve that feels wonderfully wild. It’s full of Mediterranean plants and birds, and because visitor numbers are limited, it’s incredibly peaceful. (Check ahead to see if it’s open during your visit – it’s sometimes closed seasonally or for maintenance.)

Lounge on a Beach

To be honest, the beaches on Procida didn’t wow me at all (those in Puglia, Cinque Terre, and even Croatia are way more my style). 

But if you’re craving sand between your toes, head to Spiaggia di Pozzo Vecchio (Postman’s Beach) – a quiet black-sand beach made famous by Il Postino. Or check out Chiaiolella Beach, which is bigger and livelier, perfect for a quick swim or people-watching.

Visit a Church

Pop into Abbazia San Michele Arcangelo, up near Terra Murata, for a peek at Procida’s spiritual heart. The church is dedicated to the island’s patron saint, and the views from up there are spectacular.



The post Day Trip to Procida from Naples: How to Spend One Perfect Day on Italy’s Pastel Paradise appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/procida-day-trip/feed/ 0
My Florence to San Marino Day Trip: Medieval Towers, Hilltop Views, and Zero Crowds https://apassionandapassport.com/florence-to-san-marino-day-trip/ https://apassionandapassport.com/florence-to-san-marino-day-trip/#respond Thu, 02 Oct 2025 01:56:44 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=32757 Planning a day trip from Florence to San Marino? You’re in for a seriously underrated adventure. This tiny mountaintop country might be one of the world’s oldest republics, but it’s also one of the most charming (and photogenic) spots I visited during my time in Florence. Picture dramatic stone towers, sweeping hillside views, cobblestone alleys,Continue Reading

The post My Florence to San Marino Day Trip: Medieval Towers, Hilltop Views, and Zero Crowds appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Planning a day trip from Florence to San Marino? You’re in for a seriously underrated adventure. This tiny mountaintop country might be one of the world’s oldest republics, but it’s also one of the most charming (and photogenic) spots I visited during my time in Florence. Picture dramatic stone towers, sweeping hillside views, cobblestone alleys, and (bonus!) hardly any crowds.

In this post, I’m breaking down everything you need to know for a seamless trip from Florence to San Marino – including how to get there, what to do, where to eat, and all the must-see spots in just one day. If you’re looking for something unique and off the usual Italy itinerary, this is 100% it.

San Marino feels straight out of a fairytale. You’ve got medieval castles perched high on a ridgeline, winding streets that look like movie sets, and panoramic views that go on forever. Throw in a few cozy cafes, local shops, and a relaxed, low-key vibe, and I was sold.

Honestly, before planning my Florence itinerary, I hadn’t even heard of San Marino (kinda embarrassing, but hey, here we are). But once I saw how close it was, I couldn’t resist. I was SO close to hitting 50 countries and knew I had to squeeze this one in. And I’m so glad I did – how often do you get to casually pop into another country for the day?

Turns out, San Marino is actually one of the least-visited countries in the entire world. It’s also the third smallest in Europe (after Vatican City and Monaco), completely surrounded by Italy but 100% its own thing. You won’t need a passport to get in, but you’ll definitely want your camera. Think mountaintop hikes, ancient fortresses, and some seriously jaw-dropping views. San Marino totally caught me off guard in the best way.

A Little About San Marino

If you’re anything like me, you probably hadn’t even heard of San Marino before planning your Florence itinerary. I had no idea this teeny tiny mountaintop country even existed – let alone that it’s one of the oldest republics in the world. We’re talking way back in the year 301.

So, if you’re interested in learning a bit about San Marino, here’s the quick version: San Marino is its own country – not a town, not a province, not a quirky part of Italy. It’s completely surrounded by Italy but has stayed totally independent for over 1,700 years. It was started by a stonemason named Marinus who fled religious persecution and set up a little mountaintop community on Monte Titano. And somehow, despite popes, Napoleon, wars, and even Mussolini, San Marino held onto its independence and managed to never get swallowed up by Italy. Wild, right? 

Today, it still has its own government, postage stamps, and even border control (though it’s super chill and you won’t even need to show your passport if you’re coming from Italy). It uses the euro and feels very European… just in a “wait, I’m in a different country right now?” kind of way.

It’s super tiny – the third smallest country in Europe tiny – but full of quirky history, sweeping views, and that charming old-world vibe. Definitely not just another hilltop town (although I loved the ones we visited on our Puglia road trip!).

Is a Florence to San Marino Day Trip Worth It?

I think so! Despite kinda being a hassle to get to (there’s no direct train or bus and zero organized tours at this time), I’m so glad I made the effort to get to San Marino. On public transportation from Florence (practically the only way to get there), it takes almost 4 hours… so… decide ahead of time if you’re willing to make the trek. I’ll be going into detail about how to get there shortly.

Logistics for Taking a Florence to San Marino Day Trip

Where is San Marino

San Marino is a tiny independent country (the fifth smallest country on Earth – just under 24 square miles in size) completely landlocked by Italy, tucked away in the northeastern part of the Italian peninsula. It sits on the slopes of Mount Titano, about 3 hours southeast of Florence by car and roughly 30 – 45 minutes from the Adriatic coast. The closest big Italian city is Rimini, a lively coastal spot just 30 – 45 minutes away. 

How to Get From Florence to San Marino

So here’s the thing – San Marino doesn’t have its own train station or airport, so you can’t just hop on a direct train or flight into the country. Nope, this tiny hilltop republic makes you work for it a little (but hey, that’s half the fun, right?).

Driving: You’ve got a few options, but driving is definitely one of them. If you’re renting a car, it’s about 250 km (or 155 miles) from Florence to San Marino – roughly a 3-hour drive, depending on traffic. Totally doable as a day trip if you’re up for some highway time!

Public Transportation: First things first, just know it’s gonna take a few hours (unless you’re taking a ridiculously expensive taxi). Therefore, plan to leave early! For reference, I left Florence on a 6:55am train  (yes, 6:55 in the morning) and didn’t make it to San Marino until 10:30am. So practically 4 hours when you consider I had to first get myself to the train station in Florence. 

Do note there’s no direct transport from Florence to San Marino, so everyone will need to get to Rimini first (where there’s a bus straight to San Marino). If you’re staying in Florence and doing a day trip to San Marino like I was, you’ll need to transfer through Bologna to reach Rimini (train from Florence to Bologna, then train from Bologna to Rimini). It sounds pretty tricky but I promise you once you read the steps outlined before, it’s honestly pretty easy.

You can buy train and bus tickets on the day of, but I didn’t wanna have to deal with that before such a long journey, so I decided to buy them in advance. Whatever I can do to make my traveling easier I typically do, including buying transport tickets beforehand if possible (and sometimes it’s cheaper by doing this!).

Here’s exactly how you’ll get from Florence to San Marino (and exactly what I did):

  • Step 1: Train from Florence to Bologna. Take a fast train from Florence Santa Maria Novella to Bologna Centrale (about 35 minutes). I took the 6:55am Frecciarossa train and arrived at Bologna at 7:28am.
  • Step 2: Train from Bologna to Rimini. From Bologna Centrale, hop on another train to Rimini – it takes around 1.5 hours. I took the 8am InterCity and got to Rimini at 9:11am.
  • Step 3: Bonelli Bus from Rimini to San Marino. Time to get over the border! Catch the Bonelli bus from Rimini to San Marino (roughly 50 minutes). The bus stop in Rimini is right in front of the Napoleon Hotel, just a 3-minute walk from the train station. You’ll find plenty of other travelers waiting here, and the bus is really comfy! I took a 9:45am bus from Rimini to San Marino and arrived in San Marino at 10:33am. Told ya it’s a long trek!

I strongly recommend buying your bus ticket online beforehand (that’s what I did) or at the ticket office across the street from the train station in Rimini. Buying tickets on the bus isn’t the best idea – my bus was pretty full (actually pretty packed!), and I saw people get turned away and forced to wait for the next one. When I visited, the bus fare was 6 euros each way. Check out the latest schedule on the official bus website.

You’ll return back to Florence the same way you came! First with a bus from San Marino to Rimini, a train from Rimini to Bologna Centrale), and finally, another train from Bologna to Florence SMN. And yup, it takes just as long, haha. But you’ll quickly realize that although it seems like a complicated journey, it’s actually pretty simple once you start!

Psst: CARRY A PORTABLE PHONE BATTERY. I cannot stress this enough. Travel alone will take over 7 hours (3.5 hours each way), so you don’t wanna get stuck without any battery! Especially if your train and bus tickets are on your phone (I recommend printing them out juuuuust in case)!

How to Get Around San Marino

San Marino is tiny – like, walk-everywhere tiny. Once you get off the bus from Rimini, you’ll be dropped off right at the base of the historic center (also called San Marino City), and from there, it’s all on foot. Just be prepared to walk a lot; I think I walked over 20k steps that day despite sitting on the train/bus for over 7 hours!

And yes, I wore a dress, but I made sure to wear comfy sneakers for that very reason.

The old town is perched on a hilltop and full of cobblestone streets, narrow alleys, and epic views – not exactly car-friendly, but perfect for wandering. Everything you’ll want to see (like the Three Towers, the main squares, and all the cute little shops and cafes) is within walking distance. Just wear comfy shoes – there’s plenty of hills and stairs to climb (but I promise the views are worth it).

If you’re staying overnight and your hotel is farther from the center, there’s a local cable car that connects the lower town of Borgo Maggiore with the old town. It runs frequently and takes just a couple of minutes – plus, you get sweeping views on the way up!

Basically: no rental car, no Uber, no taxis needed. Your feet (and maybe the cable car) will get you everywhere you want to go.

When to Take a Day Trip to San Marino

San Marino is beautiful year-round, but if you’re aiming for clear skies, fewer crowds, and sweeping views (aka the dream combo), here’s what to keep in mind.

For reference, I took a day trip from Florence to San Marino in late June, and had practically perfect weather!

While it was hot, it was totally doable – just bring water and take breaks in the shade when you need to. July and August are peak tourist season, so expect more crowds and tour groups, especially midday. If you can, go on a weekday to avoid the weekend rush (and snap your pics without random tourists in the background, ha).

Spring (April – June) and early fall (September – October) are really the sweet spots: fewer people, still warm and sunny, and the views from the towers are crystal clear on a good day. Winter can be chilly and foggy, and some restaurants or attractions might have limited hours – plus, you’ll miss out on those iconic views if it’s super overcast.

Other Tips and FAQS about a Day Trip to San Marino

Fun Facts About San Marino

  • It’s really small. Like, blink-and-you-miss-it small. San Marino is the 5th smallest country in the world, and you can drive across it in under an hour.
  • They have their own army. Yep – this teeny country has a teeny army. It’s mostly ceremonial now, but they’ve got guards in fancy uniforms and everything.
  • You can get your passport stamped. Even though there’s no official border crossing, San Marino will happily stamp your passport for a few euros at the tourism office. It’s the cutest little souvenir. Stop by the visitor center/tourist office at the bottom of Monte Titano.
  • San Marino stayed neutral in both World Wars. Talk about minding your own business, haha. They even offered Hitler asylum (yikes), but then took in thousands of refugees from surrounding areas. So… mixed history there.
  • It’s tax-free heaven. Because it’s not part of the EU, people come here to shop tax-free. Expect perfume, watches, and leather bags galore.
  • They vote for two presidents. Every six months. Yes, six. They’re called Captains Regent, and it’s clearly been working for them.
  • It’s named after a real guy. Saint Marinus, a stonemason who became a saint and founded the country. Hence, San Marino! 

Frequently Asked Questions

How Long to Spend in San Marino: While you can easily spend all day in San Marino, especially if you wanna take advantage of all the quirky little museums, I spent around 5-6 hours wandering around and that was sufficient for me! 

Crowds in San Marino: A day trip from Florence to San Marino isn’t exactly on everyone’s Italy itinerary, so thankfully I found the crowds to be super manageable. Even during the high season in summer. A visit in the shoulder season (March to May and September to November) will be even less busy!  

Is English spoken? The official language in San Marino is Italian – everything from menus to street signs is in it. But thanks to the steady stream of tourists, English is fairly common, especially in restaurants, shops, and among younger locals. You won’t have trouble getting around if you don’t speak Italian, but it never hurts to learn a few basics (like ciao and grazie)! 

Fun fact: Although Sammarinese speak Italian, they’re exceptionally proud of their culture. So don’t call them Italians! San Marino also has its own traditional dialect – the Sammarinese variety of Romagnol. It’s mostly spoken by the older generation, and sadly, it’s now endangered. Linguists estimate it could go extinct after 2040 if preservation efforts don’t step in. So while you’ll likely never hear it on your visit, it’s a unique part of the country’s cultural identity.

Is a day trip to San Marino expensive? Honestly, not really! Even though you’re technically crossing into a whole new country (which sounds fancy), it’s actually super doable on a budget. The roundtrip bus from Rimini only cost me €12, and entry to the towers and museums is just a few euros each. Wandering the medieval streets, checking out the views, and snapping pics? Totally free. Plus, there’s plenty of restaurants and cafes where you can grab a meal without breaking the bank. 

That said, the roundtrip train ticket from Florence was a bit pricier than I expected – around €75 total. But considering it got me halfway across Italy and into a new country in just a few hours? Still 100% worth it in my book. I think I spent about €120 for the whole day (transport there and back, food, etc), and for a spontaneous border hop into one of the smallest countries in the world? Not bad at all.

Things to do in San Marino in One Day

Hike Between the Three Towers

This is the main thing to do on any Florence to San Marino day trip. And my favorite part of my visit! The trails are short but super scenic, and you’re never far from sweeping mountain views or stone pathways that look like something out of a fairy tale. Definitely do the first two towers and hike between them – skip the third unless you’re feeling very ambitious and the weather is cool. 

Psst – there’s free access to towers and museums for teachers, so bring your school staff ID!!! It was such a pleasant surprise when I was at the ticket counter about to purchase my entrance fee and didn’t have to. I love when places recognize the work teachers do! And in this case, an entire country! Thank you San Marino!

Here’s a bit about each one:

Rocca della Guaita (Prima Torre/First Tower)

This is the biggest and most iconic of San Marino’s three towers – and honestly, the main reason I took a day trip to San Marino! It’s the oldest stone fortress in the country (built way back in the 11th century!) and looks like something out of a medieval movie. Super photogenic, especially from the outside. Prima Torre (the First Tower) is even on the national flag AND the coat of arms of San Marino. Plus, it’s been a World Heritage Site since 2008!

From the top, you can see the other two towers, the surrounding countryside, and even the Adriatic Sea far off in the distance. PLUS the coastal (Italian) city of Rimini. If you can, go as high as you can within the tower – there’s some steep stairs and even a ladder at the end, but if you’re able, definitely go for it. It looked a bit nerve wracking at first but I made it up (and then back down).

Pretty amazing if you ask me! So many panoramic views! I loved exploring the small St. Barbara’s Chapel, the watchtower, and the bell tower. 

I explored the inside too (it’s a small museum now). Bring your camera for this one; it’s the one that pops up in all the postcards for a reason. So much history and architecture over here.

Once you’re done exploring Guaita (the first tower), continue on the path towards Cesta, the second tower.

Cesta Tower (Second Tower)

You can actually hike over to this one from the first tower – it’s not far and the walk is really scenic, with views all along the way and so many butterflies flying around (which I loved). The second tower is also a museum (Museum of Ancient Arms) and honestly worth the stop if you’re already on your way. Inside you’ll see everything from ancient weapons, uniforms, suits of armor, experimental weapons, and even prototypes. 

Most people say the first tower has the best views, but I have to disagree. I give that prize to Cesta, the second tower, simply because you actually get views of Guaita (which is impossible from Guaita itself, haha). Plus, it’s the highest at 755 meters above sea level!

Montale Tower (Third Tower)

Yeah… I’ll be real with you – skip this one. The Third Tower is the least impressive of all three. The hike there and back was super hot and tiring (through the forest on uneven cobblestone), and the tower itself isn’t even open to the public (and it’s the smallest of the three). No museum, no epic views like the others. Unless you’re dying for the extra exercise, it’s not worth the (long-ish) detour in the heat in my opinion.

Quirky Museums + Other Fun Finds in San Marino

While the Three Towers are definitely the star of the show, there’s more to explore in San Marino’s hilltop old town – especially if you’re into offbeat museums, scenic plazas, and casual wandering.

You’ll find a handful of quirky, bite-sized museums scattered throughout the historic center. If you’ve got extra time (or just want to escape the sun for a bit), check out the Museum of Curiosities, filled with odd inventions and fun facts from around the world. It’s weird in a good way, and perfect if you’re visiting with kids or just enjoy random, obscure trivia.

San Marino also has a surprisingly dark side when it comes to museums – think the Museum of Torture, the Vampire Museum, and the Wax Museum. These aren’t for everyone, but they definitely add some edge to what might otherwise feel like a super quaint day. Personally, I opted out of the museums, but they’re popular with visitors who enjoy that kind of morbid history. And it’s a great way to get outta the scorching sun.

A bit more traditional is the State Museum, home to local archaeological finds and cultural artifacts. It’s small, but a nice way to get a feel for San Marino’s incredibly long history – this is the world’s oldest republic, after all.

Piazza della Liberta + Palazzo Pubblico

Don’t miss Piazza della Liberta, one of the prettiest corners of the old town. This is where you’ll find the Palazzo Pubblico, aka San Marino’s government building. Stick around for the changing of the guard, which takes place every 30 minutes during the summer months – it’s surprisingly formal for such a tiny country, and definitely worth seeing if you’re already in the area. I somehow missed this on my day trip to San Marino (I was probably too busy oohing and aahing at all the views from the towers!).

Local tip: There’s free public wi-fi throughout this area, which is super helpful if you need to check transit times, download offline maps, or pull up a digital ticket (like I did). 

Views, Views, and More Views

Honestly, one of the best things to do in San Marino is just wander. The entire old town is perched on a mountain ridge, so you’ll find sweeping views around every corner – on a clear day, you can see all the way to the Adriatic Sea! 

It reminded me a little of Sintra in Portugal, but with far fewer crowds and a more mellow vibe. No colorful palaces here, but the pale stone buildings, medieval atmosphere, and quiet charm really grew on me. I’d take this over the chaos of more popular spots any day.

Shopping and Cafes

San Marino is duty-free, so if you’re into shopping, you might find some good deals – especially on leather goods, watches, perfume, and alcohol. That said, the old town shops are mostly geared toward tourists, and while it’s fun to browse, don’t expect super unique or artisanal products. Still, it’s worth poking around the side streets where prices tend to be lower and crowds thinner.

There’s also no shortage of cafes and casual wine bars, many with outdoor seating and dreamy views. It’s the perfect place to stop for a cappuccino, a quick piadina (local flatbread sandwich), or an Aperol spritz. I had a delicious bowl of pasta overlooking the countryside before heading back to Florence (for even more pasta, haha). 

So there ya have it, exactly how to do a day trip to San Marino from Florence! Overall, all good things to say about the tiny Republic of San Marino. Although, I think one visit is most likely enough, haha (meaning I won’t be making the long trek next time I’m in Italy). 

The post My Florence to San Marino Day Trip: Medieval Towers, Hilltop Views, and Zero Crowds appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/florence-to-san-marino-day-trip/feed/ 0
One Week in Provence Itinerary: The Perfect Provence Road Trip https://apassionandapassport.com/one-week-in-provence-itinerary/ https://apassionandapassport.com/one-week-in-provence-itinerary/#respond Mon, 22 Sep 2025 06:05:25 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=32633 Headed to the South of France and looking to visit Provence? Here’s the ultimate week in Provence itinerary guide! If you’ve been dreaming of lavender fields, medieval villages, and maybe a little seaside time on the French Riviera, Provence is your spot. It’s one of those places that feels straight out of a painting –Continue Reading

The post One Week in Provence Itinerary: The Perfect Provence Road Trip appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Headed to the South of France and looking to visit Provence? Here’s the ultimate week in Provence itinerary guide!

If you’ve been dreaming of lavender fields, medieval villages, and maybe a little seaside time on the French Riviera, Provence is your spot. It’s one of those places that feels straight out of a painting – hilltop towns, vineyards, and rosé practically on tap. Such a dreamy area, and one I was super eager to finally visit!

You could easily spend months exploring the region, but if you’ve only got 5 days to a week in Provence, don’t worry – I’ve got you covered. This itinerary blends the best of the area: those iconic rolling lavender fields (if you’re here in season), charming villages perched on cliffs, long lunches with a glass of local wine, vibrant markets, and even a taste of the coast (including kayaking at the Calanques). We spent a week roadtripping Provence and it was one of our best trips yet! I just loved that laid-back sensory-rich lifestyle.

Here’s exactly how I spent my very own week in Provence, plus plenty of tips to help you craft an epic trip of your own.

Week in Provence Itinerary Logistics 

Where is Provence 

Provence isn’t just one town – it’s an entire region in the southeast of France, tucked between the Rhône River and the Mediterranean Sea. It stretches from the foothills of the Alps down to the coastline of the French Riviera, which means you’ll find everything from lavender fields and vineyards to sun-soaked fishing villages and seaside cliffs.

Provence is part of the larger Provence-Alpes-Côte d’Azur (PACA) region, which also includes the French Riviera cities like Nice, Cannes, and Monaco, as well as the Alpine towns farther north. In terms of location, it’s north of Marseille, west of the French Riviera, and just a few hours by train from Paris, making it easy to add to a France itinerary.

The area is made up of dozens of towns and villages, each with its own character – from larger cultural hubs like Avignon and Aix-en-Provence to tiny medieval hill towns like Gordes and Roussillon, and coastal gems like Cassis. The magic of Provence is that you don’t just stick to one spot – you road trip (or train hop) your way around, stringing together a mix of cities, villages, and countryside.

How to Get to Provence 

For your Provence itinerary, you’ll of course need to get there first! And thankfully, getting to Provence is easier than you might think – and you have a few options depending on where you’re coming from. The region is served by several airports, with Marseille Provence Airport being the biggest and most convenient for most travelers. You can also fly into Nice Côte d’Azur Airport if you want to start your trip along the French Riviera, or Avignon’s small airport for a quieter, more central entry point.

If you’re coming from Paris, trains are a great option. The high-speed TGV can get you to Avignon, Aix-en-Provence, or Marseille in around 3 hours, which is perfect if you want to skip the hassle of airports and rental cars for the start of your trip. 

Speaking of cars – renting a car is highly recommended if you want to explore the smaller villages and countryside, since public transport doesn’t reach all the hill towns and lavender fields.

Provence is also easy to reach by car from other parts of France – it’s a 2 – 3 hour drive from Lyon or Montpellier and just under 10 hours from Paris if you prefer a scenic road trip. Once you’re there, having a car gives you the freedom to hop between villages, vineyards, and viewpoints at your own pace – which is honestly the best way to experience the region.

We were coming from Cinque Terre, which ended up being a super long travel day. We took the train from Monterosso to Genoa (where we got some much-needed snacks), then hopped on another train from Genoa to Nice, with a short stop in Ventimiglia along the way. We finally picked up our rental car in Nice and finished the journey to Provence. 

It took over eight hours, multiple train changes, and a 2 hour drive. Combining Cinque Terre with my Provence itinerary and the French Riviera probably wasn’t the best idea I’ve ever had, but hey – we made it work! Just know it can be done!

How to Get Around Provence 

Renting a Car

As I noted above, renting a car is by far the easiest way to explore Provence, especially if you wanna hit the hilltop villages, lavender fields, and vineyards at your own pace. I mean, it’s a Provence road trip afterall! Driving gives you the freedom to wander down winding country roads, stop at viewpoints, and explore towns that aren’t easy to reach by public transport. Honestly, it’s one of the best ways to experience the region.

The beauty of Provence is that you don’t just stay in one place. Instead, you hop around, exploring one postcard-perfect town after another, which makes it the perfect destination for a road trip.

Psst – I like to search this site to see what supplier has the best deal going on. Also, remember to double check if the car is manual or automatic transmission – many cars in Europe are manual. They’re typically less expensive than renting an automatic, but only rent one if you can actually drive one!

Driving in Provence: Roads in Provence are generally well-maintained, but many of the smaller villages have narrow, cobblestone streets and limited parking, so be prepared to park outside the center and walk in. Roundabouts are common, and locals drive fast, so a little patience goes a long way. 

There were a few moments when we drove down really tiny, winding streets (like crazy narrow), and we honestly weren’t sure we’d make it through. My husband handled all the driving on our Provence road trip – and let’s just say I’m really glad he’s a better driver than I am!

Guided Day Tours

Don’t wanna rent a car? No problem – you can still see plenty of this Provence itinerary. Base yourself in a larger town like Aix-en-Provence (my choice) or Avignon and book guided day tours. These tours often cover multiple villages or scenic routes, such as lavender fields during the blooming season. 

Many tours also include wine tastings, local markets, or historical sites, providing a comprehensive experience without the need for a car. Definitely book in advance if you’re visiting during high season (these tours are popular for a reason!). 

Here’s a few guided day tours that I would have booked if we didn’t rent a car:

Trains and Regional Buses

There’s also trains and regional buses connecting the larger towns, which work well if you’re sticking mostly to cities and a few nearby villages.

  • ZOU! Regional Bus Network: Operated by the Provence-Alpes-Côte d’Azur Region, ZOU! offers extensive bus services connecting towns and villages across the region. These buses are ideal for reaching destinations not served by trains. 
  • TER Sud Provence-Alpes-Côte d’Azur: The regional train network, known as TER (Transport Express Régional), connects major cities like Marseille, Aix-en-Provence, Avignon, and Nice. These trains are convenient for intercity travel and accessing nearby towns. 

But to be completely honest, a Provence road trip really is the way to go. I’d only opt for day tours and public transit if driving is definitely not a possibility. 

When to Plan Your Provence Itinerary 

Spring (March – May): Spring is a beautiful time to visit if you want mild weather and fewer crowds. Daytime temperatures usually range from 55–70°F (13–21°C), perfect for exploring villages and countryside without the summer heat.

Summer (June – August): Summer is peak season in Provence, and LAVENDER season (typically from late June to mid July)! Daytime highs can reach 85–95°F (29–35°C), especially inland, so be prepared for intense heat (and slather on that sunscreen). Coastal areas along the French Riviera are slightly cooler (hooray!) but busier (womp womp).

A note on lavender season: If seeing lavender fields is a priority during your week in Provence (like it was for me!), aim for late June through mid July, depending on the year. The most famous fields are around Valensole Plateau, Luberon, and Sault, so plan your route accordingly. Depending on the heat, some lavender fields will be harvested earlier than others, so you may need to drive around to find patches still in bloom.

For reference, I planned our Provence itinerary for early July and had really great weather! Yes, it was hot, especially inland, and we unfortunately came across a lot of bees at our hotel pools, but it didn’t stop us from enjoying the sun-soaked afternoons, relaxing by the pool, and exploring nearby villages. And it was peak lavender season, meaning tons of time in the fields and lots of lavender ice cream!

Fall (September – October): I kinda wish we visited in early fall (although I am glad we got to see the stunning lavender fields). Temps range from 65–80°F (18–27°C), still warm enough for outdoor meals and wine tasting, while the crowds thin out and vineyards are busy with harvest season.

Winter (November – February): Winters are quiet and peaceful. Daytime highs usually sit around 50–60°F (10–16°C), while nights can drop into the 30s–40s°F (0–5°C). It’s too cold for lavender or beach days, but perfect for exploring villages and cultural sites without the crowds, plus accommodations are often cheaper.

Is a week in Provence enough?

I certainly think so! Our Provence itinerary was exactly a week, and we were able to visit half a dozen villages and charming cities, go market shopping, run through the lavender fields, go paddleboating on the stunning Verdon Gorge, and eat to our hearts’ content. I was satisfied with our time there and don’t feel like we missed anything major. 

The region is much larger than most people realize (with over 400 towns/villages), so don’t expect to visit each and every one with only a week in Provence. You’ll likely need over a month to even scratch the surface! I’ve included the ones we visited, but just know there are SO many Provence itinerary iterations you’ll come across on your research. I recommend a combination of small towns and larger cities so you don’t get bored, and of course a little time on the Mediterranean (my favorite)! 

If you want to shorten this Provence road trip to 5 days, I’d stick to Moustiers-Sainte-Marie and L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue (and the areas nearby). This gives you a perfect balance of nature, countryside drives, and charming villages, without feeling rushed.

But I really recommend a full week in Provence so you can add Cassis at the end for a taste of the Mediterranean, cliffside views, and a few relaxing beach or harbor hours!

Where to Stay in Provence 

Choosing a home base for your Provence itinerary really depends on the kind of trip you want to have – whether you’re chasing villages, vineyards, or the coast. One of the joys of Provence is that you don’t have to stay in just one place, and splitting your time between a couple of towns makes a road trip much easier.

I recommend splitting up your week in Provence into 2-3 bases from which you can explore the region. This makes it easy to see a mix of villages, countryside, and even the coast without feeling like you’re spending all your time in the car (the absolute worst).

Some hotels are absolutely gorgeous, and come with a hefty price tag. I recommend thinking about how much time you wanna enjoy the hotels, or if you’d rather be out exploring. We stayed in modest places for this trip, but I think I’d prefer splurging a bit more next time and give us time to soak in the charm and relax. This trip was very go-go-go, and while I’m glad we got to see and do so much, sometimes our bodies just crave rest (at a nice hotel with a stunning pool, haha)!

For our 7-day Provence road trip, we stayed in three separate areas and took day trips from each:

  • Moustiers-Sainte-Marie: Perfect if you want to wake up to lavender fields and hilltop village views. Staying here gave us that quintessential Provence experience, though accommodations are usually smaller boutique hotels or guesthouses rather than large resorts (which is totally cool with me!).
  • L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue: To be completely honest, we didn’t love our stay here. It was a bit too sleepy for us, we didn’t book a great place to stay (better options listed below), and in hindsight, we wish we had stayed in the much larger Aix-en-Provence instead. That said, it’s still a charming town with markets, canals, and cafés if you enjoy a slower pace. And a great base to visit other towns in the Luberon, like Gordes, Roussillon, etc.
  • Cassis: If you’re extending your Provence trip to 7 days, consider a night or two on the coast. Cassis is perfect for harbor-side walks, boat rides, and cliffside viewpoints, and you can find hotels or guesthouses with sea views and pools for a relaxing finale.
    • HPC Suites – Cassis Centre (10 minute walk to the beach, full kitchen access, and views over Cassis harbor)
    • L’Âme Bleue (beachfront apartment with 2 bedrooms and 2 bathrooms – perfect for a family!)
    • Seaview.Cassis (apartment with stunning sea views and direct beachfront access)

Other great towns to consider for your bases include Avignon, which offers a mix of city vibes and easy access to nearby villages, or Aix-en-Provence, perfect for culture lovers, foodies, and market wanderers. Regardless, I think you should split your time between larger towns and smaller villages.

Other Tips for Visiting Provence  

  • Currency: Provence is in France, so you’ll need euros (€). ATMs are widely available in towns, but smaller villages may not have easy access, so it’s good to have some cash on hand.
  • Carry cash for markets: Many local markets and small shops still prefer cash, especially for small purchases like fresh produce, cheese, or flowers. Bring a mix of coins and bills just in case.
  • Check market days in advance: Each town has its own schedule, and some markets only happen on specific days of the week. Planning ahead ensures you don’t miss the best local food and artisan goods. 
  • Markets often close mid-afternoon: Most markets in Provence start in the morning and wrap up by early afternoon (usually around 1 – 2 PM). Plan your visits accordingly if you want the full experience.
  • Language: French is the official language. English is spoken in larger tourist areas, but in small villages or local shops, it’s helpful to know a few basic phrases like bonjour (hello), merci (thank you), s’il vous plaît (please), and parlez-vous anglais? (do you speak English?).
  • Timing and crowds: Popular towns and lavender fields can get busy in summer (like, really busy), especially late June – early August. Start your days early to beat the crowds and get the best photos.
  • Be mindful of siesta hours: Some smaller shops and restaurants may close for a few hours in the afternoon, usually between 12:30–3:30 PM, so plan your shopping and meals around that.
  • Reservations for popular restaurants: Especially in summer, restaurants in smaller villages and towns can fill up quickly. Making a reservation ahead of time is definitely a good idea. If there’s anywhere you’re dying to eat at, check if they take reservations. If they do, make it ASAP once you know your dates.
  • Wear comfortable shoes: Many villages have cobblestone streets, stairs, and uneven paths, so bring sturdy, comfortable shoes for walking. With that being said, if you’ve got a stroller, be prepared to carry it up and down stairs (or bring a baby carrier instead).
  • Driving tips: If you’re renting a car, remember that many villages have narrow streets and limited parking, so plan to park outside the village center and walk in.
  • Bees near lavender: If visiting lavender fields, especially in peak bloom, watch out for bees. They’re usually harmless but can be persistent.

What to Eat in Provence 

Provence is a food lover’s dream – fresh, vibrant, and full of flavor. It was one of the things I was most excited for when visiting! Don’t miss ratatouille, tapenade, aioli, local cheeses, and olives, and if you’re a wine fan, make time for rosé from the vineyards. 

Markets are perfect for grabbing fresh bread, buttery croissants, seasonal fruits, ripe tomatoes, heirloom vegetables, nuts, and local charcuterie. You can even pick up lavender honey, artisan jams, or handmade pastries for a snack on the go. Small local restaurants serve hearty, traditional dishes that are perfect after a day of exploring villages or lavender fields. And of course, don’t skip dessert – tarts, fruit galettes, and lavender-infused treats are everywhere! Yum!

Week in Provence Road Trip Itinerary 

But first, a few notes about this Provence itinerary:

  • This Provence itinerary assumes you have a full 7 days in the region. Meaning if your flight arrives mid-day or late at night, you’ll want an extra day in order to see and do all the things on this itinerary.
  • You’ll want to check market days before visiting. Don’t assume the markets will be open every day of the week, even in high season. I wouldn’t necessarily switch your flight for the markets, but it’s fun to experience one or two!
  • We rented a car, so this Provence itinerary assumes you do the same. Visiting the highlights is possible without one, but you definitely will have a harder time finding transport to the smaller villages.
  • Start your days early if you want to beat crowds at popular villages, lavender fields, and viewpoints. It’s a truly stunning region, and its popularity shows!

Provence Itinerary At-A-Glance 

  • Day 1: Lavender fields and Moustiers-Sainte-Marie
  • Day 2: Verdon Gorge and Nearby
  • Day 3: l’isle Sur La Sorgue and Fontaine de Vaucluse
  • Day 4: Rousillon and Gordes 
  • Day 5: Aix-en-Provence and Marsailles
  • Day 6: Cassis 
  • Day 7: Cassis  

Day 1: Lavender Fields and Moustiers-Sainte-Marie

Morning: Lavender fields near Valensole at sunrise!

No summer in Provence feels complete without lavender – it’s the very essence of a Provençal summer after all! And where better to see it than the Plateau de Valensole, home to the most iconic lavender fields in all of France (and maybe even the world)!

Yes, I’m telling you to wake up early on the first day of this Provence road trip – but trust me, sunrise is worth it. At golden hour, the fields glow in soft light, the crowds are minimal, and your photos turn out so much better without those harsh midday shadows. Even if you’re not here in peak season (late June to mid-July), the drive itself is beautiful, with rolling hills of olive groves and sunflowers.

I loved the fields so much I dragged my husband back for sunset, too (he wasn’t thrilled, haha). Sunset is more crowded than sunrise, but the colors are just as magical.

Photography + Practical Tips
If you want those classic Provençal shots, bring a white dress and straw hat (like I did!). Just be mindful of the fields: walk between the rows (definitely not on them) since lavender is delicate. And don’t be surprised by the bees – they’re everywhere, but as long as you leave them alone, they’ll (most likely) leave you alone too.

Quick note: Lavender is usually harvested by early August, but timing depends on the heat. Check recent posts on Instagram or Google Map reviews before you head out so you don’t wake up at dawn for an empty field.

Must-See Lavender Spots on the Plateau de Valensole

  • Tiny Stone House in the Valley: Probably the most photogenic spot on the plateau. It sits tucked into a dip in the field, so you’ll barely see it from the road (Google Maps coordinates: 43.893751, 6.116192). You’ll need to walk in a bit to get the view – but once you spot it, it’s magic.
  • Lavandes Angelevin: A picture-perfect combo of lavender and sunflowers, just 15 minutes from the stone house. We skipped this one since we already have sunflower fields back home in California, but if you don’t – go!
  • Other Fields Along Route de la Lavande: Honestly, the whole plateau is covered in fields. Drive around, pull off when you see a pretty spot, and just wander. Some people even rent bikes to explore more slowly.

We visited the tiny town of Valensole afterwards, and to be quite honest, didn’t find much there. I’m not sure if we visited during an off time (or if it was just too early before the town woke up), but I wouldn’t mind skipping it next time. Especially since there’s so many other charming villages nearby!

Afternoon: Explore Moustiers-Sainte-Marie

Once you’re done smelling the lavender (and taking a million pictures), it’s time to explore the charming village of Moustiers-Sainte-Marie!

Moustiers is one of those villages that looks like it was designed for postcards – pastel shutters, cobblestone lanes, and dramatic cliffs rising up behind it. Plan to spend about 4 – 5 hours here, which is enough time to wander, shop, and relax without rushing.

Here’s what to include on your visit:

  • Ceramic shops: Moustiers is famous for its faïence pottery, a tradition dating back to the Middle Ages. Even if you don’t plan to buy anything, it’s fun to pop into the little ateliers and browse.
  • The star of Moustiers: Look up and you’ll see the golden star hanging between two cliffs above the town. Legend says it was placed there by a knight returning from the Crusades, and it’s become the town’s symbol.
  • Notre-Dame de Beauvoir Chapel: If you’re up for a climb (about 262 stone steps), head up to this small chapel above the town. The view over Moustiers and the valley is incredible.
  • Waterfall views: A stream runs through the center of town, cascading down into little waterfalls. It makes the whole village feel extra fairytale-like.
  • Lunch or coffee in the square: Take a break in one of the cafés in Place de l’Église, perfect for people-watching and soaking up the atmosphere.
  • Église Notre-Dame de l’Assomption: Right in the heart of town, this Romanesque church is worth stepping inside for a quick look.

If you have a bit of extra time, you could also browse the weekly market (if your visit falls on a Friday morning/early afternoon by chance). 

Where to Stay: Moustiers-Sainte-Marie 

Day 2: Verdon Gorge and Beyond

Morning: Paddling on Verdon Gorge

No trip to Provence is complete without seeing the Verdon Gorge, often called the Grand Canyon of France. The turquoise water is absolutely unreal in person (don’t just trust me, see it for yourself!). And it’s only 15 minutes from Moustiers, meaning you can’t not go! 

Ever since that first photo I saw of the gorge on social media, I knew I needed to add it to our Provence road trip. And WHOA – I’m so glad we did! We had such a fun morning paddling around and taking in the views.

I have an entire blog post dedicated to our time paddling around Verdon Gorge (go check that out!), but here’s a few quick notes:

  • Rent a kayak or paddle boat right at the bridge at Pont du Galetas (the most popular access point). Rentals usually cost about €20 – €25 for an hour and go up if you want longer. Kayaks, canoes, and pedal boats are all available.
  • In July and August, lines can get long, so aim to arrive by 9:30 – 10am if you want to avoid waiting.
  • Expect to paddle about 2 km into the gorge – the cliffs rise dramatically above you, and it’s pure magic.
  • There’s no facilities once you’re in the gorge, so bring snacks, drinks, sunscreen, and water shoes if you’ve got them. The rocky edges aren’t fun barefoot. We stocked up on drinks and snacks in town the day before (there’s not tons at Verdon Gorge, although a few options for drinks and ice cream which we happily bought afterwards).
  • Swimming is allowed, but the water is chilly even in summer – refreshing after paddling!

And yes, wear that bright swimsuit – it pops against the blue water in photos. 

Late Morning: Scenic Drive

If you’ve still got energy, take the Route des Crêtes (Ridge Road). The 23 km loop is packed with jaw-dropping viewpoints. Some of the most famous stops include Belvédère de la Carelle and Balcon de la Mescla. Allow 1.5–2 hours with photo stops. 

We decided to skip this because we were already pretty knocked out after all that time in the sun at the gorge and my husband didn’t wanna add extra time to our already pretty long drive to L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue (our next base).

Afternoon: Stop at L’Occitane en Provence

You’re in Provence! Meaning you’ve gotta stop at L’Occitane en Provence! On your way out of the gorge area, make a quick stop at the L’Occitane factory in Manosque (about an hour’s drive). 

You can book a tour in advance (around €6 per person) or just shop at the boutique. It’s one of those places that are right on the way so might as well go check it out! We picked up a few hand creams and they all smelled so good!

Afternoon: Optional Detours

  • Apt: This town is famous for its candied fruit (fruits confits) and local markets. If you’re there on a Saturday morning, the market is a must-see, offering cheeses, olives, lavender products, and regional specialties. It’s also a good lunch/snack stop before heading to L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue.
  • Saignon: A picturesque hilltop village with cobblestone streets, small cafés, and panoramic views over the Luberon valley. It’s a perfect 30 – 45 minute stop to stretch your legs and take photos.

Evening: Drive to L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue

From the gorge, it’s about a 2.5-hour drive to L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue (or less from Apt or Saignon), where you’ll base yourself next. 

Where to Stay: L’Isle -sur-la-Sorgue or nearby town

Day 3: l’isle Sur La Sorgue and nearby towns

Morning: Explore L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue 

Start your morning wandering through L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue, a riverside town with canals, waterwheels, and a laid-back Provençal vibe. It’s often called the antiques capital of Provence, and you’ll see why – antique shops and art galleries line the streets.

If you’re lucky enough to be here on a Sunday, don’t miss the famous market (7am – 2pm). It’s one of the largest in Provence (it’s huge!), with antiques, Provençal linens, soaps, fresh produce, cheeses, olives, and tons more spilling throughout the town. We didn’t buy much (no space in our small suitcases since we were traveling for 3 weeks in a carry-on), but it was still super fun to look at everything and even more fun to people-watch! 

PS – if you’re visiting L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue for the market and not staying overnight like we were, it will be extremely difficult to find a parking spot. Plan to arrive by 9am (the latest!) and pray you get a spot!

If you’re not here on a Sunday, there’s a smaller version on Thursdays that still brings plenty of charm. And if tomorrow happens to be Sunday for you, you can easily switch around Day 3 and Day 4! Or even swing by the market on Day 5 before heading to Aix-en-Provence if that’s when Sunday is.

We had lunch at Restaurant Le Vivier, just outside the center. It’s a Michelin-recognized spot right on the river – perfect if you’re looking for a special meal (you’re in Provence – that’s reason enough for something special!). It was recommended to us by friends (they raved about it), and it was worth the short drive outta town. Otherwise, there are plenty of cafés and bistros in town.

Afternoon: Driving Loop Through the Luberon Villages

After lunch, hit the road for a mini loop through some of the most charming villages in the Luberon. Provence is perfect for scenic drives and aimless wandering through its villages, so that’s exactly what I recommend doing next! Here’s a few recommendations!

  • Fontaine-de-Vaucluse (15 min from L’Isle): Home to the emerald-green Sorgue River, which gushes straight out of the rocks. The walk to the spring is short and scenic, though this spot can feel touristy, so plan for just a quick stop.
  • Ménerbes (20 min from Fontaine): A quiet, picture-perfect hilltop village surrounded by vineyards and olive groves. Picasso once lived here (yes, THE Picasso), and it’s a lovely place for a stroll with fewer crowds.
  • Bonnieux (15 min from Ménerbes): A gorgeous medieval village with some of the best valley views in Provence. Climb up to the old church for a sweeping panorama, or simply wander the cobblestone streets with a gelato or coffee in hand.
  • Lourmarin (optional, 30 min from Bonnieux): If time allows, continue to Lourmarin, one of the most stylish villages in the region. Known for its Renaissance château, boutique shops, and lively Friday market, it’s a fun spot to end the afternoon.

Psst: If you’d rather visit Avignon instead, this is the perfect day to do so since it’s only about a 35 minute drive west from L’Isle -sur-la-Sorgue. BUT I heard Avignon is pretty city-like and we wanted more of a village storybook feel, so we skipped it! Saint-Rémy-de-Provence also isn’t far from L’Isle -sur-la-Sorgue, but we couldn’t fit everything in and had to pick and choose, so again, skipped it! Saint-Remy is further from the other villages, so we prioritized the ones in the Luberon Valley.

From here, drive back toward L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue for the evening (1 hour from Lourmarin, or 35 min if heading straight back from Bonnieux).

Where to Stay: L’Isle -sur-la-Sorgue or nearby town

Day 4:  Rousillon and Gordes 

Time to visit two of the most popular villages in all of Provence – Roussillon and Gordes! Roussillon is famous for its ochre cliffs (you can walk the Ochre Trail for insane colors), while Gordes is your classic hilltop village with sweeping valley views. I highly recommend visiting both as they’ve got extremely different feels.

Morning: Roussillon

Kick off your day in Roussillon, a village that looks like it’s been painted in every shade of red, orange, and gold. I swear, every single building in town is one of these few colors! It sits in the heart of Provence’s Luberon Regional Park and is famous for the ochre deposits that were once mined here. Nearly every building in town is plastered with ochre pigments, giving the streets a warm glow that changes with the light. Safe to say I absolutely loved photographing it!

Start by strolling through the narrow lanes lined with cafés, art galleries, and little shops selling local ceramics and ochre pigments you can take home (Atelier Marchand de couleurs was one of my favorites). The whole place feels like a natural art palette.

One of the best things to do here is walk the Ochre Trail (Sentier des Ocres), a short, easy hike (choose between a 30 or 60 minute loop) that winds through the ochre cliffs and abandoned quarries. The rock formations come in surreal shapes and fiery colors that contrast beautifully with the green pines above. Even if you’re not a “hiker,” it’s well worth it – just don’t wear your best shoes, because the dust will cling and white shoes will turn red (kinda like what happened to me in Uluru, Australia!).

For a little local flavor, you can also pop into the Conservatoire des Ocres et de la Couleur (Ochre Conservatory), set in a former ochre factory. It gives a deeper look into how ochre was used historically in paint, textiles, and art.

A few additional tips:

  • What to wear: If you wanna coordinate your outfit to your surroundings, white or light green outfits look amazing against the orange backdrop for photos. I recommend wearing earth tones as bold pops don’t really match!
  • Timing: Plan for 2 – 3 hours here – enough time for a relaxed wander, the Ochre Trail, and maybe a coffee or pastry in the village square.
  • Parking info: There are two main paid parking lots at the edge of the village (follow the “Parking” signs as you approach). They’re just a short 5 – 10 minute walk uphill into the center, and it’s best to arrive early in the morning to snag a spot before all the other day-trippers roll in.

Afternoon: Gordes

Once you’ve soaked up all the golden tones in Roussillon, it’s just a 15-minute drive to Gordes, one of Provence’s most iconic hilltop villages. Here, take your time strolling the cobblestone streets, popping into boutiques, and soaking in the sweeping views of the Luberon valley below. I especially loved seeing the stone houses stacked into the hillside – it’s such a unique sight you don’t come across every day!

As you explore the tiny lanes, you’ll find shops selling Provençal linens, lavender products, and olive oil, along with art galleries tucked behind heavy wooden doors. We ended up relaxing with drinks at Airelles Gordes once we got sick of the summer sun, and honestly, I could’ve sat there all afternoon just taking in those incredible views.

I noticed that Gordes has a much more polished, upscale, and chic vibe compared to some of the other hilltop villages in Provence. It’s beautifully maintained, with golden-stone buildings, neatly cobbled streets, and elegant boutiques and cafés. While it still has that classic Provençal charm, it feels a bit more refined, whereas villages like Roussillon or Moustiers-Sainte-Marie feel more quaint, rustic, and lived-in. It definitely pays to visit them all to see the differences (kinda like on our Puglia road trip – another great region to road trip in Europe)!

Honestly, Gordes is more about aimlessly strolling, sipping rosé, and taking in the sweeping valley views than actual things to check off. But here’s a few if you’d like to structure out your afternoon a bit.

  • Gordes Viewpoint: This is the classic photo spot you’ve seen in all the IG posts and postcards. Stop here for a panoramic shot of the town clinging to the cliffs. We stopped here on our way out since the lighting was nicer later in the afternoon. Put in “Town View Point Gordes” on Google Maps and you’ll find it right away. Note that there’s a small parking spot a bit further down the road, but it does get busy. Thankfully most people only stay a few minutes, so you can usually grab a spot without waiting too long.
  • Lunch in Gordes: If you’re looking for a splurge-worthy meal, I HIGHLY recommend Hotel Les Bories & Spa. It’s set in a peaceful location with a poolside restaurant and Michelin-star dining. Perfect for a leisurely Provençal lunch before continuing your sightseeing. We LOVED this spot, and after seeing the hotel grounds a bit, we kinda wish we had splurged and stayed here for a night!
  • Saint Firmin Palace and Cellars: Step inside this Renaissance palace to explore its underground rooms and wine cellars carved right into the rock.
  • Village des Bories (just outside town): An open-air museum showcasing traditional dry-stone huts that once served as shelters and farm buildings.
  • Abbaye Notre-Dame de Sénanque: A working abbey surrounded by lavender fields (best viewed late June to mid-July). It’s one of the most photographed lavender spots in Provence (for good reason). When we visited midday it was especially crowded and parking was practically nonexistent so we only saw it from afar.

Where to Stay: L’Isle -sur-la-Sorgue or nearby town

Day 5: Aix-en-Provence and Marseilles

Morning: Aix-en-Provence

This was probably one of our favorite stops on our entire Provence road trip! I think we were starting to crave larger towns after a few days in such remote tiny villages, so we really enjoyed the lively energy. AND the entire city is downright gorgeous. There’s tons of elegant squares, more fountains than you could ever imagine, pastel-colored facades, and leafy streets. 

Aix is a vibrant, elegant university town with a mix of history, culture, and modern life. It has a more urban, polished feel than the smaller hilltop villages, but it still keeps that Provençal charm. The city feels lively, with cafés spilling onto squares, street performers, and students giving it an energetic buzz.

While I could honestly stroll the small city all day, here’s a few highlights not to miss:

  • Stroll Cours Mirabeau: The wide, tree-lined boulevard is the heart of Aix, perfect for a morning coffee or breakfast outdoors. Enjoy the fountains, lively cafés, and people-watching.
  • Explore Vieil Aix (Old Town): Wander the narrow streets, charming squares, artisan shops, and pastel-colored façades. Aimless wandering here is a must!
  • Visit the Markets: Aix has fantastic markets for fresh produce, flowers, olive oil, cheeses, and local specialties. The biggest is on Saturdays, but smaller ones happen Tuesday and Thursday.
  • See the Fountains: Aix is known as the “City of a Thousand Fountains.” Don’t miss the decorative ones like Fontaine de la Rotonde and others sprinkled through the streets.
  • Paul Cézanne’s Studio & Nearby Landscapes: Visit the studio of the famous painter and stroll through spots that inspired his work. Great for art and history lovers.
  • Grab a Light Lunch or Pastry: Stop at a café in one of the picturesque squares to soak up the lively, elegant Aix vibe before heading to your next destination.

Afternoon: Marseille 

It’s time to head to the coast! Marseille is a bustling, gritty, and culturally rich port city with a very different feel from the quaint villages of Provence. It’s energetic and diverse, blending modern urban life with historic charm. The city has a vibrant arts scene, colorful neighborhoods, and a strong Mediterranean identity. It feels rawer and more lived-in than polished towns like Gordes or Aix, which is part of its appeal.

Here’s how you can spend the rest of your day:

  • Old Port (Vieux-Port): Start your afternoon strolling along the harbor. Watch the fishermen sell their catch, admire the boats, and maybe grab a coffee or rosé at one of the waterfront cafés. We got ice cream and sat on a bench overlooking the port – my favorite thing to do!
  • Le Panier: Wander through Marseille’s oldest neighborhood just a short walk from the port. There’s lots of little artisan shops to explore (with plenty of places to buy the famous decorative soaps), street art, and charming squares.
  • Basilique Notre-Dame de la Garde: Take a taxi, bus, or drive up to this iconic hilltop church for panoramic views of the city and coastline. It’s a must-see landmark and perfect for photos. We passed by on our drive but were itching to get to the coast so we just admired it from the car window.

End the day by driving to Cassis (only about 45 minutes away) – the last official stop on this Provence road trip itinerary!

Where to Stay: Cassis

Days 6-7: Cassis 

If you’ve got a full week in Provence, head to the coast for a change of scenery – specifically, the postcard-perfect town of Cassis. Tucked between dramatic limestone cliffs and the sparkling Mediterranean, Cassis is like a low-key, charming cousin to the glitzy Riviera hotspots like Nice or Cannes.

The waterfront is lined with colorful old buildings, fishing boats, and casual spots to grab a drink or bite to eat. It’s the kind of place where you can just wander, sit by the water, and not feel like you have to do much of anything.

Cassis is often compared to St. Tropez, but it’s much more low-key – no big scene, just good food, great views, and a slower rhythm. It’s also the jumping-off point for visiting the Calanques, which you definitely need to do while here!

Even though there’s not TONS to do in this charming seaside town (no FOMO allowed!), here’s a few recommendations for your 2 days in Cassis. Whatever you do, don’t miss the Calanques!

Port de Cassis

The harbor in Cassis (Port de Cassis) is the heart of the town and the perfect spot to hang out. We grabbed a table by the water and ended up people (and boat) watching for way longer than planned. With pastel houses lining the waterfront and fishing boats bobbing in front, it’s ridiculously photogenic and full of buzzing restaurants.

Some of the restaurants are crazy overpriced though, so definitely scope out the menu before you sit down. For food, I’d go with Chez Gilbert if you want a proper bouillabaisse or Le Grand Large for fresh oysters and grilled fish. A lot of places do prix-fixe menus at lunch that are way more affordable than dinner, which is perfect if you want to splurge on seafood (and maybe a glass of crisp white wine) without blowing your whole budget. We loved sharing a meat and cheese board a bit before sunset!

The port gets busy, but that’s part of the vibe – colorful buildings, packed terraces, everyone lingering over long meals. And if you’re planning to see the Calanques, the boat tours leave right from here, so it’s super convenient. We found ourselves at the port multiple times a day!

Swim or sunbathe at Plage de la Grande Mer

Welcome to the Mediterranean! Time to take a tip! Plage de la Grande Mer, the main beach in Cassis, is just a quick stroll from the harbor so it’s super easy to get to. It’s family-friendly, with calm water and gorgeous views of the cliffs. Just know it’s pebbly (not sandy), so water shoes really come in handy.

The beach can get absolutely packed by midday in summer, so if you want a quieter vibe, head down in the morning or swing by closer to sunset. Shade is basically nonexistent, so bring an umbrella or plan to rent a sunbed early. There are a few kiosks and cafés nearby for snacks, but plenty of people pack a picnic and make an afternoon of it.

If you’re after clearer water and a slightly less chaotic scene, walk over to Plage du Bestouan. This smaller cove is rockier, but it’s perfect for swimming and snorkeling – and you’ll spot more locals than tourists. But don’t be fooled – it’s still wildly crowded. 

Parking near the beaches can be a real headache in peak season, so if you’re driving, aim for early morning. The lots closest to Plage de la Grande Mer fill up fast, but there’s overflow parking up the hill with a free shuttle that’ll drop you right by the beach.

Explore the colorful town center

Cassis is compact and super walkable, so there’s no rush – just take your time wandering the narrow streets. I loved stumbling across boutique shops selling everything from handmade ceramics to chic summer dresses, and little art galleries tucked behind heavy wooden doors. And yes, there’s even a Havaianas shop if you desperately need some new flip flops. Grab a Tarte Tropézienne from La Tarte Tropézienne Pâtisserie Viennoiserie Sandwicherie Pain, a speciality of the region.

Don’t miss the local market on Wednesdays and Fridays. It’s full of fresh produce, fragrant herbs, artisanal soaps, and colorful Provençal textiles. Too bad I was traveling carry-on only!

Take a boat tour to the Calanques

By far the #1 thing to do in Cassis – the famous turquoise Calanques! And the easiest and most relaxing way to see the famous Calanques is by boat, which is what we did – my husband isn’t exactly a hiker (fair enough, it’s his vacation too). Tours leave regularly from the Cassis harbor and range from 45 minutes to 2 hours. Even the shorter ones offer incredible views of the limestone cliffs and turquoise inlets, including Calanque de Port-Miou, Port-Pin, and the dramatic En-Vau. 

Make sure to book in advance during high season or show up early in the day for the best time slots. Bring a hat and water – there’s no shade on deck, but the views are totally worth it.

If you wanna get a little more active but stay on the water, sign up for a sea kayaking trip in the Calanques! This is the exact tour I wish we had done – it looks absolutely incredible! Next time for me!

Hike the Calanques for unforgettable views

If you’re up for some adventure, hiking into the Calanques is an incredible way to experience the landscape up close. The most popular (and most photographed) hike is to Calanque d’En-Vau, which rewards you with jaw-dropping views and a stunning beach at the end. The most common route is from the Port-Miou parking area, passing through Calanque de Port-Pin and continuing to En-Vau. 

You can either hike yourself or join a guided tour with a local (who will undoubtedly know all the best scenic spots) – that’s what I’d do if I was traveling solo (like when I hiked the Seven Hanging Valleys Trail in Portugal)!

  • Distance: ~6 km round-trip (3.7 miles)
  • Time: 2.5 – 3.5 hours depending on pace and stops
  • Difficulty: Moderate to challenging – rocky terrain, some steep sections, and little shade.

Come prepared! Wear proper shoes, bring plenty of water, and go early in the day to beat the heat and crowds. The reward? One of the most beautiful spots on the Mediterranean. Scenic hiking at its best!

Drive the Route des Crêtes and stop at Cap Canaille

This cliffside road between Cassis and La Ciotat is one of the most scenic drives in all of France, with stunningly jaw-dropping views of the Mediterranean. Cap Canaille, Europe’s highest sea cliff, is the star stop along the route, and there are several marked viewpoints (belvédères) where you can pull over for photos or just take it all in. 

I love a good viewpoint, and this one definitely lived up to my standards.

Drive it in the late afternoon for golden light, and aim to be at Cap Canaille for sunset – it’s unforgettable! Just be cautious: the road is narrow and winding, with no lights, so avoid driving it after dark.

Wine Tasting

If you have extra time (and didn’t drink enough wine earlier on your Provence road trip, wink wink), visit a nearby vineyard like Clos Sainte Magdeleine, located above the sea (meaning amazing views). Cassis is one of the oldest AOCs in France and is especially known for its crisp white wines. Tastings are usually by appointment, so call ahead or check online.

Where to Stay: Cassis

So there ya have it – my highly recommended one week in Provence road trip! Are you headed to France anytime soon?!



The post One Week in Provence Itinerary: The Perfect Provence Road Trip appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/one-week-in-provence-itinerary/feed/ 0
Day Trip to Alberobello: Things to do in Alberobello and Full Trulli Guide https://apassionandapassport.com/day-trip-to-alberobello-puglia/ https://apassionandapassport.com/day-trip-to-alberobello-puglia/#respond Sun, 08 Dec 2024 09:03:47 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=31885 Headed to Southern Italy and wanna take a day trip to Alberobello? Follow this one day Alberobello itinerary to explore the iconic Trulli houses, try local delicacies, and take in the town’s unique atmosphere – all while soaking up centuries of history and stunning views! All my favorite things to do in Alberobello, coming rightContinue Reading

The post Day Trip to Alberobello: Things to do in Alberobello and Full Trulli Guide appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Headed to Southern Italy and wanna take a day trip to Alberobello? Follow this one day Alberobello itinerary to explore the iconic Trulli houses, try local delicacies, and take in the town’s unique atmosphere – all while soaking up centuries of history and stunning views! All my favorite things to do in Alberobello, coming right up!

As soon as we booked our Puglia road trip, I knew we needed to take a day trip to Alberobello. I’d seen photos of those whimsical Trulli houses with their iconic cone-shaped roofs literally all over social media, and knew I needed to see them for myself. 

Was Alberobello worth a visit?! 1000% yes, but I’m glad we visited in the early AM before all the bus tours arrived, haha. It’s definitely one of Puglia’s most touristy spots… don’t say I didn’t warn ya!

Alberobello is a place where old-world charm meets laid-back vibes. There’s rows of Trulli houses, narrow cobblestone streets, cozy trattorias, and sun-kissed courtyards. And tons of fresh pasta, golden focaccia, and irresistible olive oil products. All surrounded by quirky shops with hand-painted ceramics and unique souvenirs.

So what’s so special about Alberobello anyways? Well, it’s one of Italy’s most charming and unique destinations, famous for its UNESCO-listed Trulli houses — and there’s over 1,000 of them over here! These traditional conical stone dwellings date back to the 14th century – and they’re a real architectural gem. 

But wait – what’s a trullo? A trullo (plural: trulli) is a traditional stone hut with a cone-shaped roof, typically made from local limestone. The roofs are constructed using a dry-stone technique, meaning they’re built without mortar – which makes them not only unique but also surprisingly durable. 

Originally, trulli were used as farmhouses and have deep ties to the construction traditions of this region. And lemme tell you, if you get the chance like we did, I highly recommend staying in one – it’s a one-of-a-kind experience!

So let’s get to it — the best things to do in Alberobello!

Day Trip to Alberobello Logistics

Before we get into all the fun things to do in Alberobello and my recommended one day Alberobello day trip itinerary, there’s a lot of logistics to talk about first. If you’ve read any of my blog posts before you know I’m super comprehensive…

Where is Alberobello?

First of all, where is Alberobello exactly?! 

I have to admit, before doing any research for my most recent trip to Italy, I honestly had no idea where Alberobello was. So don’t feel bad if you haven’t got a clue either, lol. Sure, I had seen (plenty of) photos of those iconic trulli houses, but did I know where they were? Nope!

And before we get into the specifics, just remember that Italy is a long and narrow country, so don’t expect to be able to hop on over to Alberobello regardless of where you are in the country! For reference, Alberobello is about 500 km from Rome, 650 km from Florence, and 850 km from Venice

While it’s certainly possible to make the trip from cities like Bari (about 70 km away) or even possibly Naples (about 250 km, but not advised), planning a day trip to Alberobello from farther cities would require some serious travel time.

So where is it?! You’ll find Alberobello in one of Italy’s most southern regions — Puglia, known as the heel of Italy. Alberobello is pretty close to most of the region’s other highlights (like Polignano a Mare, Ostuni, and Locorotondo), making it a perfect stop for a day trip on a road trip through Puglia (like we did!). 

Geographically, Alberobello is surrounded by lush countryside and rolling hills, and dotted with centuries-old olive groves and vineyards, giving it a truly picturesque charm. 

The views of the valley and the endless olive groves around town are absolutely stunning (kinda like in Locorotondo), and walking through the streets of Alberobello truly feels like stepping into a charming fairy tale. I couldn’t get enough of the scenery – it’s so striking and unlike anywhere else I’ve ever been!

When to Plan your Day Trip to Alberobello 

Like much of Italy, Alberobello experiences four distinct seasons, each offering its own charm. Whether you’re drawn to the warmth and sunshine of the summer months or the more tranquil, cozy atmosphere of the cooler seasons, there’s a perfect time to visit this magical town.

Summer (High Season): June to August

Summer in Alberobello is hot and dry, with temperatures often exceeding 30°C (86°F). If you’re after the classic Italian summer vibe – with long, sunny days, outdoor festivals, and food and wine al fresco – this is the time to visit. 

That said, it’s also the peak tourist season, and while the town is lively, the crowds can be overwhelming, especially in July and August.

Personally, I’d avoid these hottest months. Why? Well, Puglia, and Alberobello in particular, is an extremely popular destination for Italian tourists, meaning it can be tough to find accommodation, and restaurants may have long waits. Plus, it gets scorching hot, making it less enjoyable to wander around town. And definitely steer clear of Ferragosto (August 15th) when the local crowds are at their peak.

If you can, plan your trip either at the very end of May or early June – just before the high season hits. During this time, the weather is ideal, the crowds are manageable, and you can still experience the magic of Alberobello without the summer chaos. 

For reference, I visited in early June, and it was perfect – sunny and vibrant, but not too crowded… until mid day that was!

Spring (Shoulder Season): March to May

Spring in Alberobello is perfect for exploring, with mild temps ranging from 15°C to 25°C (59°F to 77°F). This is the perfect time to stroll through the streets and soak in the beauty of the Trulli houses without breaking a sweat. 

Crowds are still low, especially in March and early April, making it a great time for budget travelers or anyone who enjoys a quieter atmosphere. Just be aware that Easter is a big holiday in Italy, so avoid visiting during that time if you prefer to stay away from crowds.

By May, many of the local attractions will be open, and you’ll find fewer tourists compared to the summer months. If you’re looking to enjoy Alberobello at a slower pace, spring is definitely the best time to go.

Fall (Shoulder Season): September to November

Fall in Alberobello starts warm in September, with temperatures still reaching summer levels, but by October and November, the weather cools to a comfortable 15°C to 25°C (59°F to 77°F). September still sees a decent number of tourists, but by early October, the crowds start to thin, making it a more peaceful time to visit.

Accommodation prices also drop after the summer rush, especially in late October and November, so it’s a great opportunity to book a stay in one of the town’s charming Trulli. Plus, the fall landscape around Alberobello is beautiful, with the olive groves turning golden — oh I can imagine just how gorgeous that must be!

Winter (Low Season): November to February

Winter in Alberobello is cool, with temperatures ranging from 5°C to 15°C (41°F to 59°F). While you’ll find fewer tourists and better deals on accommodation, the weather can be unpredictable, with some chilly and rainy days.

If you’re planning to visit mainly for the stunning views, the Trulli, and the peaceful atmosphere, winter might be a good time for you. But if you’re hoping for pleasant weather to enjoy the outdoors and other parts of Puglia (hello Mediterranean beaches!), I’d recommend waiting until spring or fall when temperatures are more comfortable for sightseeing.

How to Get to Alberobello

By Plane

If you’re not already in Italy, the closest major airport to Alberobello is Bari Karol Wojtyła Airport (BRI), located about 65 km (40 miles) away. Although you won’t be able to fly directly to Alberobello from outside Italy, connecting flights through Rome, Naples, or Milan are your best bet. 

Once you arrive at Bari Airport, you have several options for getting to Alberobello:

  • By Car: Renting a car is highly recommended if you’re planning to visit a few towns in Puglia as it gives you the freedom to stop and enjoy the scenic countryside. The drive from Bari to Alberobello takes about 1 hour. We LOVED having a car in Puglia and definitely recommend you do the same!
  • By Train: You can take a train from Bari to Alberobello Station, which takes about 1 hour. From the station, it’s a short walk into the town center, where you can explore the Trulli and other local attractions.
  • By Bus: Alternatively, there are buses from Bari to Alberobello that take about 1.5 hours. You can check out routes from bus companies like MarinoBus or Ferrovie Appulo Lucane (FAL).

Other nearby airports include Brindisi Airport (BDS), about 1.5 hours away by car, and Naples Airport (NAP), about 3.5 hours away. If you fly into either of these airports, you’ll most likely need to transfer to Bari to catch a train or bus to Alberobello.

By Train

Getting to Alberobello by train is straightforward. You can take a train from Bari to Alberobello Station operated by Trenitalia, Italy’s national train company, which takes about 1 hour. This is an easy and scenic option, as you’ll pass through the beautiful Puglia countryside. 

From the train station, the town center is just a short walk, where you can explore the famous Trulli houses and enjoy the local sights.

By Bus

If you prefer to skip the train and take a bus, there are several companies offering direct routes to Alberobello from various cities in Italy, including Bari, Naples, and Polignano a Mare. Expect the trip from Bari to take about 1.5 hours by bus. Companies like FlixBus, MarinoBus, and Ferrovie Appulo Lucane (FAL) operate these routes, making it an easy and affordable way to get to Alberobello.

By Organized Day Trip

And if you’d rather make it super, super easy and only have time for one day in Alberobello, definitely consider an organized tour. Hey, you’re on vacation! 

Guided day trips mean you don’t have to worry about transportation (or parking!) at all! A great option if you’re navigating Puglia without a car, or just want a super stress-free day. Many day trips visit a few towns in one day, meaning you get to see quite a lot in a short amount of time!

There’s quite a few tours depending on where you’re coming from – I’m listing some highly rated ones below:

  • From Lecce: Ostuni, Alberobello, and Polignano Tour – Visit three authentic villages on a day trip, including Ostuni (known as the “white city”), Alberobello (to see the trulli houses of course), and finally the coastal town of Polignano a Mare to take in glorious coastal views.

By Car

If you’re nearby or prefer the flexibility of driving, Alberobello is easily accessible by car. 

The A14 and SS96 highways connect the town to Bari and other parts of Puglia, and the drive offers beautiful views of rolling hills, olive groves, and vineyards. Expect a smooth drive on the main roads, though be prepared for smaller, winding roads as you approach the town.

Tip: If you’re driving to Alberobello, consider stopping in Locorotondo or Martina Franca on your way – these towns offer charming streets and authentic Puglian experiences. Once you get to Alberobello, the town is small enough to explore on foot, and you’ll likely only need your car to get to the town.

Parking in Alberobello

Finding parking in Alberobello can be tricky, especially near the historic Trulli district. The town center, especially the area around the Rione Monti and Aia Piccola districts, is a Restricted Traffic Zone (ZTL), so be careful not to drive into these areas unless you have a permit.

We parked in a HUGE grassy lot right on the outskirts of town, and while it honestly seemed a little sketch (possibly because we couldn’t figure out if the local man sitting nearby was an attendant or just hanging out…), all was fine. And there were no signs, so…? 

Plus, parking ended up being FREE, which completely threw us off – we’re used to paying for parking in touristy towns! Parking in San Francisco has definitely made us extra cautious about parking in general, haha.

Your best bet is to park on the edges of town or in one of the larger parking lots – it’s easy and hassle-free! Some good options include:

  • Parcheggio Via Caduti di Via Fani: A large parking lot near the entrance to Alberobello, with easy access to the town center.
  • Parcheggio Via Lucana: Located near the old town and a good option if you’re staying in the historic area.
  • Parcheggio Piazza del Popolo: Another option closer to the town center, ideal if you’re exploring on foot.

Parking in Alberobello can be busy, especially during the high season, so it’s a good idea to plan ahead. Once you park, you can easily walk to the main attractions. Since the town is small, you won’t need your car to get around once you’re there.

A Few Tips About Driving in Italy in General 

You’ll need an international driver’s permit: In order to rent a car in Italy as an international tourist, you need to present an International Driver’s Permit. We typically get ours from AAA, and it’s a super easy process (you will need passport photos as well so keep that in mind). Once granted and “activated”, it’s valid for a year.

Rent a small car: There’s no need for a huge car here in Alberobello, and Puglia in general. I actually recommend renting the smallest car possible to make parking easier. We drove around in a small Fiat Panda, and were able to park in small spots and navigate the narrow streets with ease. Psst – Make sure you know how to properly drive a stick if you rent a manual (which is common in Italy and all of Europe).

Beware of local drivers: Italians can be assertive drivers (which we definitely experienced firsthand). Stay alert and be prepared for sudden stops or lane changes. Locals don’t always follow the rules; they don’t stop at stop signs, don’t follow speed limits, and the amount of times we were tailgated was beyond infuriating.

I guess they’re getting annoyed with the increase of tourists… which I totally get. They don’t look, signal, or stop, they just GO. So be extra, extra vigilant and careful. And always let the locals pass you.

If you’re coming from a nearby town, here’s how far Alberobello is:

  • From Locorotondo: ~10 km (6 miles). About 15 minutes by car; no direct train service, but you can take a bus (about 15 minutes).
  • From Cisternino: ~20 km (12 miles). About 30 minutes by car; no direct train service, but you can take a bus (about 30 minutes).
  • From Bari: ~65 km (40 miles). About 1 hour by car or 1.5 hours by bus; no direct train service, but you can take a train to Martina Franca (about 1 hour), then a short bus ride to Alberobello. 
  • From Polignano a Mare: ~50 km (31 miles). About 45 minutes by car or 1.5 hours by bus; no direct train service, but you can take a train to Monopoli (about 30 minutes), then a bus to your destination.
  • From Matera: ~75 km (47 miles). About 1.5 hours by car; no direct train service, but you can take a bus (about 1.5 hours).
  • From Gallipoli: ~130 km (81 miles). About 2 hours by car; no direct train service, but you can take a bus (about 2.5 hours).
  • From Otranto: ~150 km (93 miles). About 2.5 to 3 hours by car; no direct train service, but you can take a bus (about 3 hours).
  • From Lecce: ~160 km (99 miles). About 2.5 to 3 hours by car or bus; no direct train service, but you can take a train to Martina Franca (about 1.5 hours), then a short bus ride to your destination.

How to Get Around Alberobello

Getting around Alberobello is super easy – the town is small and walkable, so you can easily explore on foot. Everything is within a short walking distance, so there’s no need for taxis or public transport unless you’re venturing further out. 

Just be prepared for some cobblestone streets and gentle inclines as you explore the town’s historic areas.

Day Trip to Alberobello vs. Staying Overnight

Should you take a day trip to Alberobello or stay overnight? Honestly, if you’re short on time, a day trip is more than enough to experience the magic of this charming town. But just look at our hotel!

While it’s true that Alberobello feels extra special once the day-trippers head out and the town quiets down, there’s not actually a ton to do here, so we were able to get a feel of the place in just a few short hours. The iconic Trulli houses are definitely the highlight, and you can wander the narrow streets and snap all the photos you need without feeling rushed.

That being said, I do think you should spend at least one night on your Puglia road trip in a trulli hotel (doesn’t actually need to be in Alberobello itself)! If you’re looking for a relaxing night, staying overnight nearby in a masseria (like we did near Cisternino) can be a wonderful way to enjoy the Puglia countryside and get a peaceful, authentic experience. 

We stayed in a Trulli-style room at Borgo Canonica, and it was one of the highlights of our trip – a unique stay with beautiful views, but still close enough to Alberobello for a quick visit the next morning. More on our hotel below (psst — we LOVED it).

But don’t worry – day trips are very much possible if you’re already in the nearby region of Puglia! As you can see below, most popular towns/cities in Puglia are only about an hour or so away from Alberobello, meaning if you head there in the early AM, you really have all day to explore!

Taking a day trip to Alberobello like we did? Since Alberobello is one of the most touristy towns in Puglia, you’ll wanna get here on the earlier side to beat the big buses that drop people off in hundreds. 

We parked around 8:30am or so and wandered amongst the trulli for a bit until it got crowded. Then we had some of the best focaccia al pomodoro of our lives at La Lira and promptly left, haha. A few hours was enough for us (plus we had more towns to see!).

Where to Stay in Alberobello

A trullo of course! Yes, you can stay in them!

These traditional stone dwellings, with their conical roofs and charming, rustic architecture, are iconic to the Puglia region in southern Italy. Most trulli have vaulted ceilings, antique furnishings, original stone features, and a private bathroom. Meaning, a super unique stay, and so very different from a typical (dare-I-say-boring) hotel room.

Staying in a Trullo is like stepping back in time. The interiors are typically cozy and rustic, with stone walls and curved ceilings. Modern amenities are often added for comfort, so you’ll find things like air conditioning, modern bathrooms, and kitchenettes in most accommodations, but the charm and old-world feel of the Trulli are preserved.

Note that some Trulli might have air conditioning or portable fans, but older Trulli might rely on natural ventilation or small space heaters, so be sure to check the amenities when booking.

Besides our stunning cave suite in Matera, our trulli masseria near Alberobello was the most unique accommodation I’ve ever stayed in in Italy (and possibly all of Europe)! 

Note that many properties in Alberobello have minimum stays of 2 nights, especially in peak summer season. We originally wanted to stay at Romantic Trulli or Astra right in town, but with only a week in Puglia (plus an additional 2 nights in Matera) and plenty of places we wanted to visit, I just couldn’t make it work to spend 2 nights here in a trulli. 

I do think our one night at Borgo Canonica was enough, although I wouldn’t say no to another few afternoons by the pool. Part masseria, part trulli, it’s truly the best of both worlds (see what I did there, haha). The hotel grounds are stunning, the pool is oh so peaceful, and it was so fun to sleep in a trulli! Plus, there’s free private parking which is always appreciated.

With that being said, there’s plenty of opportunities to spend the night in a trulli outside of Alberobello itself. As noted before, we stayed in a trulli masseria right outside the small village of Cisternino, and loved it.

Here’s a few other options for trulli accommodation in Alberobello:

  • Astra: a luxury trullo with tons of excellent reviews, featuring a perfect blend of modern amenities and traditional charm in the heart of Alberobello
  • Romantic Trulli: a charming and intimate getaway, ideal for couples looking to experience a unique, cozy stay in one of Alberobello’s iconic cone-shaped homes.
  • Tipico Resort: a tranquil retreat with spacious trulli accommodations, providing a peaceful escape surrounded by the stunning landscapes of Puglia
  • Trulli in Corte: offers beautifully restored trulli with a rustic yet comfortable feel, perfect for those who want an authentic, homey experience in the center of Alberobello
  • B&B Trulli Miriva’: combines traditional charm with modern comforts, offering a delightful stay with personalized service and an ideal location
  • Trulli Holiday Albergo Diffuso: a unique “spread-out” hotel experience where guests can stay in beautiful trulli scattered around the town

What to Eat in Alberobello

Alberobello isn’t just about beautiful Trulli – it’s also a fantastic place to eat! The food in this part of Puglia is deliciously simple, focusing on fresh, local ingredients. Here’s a few must-try dishes:

  • Orecchiette: This iconic ear-shaped pasta is a Puglian specialty and a must-try when you’re in Alberobello. It’s often served with a simple sauce like cime di rapa (broccoli rabe) or a hearty tomato-based sauce with meat. You can find it in most local trattorias or restaurants.
  • Panzerotti: Think of it like a savory, deep-fried pocket of dough filled with mozzarella, tomato, and sometimes other fillings like ham or mushrooms. Perfect for a snack while wandering the streets!
  • Focaccia Barese: This soft, olive-oil-rich bread topped with tomatoes, olives, and oregano is a must-try, especially for breakfast or as a snack. It’s available at bakeries around town, and it pairs beautifully with a glass of local wine.

Since we only visited for a few hours (and feasted at our hotel before arriving), we didn’t have too many opportunities for meals in Alberobello. But the one that we did? Simply fantastic. Easily the best focacceria al pomodoro of our lives — head over to La Lira; you won’t be disappointed.

Brief History of Alberobello

Alberobello’s story begins all the way back in the 14th century when it was just a tiny farming village under the rule of the Count of Conversano. 

But what really sets Alberobello apart is its Trulli – those iconic conical-roofed stone houses. Legend has it that the Trulli were built without mortar – a type of paste made from sand, water, and a binder like cement – that would normally be used to hold the stones together. 

The people of Alberobello cleverly stacked the stones without mortar to avoid paying taxes, since the Kingdom of Naples required taxes on permanent structures. So, the Trulli could be easily dismantled, making them technically “temporary” and tax-free.

The town didn’t officially become a proper settlement until the late 16th century when the local ruler, Count Gian Girolamo, allowed it to expand. The Trulli started popping up all over, and by the 18th century, the village was thriving.

In fact, Alberobello’s entire historic center, with its maze of Trulli, was declared a UNESCO World Heritage site in 1996. Today, you can still walk through streets lined with these adorable homes, each with a history of its own.

What’s fascinating is that while Alberobello was once a remote, rural community, it’s now a must-visit destination in Italy. The Trulli have been carefully preserved and restored, and the town has blossomed into a charming place where you can see history come to life. Despite the influx of tourists, it retains its original charm and offers a peek into a way of life that has been around for centuries.

Other FAQs and Info about Alberobello

What’s so special about Alberobello?

Alberobello is one of those places that feels like stepping into a storybook – a town full of picture-perfect conical-roofed houses, the Trulli! These little stone huts, with their quirky roofs, are literally everywhere you look, and there’s something about the way they dot the landscape that feels both ancient and whimsical.

Where can you see trulli? 

Alberobello, a UNESCO World Heritage site, is the heart of the Trulli region and is home to over 1,500 of these structures. There are two main areas in Alberobello where you can find Trulli:

  • Rione Monti: The larger of the two neighborhoods, this area is full of Trulli and gives you a chance to stay right in the heart of the UNESCO-listed town. This is the area we primarily explored!
  • Rione Aia Piccola: A quieter, less touristy area, where you can experience the Trulli in a more residential setting. If you’re exploring over here, please be respectful of the locals and remember – people still live here!

In addition to Alberobello, the nearby towns of Locorotondo and Martina Franca also feature Trulli, though on a smaller scale.

Is Alberobello really that touristy?

Haha, yup! As someone who’s traveled all over Italy, I can tell you that Alberobello definitely gets its fair share of tourists, but that doesn’t mean it’s lost its charm. It’s a UNESCO World Heritage site after all, so it attracts visitors, especially during the summer months. 

The Trulli houses are iconic, and you’ll find crowds around the most famous areas like Rione Monti – the district packed with those adorable conical-roofed homes.

However, here’s the thing: it’s touristy in the best way. While some parts of Alberobello do feel like a tourist destination (hello, souvenir shops!), the town still feels authentic. 

You can easily wander off the main streets and discover quieter, less commercialized corners of the town, especially in the Rione Aia Piccola district. It’s here that you’ll see locals living their lives among the Trulli, which is what makes Alberobello so magical. 

So yes, it’s touristy – but not to the point where it takes away from the town’s charm. You can still find those quiet moments to feel like you’re stepping back in time.

Currency in Alberobello

Like the rest of Italy, the currency in Alberobello is the Euro (€). Credit cards are widely accepted, especially in larger shops, restaurants, and hotels. However, for those little family-owned trattorias or quirky cafes tucked away in quieter corners, it’s always a good idea to carry a bit of cash. Plus, cash is the easiest option for souvenirs. 

If you’re not sure where the nearest ATM is, don’t worry – Alberobello has several, and you’ll find them near the main tourist areas.

Language in Alberobello

The main language spoken in Alberobello is Italian, of course. While it’s always great to brush up on some basic Italian phrases (and believe me, locals really appreciate it when you try), you’ll find that many people in the more touristy areas speak at least a little English. Still, don’t expect everyone to be fluent, especially in smaller cafes or shops.

A few phrases to remember:

  • Ciao! – Hello!
  • Per favore – Please
  • Grazie – Thank you
  • Quanto costa? – How much does it cost?
  • Parla inglese? – Do you speak English?

If you’re staying in one of the Trulli or venturing into the surrounding countryside, you may even hear a bit of the local Apulian dialect, but don’t worry – it’s similar enough to standard Italian that you’ll still get by!

Things to do in Alberobello

Looking for things to do in Alberobello?! You’re in the right place. There’s honestly not a ton to do here besides strolling around the UNESCO World Heritage Site, but enough to fill a morning and/or an afternoon. 

And to be completely honest, Alberobello definitely feels like a tourist trap in Puglia (easily…), but still a must-see in my opinion (just arrive early!). Just don’t plan to spend multiple days here. 

1. Wander through the trulli districts

Of course one of the most popular things to do in Alberobello is to simply wander among all the trulli! That’s the main appeal of visiting the town of course, and what makes this spot so different from others on any Puglia itinerary.

The town is divided into two main districts – Rione Monti and Rione Aia Piccola. Rione Monti is the more touristy area (with the highest concentration of trulli); this is where many trulli have been converted into shops, cafes, and accommodations. 

Rione Aia Piccola is a smaller but less touristy area of trulli — it’s much quieter and has a more residential feel. Note that some of the houses are still inhabited, so always make sure to be extra respectful and avoid disturbing the residents (including staying off private property).

But regardless where you wander, you’re sure to come across all the quirky, conical roofs – there’s tons of them over here. There’s something so magical about the way the light hits the whitewashed stone, and my husband had to literally pry my camera outta my hands, haha.

2. Take a guided tour

If you’d rather wander around with a local guide and actually learn a thing or two (highly recommended), consider signing up for this 2-hour guided trulli tour. I think our visit would have had a lot more meaning if we understood the history and significance.

On this guided sightseeing tour with a local (whose family had lived in Alberobello for many generations and even lived in one of the Trulli in town), you’ll learn all about and admire the architecture of the city’s unique trulli buildings, marvel at panoramic views of the city, visit a typical Trullo church, and even head inside a trullo. Doesn’t get more meaningful than that!

3. Find the best viewpoints

Of course, wandering the town at ground level is great, but if you’re looking for breathtaking views, make sure you head up to one of the panoramic terraces. You can look over the town’s rooftops and really see the conical roofs that make these trulli truly unique!

Alberobello offers plenty of stunning views, and to find the best spots, keep an eye out for signs that say “Vista Panoramica.” These will lead you to terraces and rooftops with sweeping views of the town and its iconic trulli. 

Just remember, to access the roofs you’ll need to buy something from the shop, typically a coffee or a small souvenir. From these vantage points, you can take in the sight of the conical roofs spread across the landscape, framed by olive groves and rolling hills. STUNNING.

4. Admire the view from Trulli Panoramic View

With that being said, if you’re looking for the absolute best view in town, you have to head to Trulli Panoramic View. It’s located right in the heart of Alberobello and offers stunning panoramic views of the Trulli district and the surrounding countryside. By far the best view of the historical part of the town. 

We started our day in Alberobello here, and LOVED the morning light over the whitewashed rooftops – I honestly kinda wish we had come for sunrise!

It’s the perfect spot to take in the entire layout of the town and snap a few photos from above. It’s one of the most popular things to do in Alberobello, so I highly recommend heading here first thing since there’ll be fewer tourists and more space to take it all in.

5. See the Church of Sant’Antonio

I was so surprised to learn that there’s actually a church built in the shape of a Trullo! The Church of Sant’Antonio is a stunning example of how the Trulli architecture has influenced other parts of Alberobello. This 20th-century church, located in Rione Monti, is one of the highlights of the town, with its beautiful stonework and unique conical roof. 

It’s a peaceful place to take a moment and reflect, and the church is still very much in use for services, so you might get lucky and experience the serene atmosphere during a Mass. It was one of those quiet moments that felt like I was experiencing a true blend of local tradition and spirituality at the same time.

6. Explore the Local Shops

Alberobello is filled with quaint little shops selling everything from handmade ceramics to local olive oils and artisan wines. I spent an hour or so popping in and out of these adorable stores, picking up unique souvenirs to take home (of course I grabbed myself a cute postcard like I always do!). 

And since the trulli are the main appeal of town, of course the souvenirs reflect that. I saw so many mini trulli-themed souvenirs, ranging from mini trulli models to decorative items like magnets, postcards, and keychains. There’s also plenty of wooden crafts, artisan-made jewelry, woven textiles, and local food products like local olive oil, taralli (traditional Italian snack crackers), pasta, cheese, and wine thrown into the mix.

7. Relax at the Parco dei Trulli

After a few hours of sightseeing, you’ll want to find a nice spot to relax, and the Parco dei Trulli is the perfect place. This peaceful park is just a short walk from the town center, and it’s great for unwinding after all the wandering. The park is dotted with small Trulli, which makes it feel like you’re still in the heart of the historic district, but it’s a lot quieter and more relaxing. 

We unfortunately didn’t make it here as we had other towns in the Itria Valley to check out, but if you’ve got more time, definitely add this to your list.

8. Check Out the Trulli Museum (Trullo Sovrano)

A quick stop at the Trulli Museum (also known as the Trullo Sovrano) is a great way to learn about the history and significance of these iconic homes. And to learn more about the construction techniques of these fascinating structures. 

The museum is small but incredibly informative – perfect if you want to understand the history behind how the Trulli were built without mortar (yes, no glue or cement keeping the building together – which I found just wild!). 

The exhibits are really well curated, and they dive into the unique dry-stone building technique that makes these structures so durable and distinctive. I found it fascinating to learn how the Trulli evolved from simple farming homes to the architectural marvels that they are today. It’s definitely worth a visit if you’re a history buff or just curious about the building techniques!

9. Take a tuk-tuk tour of Alberobello

A tuk tuk tour of Alberobello is a fun and breezy way to explore the town, where you can zip around in a colorful three-wheeled vehicle and take in the sights, especially the iconic Trulli houses of course. These tuk tuks, called Apes in Italy, can be found all throughout the Puglia region. We also saw them all over Matera!

The tours are led by friendly local drivers who share all kinds of interesting facts about the history and architecture of the town while you cruise through its charming streets. It’s a great way to cover more ground without having to walk under the hot summer sun. This tour even goes to the surrounding countryside to see some rural examples of trulli architecture.

You’ll be given time to stop and take photos, enjoy panoramic views, see the basilica, Sant’Antonio Church, and Trullo Sovrano. And even into a family’s home in a trullo – something you don’t get to do just wandering around yourself! It’s a great way to discover the history of the Trulli and of Alberobello without melting in the sun.

I didn’t end up taking the tuk tuk tour during my visit, but honestly, I kind of wish I had! I kept seeing the little vehicles whizzing around, and it looked like such a fun way to get around and see the town from a different perspective. Plus, I had already walked 20k steps a few days in a row, so my feet would have definitely appreciated the rest, haha. Something for me to consider next time!

10. Take a food walking tour

Food in Puglia is next level, and Alberobello is no exception. Because of this, a food tour is easily one of the best things to do in Alberobello. I mean, this is Italy we’re talking about – of course the food’s gonna be amazing!  

While I unfortunately discovered this tour a little too late in my trip, it looks absolutely spectacular and is definitely on my list for next time! A food tour is the perfect way to dive into the flavors of Puglia and experience the region’s culinary traditions firsthand. And plus, you get to fill up on burrata, focaccia, and gelato – what could be better?!

On a food tour in Alberobello, you’ll also learn about the region’s famous olive oils and wines – Puglia is known for producing some of the best in Italy! And of course eat plenty of cheese… because why not?!

11. Learn how to make pasta and tiramisu

Wanna learn how to make your own pasta and tiramisu?! Alberobello’s the place to do it! I love taking cooking classes when I travel (I’ve made macarons in Paris, egg tarts in Lisbon, pizza in Rome, tamales in Mexico, and tiramisu in Florence), and they’re always such great ways to really immerse yourself in the culture. Plus, you get to eat what you cook afterwards, soo…. If you have the time, I’d definitely say yes to a cooking class. 

In this pasta making class, you’ll learn how to roll ‘sfoglia’ (fresh pasta) by hand and how to prepare 2 simple different kinds of pasta from scratch. And of course how to prepare the iconic Tiramisu, all in a local home in Alberobello. You know it’s gonna be fresh when most of the ingredients are home grown by the family! There’s a reason the cooking class got such great reviews. I’d kill for some fresh pasta right about now!

12. Take a day trip to surrounding villages

While Alberobello is absolutely worth spending a few hours in, if you have the time, I highly recommend exploring the surrounding Valle d’Itria. This area is known for its vineyards, olive groves, and other beautiful hilltop towns like Locorotondo, Martina Franca, and Cisternino.

Locorotondo, with its charming circular old town, and Cisternino, known for its beautiful historic center and delicious grilled meats, are just a short drive away and are very different from Alberobello. We loved both of these other hilltop towns, and actually visited both on the same day as Alberobello during our week in Puglia.

If you’re in the mood for a longer day trip, you can also stop by nearby Martina Franca, with its baroque architecture and quaint streets. I’m still sad we missed this (as I’ve heard really good things), but just another reason for us to come back to Puglia!

Alberobello’s not far from other towns in Puglia as well, including Polignano a Mare and Monopoli — two favorites of ours!

Hope that helps you plan out your day trip to Alberobello, and give you an idea of all the fun things to do in Alberobello as well! Are you visiting Puglia anytime soon?!



The post Day Trip to Alberobello: Things to do in Alberobello and Full Trulli Guide appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/day-trip-to-alberobello-puglia/feed/ 0
One Day in Matera Itinerary: Italy’s Breathtaking Sassi Escape https://apassionandapassport.com/things-to-do-in-matera-itinerary/ https://apassionandapassport.com/things-to-do-in-matera-itinerary/#respond Mon, 18 Nov 2024 06:42:25 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=31800 Headed to Southern Italy and planning to spend just one day in Matera? Follow this one day Matera itinerary to explore the stunning Sassi cave dwellings, indulge in local cuisine, and take in breathtaking views — all with tons of history! All my favorite things to do in Matera, coming right up! The moment weContinue Reading

The post One Day in Matera Itinerary: Italy’s Breathtaking Sassi Escape appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Headed to Southern Italy and planning to spend just one day in Matera? Follow this one day Matera itinerary to explore the stunning Sassi cave dwellings, indulge in local cuisine, and take in breathtaking views — all with tons of history! All my favorite things to do in Matera, coming right up!

The moment we arrived at our hotel in Matera (after lugging our bags a few too many blocks… more on that later), WHOA just WHOA. We truly felt like we entered another world. I could not take my eyes off of that view (which, spoiler alert, ended up being one of my favorite things to do in Matera, haha). Yes, stare at the views!

So what’s so special about Matera anyways? Well, it’s one of Italy’s most unique destinations, and actually the oldest city in the entire country, dating back over 9,000 years. Yes, you read that right – Matera has been continuously inhabited since 7,000 years before Christ (let that sink in for a bit)! 

Plus, it’s a UNESCO World Heritage site, the 2019 European Capital of Culture, AND the third-oldest city in the world (after Aleppo and Jericho), so yeah, it’s got a lot going for it.

Matera’s ancient, incredibly unique, and steeped in history. Plus it’s absolutely GORGEOUS – those views are unlike anything I’ve ever seen. The entire city feels like a time capsule, with narrow winding streets, stone buildings, and labyrinth-like staircases at every turn. And of course, Matera’s most famous for its ancient cave dwellings known as “Sassi” — a true highlight on any one day Matera itinerary. 

To be completely honest, I hadn’t even heard of this extraordinary ancient cave city until a few years ago when I first started seeing it on social media. And when I realized just how close Matera is to the Puglia region, I promptly added it onto our Puglia road trip (which is now one of my new favorite regions in Europe). If you’re already planning to visit Puglia, I highly recommend you do the same if you have the time! 

And yes, you really can see so much with just one day in Matera – I promise! The city’s the perfect compact size to explore for those with a short amount of time. Just note that there’s tons and tons of stone stairs (I mean, Sassi literally means rock in Italian, haha), so pace yourself and get ready for a bit of a workout. We were tired after just a few hours in the scorching summer sun!

Honestly, the mix of ancient history, stunning views, and a lively cultural scene makes Matera such a cool place to visit if you want to see a different side of Italy. With its rich cultural heritage, captivating rock churches, and mouthwatering local cuisine, Matera is a place you won’t forget anytime soon. We’re still talking about it months later!

One Day in Matera Logistics 

Before we get into all the fun things to do in Matera and my recommended one day Matera itinerary, there’s a lot of logistics to talk about first!

Where is Matera?

First of all, where is Matera exactly?! Psst – before doing research for my Italy trip, I honestly had no idea, so don’t feel bad if you haven’t got a clue either, lol.

Now I know that Matera’s nestled in the Basilicata region of southern Italy, right in a ravine carved by the Gravina River. And that river has shaped some seriously stunning cliffs and gorges over thousands of years – once you see it, you’ll see just how remarkable it really is. It’s actually kinda remote nestled deep in the mountainsides, but dontcha worry – it’s hardly a hidden gem anymore, haha.

Even though Matera is technically in Basilicata, it’s super close to Puglia, so plenty of people combine it with a road trip through Puglia – us included! You can soak in Matera’s ancient vibes and then hop over to Puglia for some amazing local food and culture, or vice versa. 

Italy is a long and narrow country, so don’t expect to be able to hop on over to Matera regardless of where you are in the country! For reference, Matera is 400+ km from Rome, 650+ km from Florence, and 850 km from Venice. Yup — definitely not possible to visit Matera for a day from one of these cities! Maybeeee just maybe from Naples (~250 km away), but only if you’re prepared for a super long day and there’s zero traffic. 

Here are some specific distances to nearby cities: 

  • Altamura and Gravina in Puglia: each ~20-30 kilometers (12-18 miles) away
  • Castelmezzano and Pietrapertosa: ~40 kilometers (25 miles) northwest
  • Bari: ~65 kilometers (40 miles) to the northeast
  • Alberobello: ~70 kilometers (43 miles) to the southeast
  • Naples: ~250 kilometers (155 miles) to the west

Geographically, Matera features stunning limestone cliffs and a rugged landscape that really define the town. It’s famous for its Sassi – those unique stone houses carved directly into the rock. The views of the surrounding valleys and ravines are breathtaking, and we totally felt like we stepped into a living history book. I couldn’t get enough of the scenery here – it was just so striking and one-of-a-kind!

When to Plan Your Matera Itinerary

Like much of Italy, Matera has four distinct seasons. Each season brings its own appeal, so whether you’re into sunny days or the cozy atmosphere of cooler months, there’s a perfect time for you to explore this amazing city.

Spring (March to May): This is one of the best times to visit Matera. The weather is mild, with temperatures ranging from the low 50s to mid-70s°F (10-25°C), the flowers are blooming, and the crowds are still manageable. The Matera Film Festival takes place in May, so it’s a super fun time to visit if you’re interested in celebrating the cinema!

Summer (June to August): It’s peak tourist season in Matera, meaning it’s the most crowded time of year. And we felt it, haha. Even though Puglia was relatively less crowded overall in early June (compared to other spots we’ve previously visited in Europe), Matera was just not, haha. It was by far the most crowded place on our Puglia road trip. 

However, if you wake up early you may very well have the sassi to yourself. It seems as if the city kinda wakes up late, but that may just be since all the day trippers haven’t arrived just yet.

Plus, summers in Matera can get brutally hot (like miserably scorching), with temperatures often exceeding 85°F (30°C). And it’s really hard to escape the heat since the caves reflect the sun pretty harshly. After just a few minutes we were longing for some shade and craving a cold drink, haha. I was dripping about 85% of the time — not a pretty look, oh well!

I definitely recommend wandering around at night once the temp cools off and the daytrippers go home.

Psst – Festa della Madonna della Bruna which honors the patron saint of Matera is on July 2, so expect TONS of crowds then. I’d specifically avoid that week if you can. 

Fall (September to November): Another fantastic time to visit, fall brings cooler temperatures and fewer tourists (although September is still kinda hot and crowded). Daytime highs are typically in the 70s°F (20-25°C), making it comfortable for exploring. Plus, there’s some autumn colors and harvest festivals this time of year.

Winter (December to February): Winters are mild but can be chilly, with temperatures averaging in the 40s°F (4-9°C). Snow is rare but possible, which can make the city look even more magical than it already is! 

Besides Christmas week, this is the quietest time for tourism, so there’ll be way less crowds and you can probably snag a good deal on special cave hotels! Just be sure to bundle up when you’re out and about exploring – just because this is Italy doesn’t mean it doesn’t get chilly!

How to Get to Matera

By Plane

If you’re not already in Italy, you’ll need to get there of course! Thankfully, there’s an airport not too far away – the closest “major” airport is Bari Karol Wojtyła Airport (BRI), about 65 km/40 miles from Matera. I put “major” in quotes since major is all relative – meaning you won’t be able to fly directly here from the US. Connecting in Rome, Naples, or Milan will be your best bet!

Once you get to BRI, you can rent a car (recommended if you’re off on a longer Puglia road trip like we were), take a shuttle bus to Bari city center and then catch a train or bus to Matera, or take an expensive taxi ride (for a more direct option).

Other nearby airports include Brindisi Airport – BDS (145 km away) and Naples – NAP (250 km away), but Bari is by far the closest. Note that in order to get to Matera from BDS or NAP by public transit you’ll most likely need to transfer in Bari anyways.

By Train

Getting to Matera by train is possible, but always involves a combo of train and bus since Matera doesn’t have its own train station (I was super surprised by this!).

Regardless of where you’re coming from (Bari, Naples, Rome, etc), you’ll need to transfer at Ferrandina (the nearest train station to Matera, about 20 km away). And once you get to Ferrandina, it’s pretty straight forward – there’s regional buses (Ferrovie Appulo Lucane FAL) that’ll take you straight to Matera in about 30 minutes. 

By Bus

If you don’t wanna deal with transferring at Ferrandina, you can take a direct bus to Matera instead! There’s a few different companies who have routes from several cities in Italy (including Bari, Naples, and Potenza) –  check out FlixBus, MarinoBus, and Ferrovie Appulo Lucane (FAL).

To give you a general idea, from Bari, expect the bus to take ~1.5 hours or so, from Naples about 4 hours, and from Rome about 6.5 hours.

And if you’d rather make it super, super easy and only have time for one day in Matera, definitely consider an organized tour. This day trip to Matera leaves from both Polignano a Mare and Bari, and means you don’t have to worry about transportation (or parking!) at all!

By Car

Nearby? Of course you can drive to Matera! And you’ll get to go through the beautiful landscapes of Basilicata (and Puglia, depending where you’re coming from) –  expect to see rolling hills, lovely vineyards, and quaint olive groves. The region is famous for its stunning scenery afterall! 

Major roads, such as the A14 and SS96, are generally well-maintained. However, be prepared for some smaller, winding roads as you approach Matera, particularly if you take scenic routes or detours.

Psst – if you’re driving to Matera, I highly recommend stopping in both Gravina in Puglia (to see the iconic bridge) and Altamura (for their famous bread) either before or after your few days in Matera. We made brief stops in both of these and loved them!

Note that the center of Matera is a Restricted Traffic Zone (ZTL), meaning driving and parking in this area is restricted. And once you start wandering around, you’ll see exactly why — cars just don’t work here, haha.

Parking in Matera

Parking in Matera is kinda a nightmare. You’ll need to stick to the newer part of the city and make sure to avoid the ZTL. There’s lots of (paid) street-parking and several parking lots (“Parcheggio”), but we found it quite difficult to find a spot. We maneuvered into the first spot we saw (on the outskirts of the Sassi), paid for street parking for the entire duration of our time in Matera, and then didn’t move the car until we were ready to leave the city for good. 

It was beyond busy and we were too worried we wouldn’t find another spot. Plus, once you get to Matera you don’t really need a car to get around anyways.

I recommend pinning a few parking lots in advance so if you can’t find street parking, you have a few stress-free options. There’s Car Park Via Lanera (recommended, although check the timetables of “Linea Circolare Lanera”), Car Park Piazza Cesare Firrao, Car Park Piazza Kennedy Via Cappelluti, Carpark Via Lucana, and Carpark Parcheggio di Piazza Bianco. Lots of options, but still very busy.

A few tips about driving in Italy in general:

You’ll need an international driver’s permit: In order to rent a car in Italy as an international tourist, you need to present an International Driver’s Permit. We typically get ours from AAA, and it’s a super easy process (you will need passport photos as well so keep that in mind). Once granted and “activated”, it’s valid for a year. 

Rent a small car: There’s no need for a huge car here in Matera. I recommend renting the smallest car possible to make parking easier. We drove around in a small Fiat Panda, and were able to park in small spots and navigate the narrow streets with ease. Psst – Make sure you know how to properly drive stick if you rent a manual (which is common in Italy and all of Europe).

Beware of local drivers: Italians can be assertive drivers (which we definitely experienced firsthand). Stay alert and be prepared for sudden stops or lane changes. Locals don’t always follow the rules; they don’t stop at stop signs, don’t follow speed limits, and the amount of times we were tailgated was beyond infuriating.

I guess they’re getting annoyed with the increase of tourists… which I totally get. They don’t look, signal, or stop, they just GO. So be extra, extra vigilant and careful. And always let the locals pass you.

How to Get Around Matera

On Foot: Walking is really the best way to get around Matera, especially in the historic center (Sassi). Note that the narrow, cobbled streets are steep and winding, so be sure to wear your comfiest non-slip shoes and bring along plenty of water! I swear we walked at least 20k steps a day, and our legs were so sore the next morning (because of all the steep streets and unfathomable amount of stairs). 

I’m not sure if it’s just us, but we found the Sassi so confusing to walk around, haha. The Sassi is literally a series of winding cobblestone sideways and alleys up and down caves, so kinda to be expected.

At some points in the day we had enough, especially since it was super hot and hilly (with no sea to jump into!). That’s when we decided it was time for a drink and snack break, haha. It was kinda frustrating being there in peak summer with zero shade and nowhere to cool off, but we persevered and kept exploring, fueled by gelato and the occasional break in the shade of a cave.

Accessibility in Matera: The historic area of Matera can be challenging for those with mobility issues due to the steep and uneven paths. And SO. MANY. STAIRS. This area of Matera is definitely not stroller friendly (use a baby carrier instead), but the newer area is much easier to navigate for those using a wheelchair or mobility scooter, or pushing a stroller.

Sightseeing Bus Tour: Don’t worry if you aren’t comfortable with all the steps — there’s an open-top sightseeing bus tour! To be completely honest, I kinda wish we took a bus tour. After walking around for hours (and getting lost a few too many times), we were beyond frustrated when we couldn’t find something on my map (the Sassi is tricky!). A bus tour surely would have saved our feet and thighs and butts. Plus, I wouldn’t be dripping with sweat for the duration of the day, haha.

Ape tour: Another fun way to explore the Sassi is by hopping on an Ape Calessino (tuk-tuk) tour! In Italian, they’re called ape cars (ah-peh), which means bee – how cute! While they can’t navigate every street (some are too narrow and reserved for pedestrians), most tours (like this one!) cover all the main attractions, and even give you time for photo breaks. It’s a great way to get to know the city, get off your feet, and learn a thing or two from a local.

Day trip to Matera vs Overnight

Should you take a day trip to Matera or stay overnight? That really depends how much time you have.

But if you can swing it, I HIGHLY recommend spending at least one night in Matera. Why? So you can experience sleeping in a cave! We loved our boutique cave hotel – probably one of the most unique accommodation experiences we’ve had to date (besides living the luxury life in an overwater bungalow in Bora Bora, a luxury safari lodge in Tanzania, and a Bedouin camp in Israel).

Plus, the real magic happens after hours, when the evenings are quiet, the streets are less crowded, and the caves are beautifully illuminated. Staying overnight allows you to truly soak in Matera’s unique charm. And sunset over the caves?! Absolutely nothing like it – I couldn’t peel my eyes away (just ask my husband, haha).

After spending a week in Puglia, we drove over to Matera and spent two nights here – and it was the perfect amount of time. We arrived just before sunset our first evening, and then had the entire next day and night to explore, before leaving for Bari the following morning. Our full day was a good mix of sightseeing and exploring the Sassi with lots of snack and drink breaks.

But don’t worry – day trips are very much possible if you’re already in the nearby region of Puglia! As you can see below, most popular towns/cities in Puglia are only about an hour or so away from Matera, meaning if you head there in the early AM, you really have all day to explore!

I do think an organized day trip from Polignano a Mare or Bari is the way to go if you’re staying in one of these areas. Why complicate things?! You’re on vacation!

  • From Bari: ~65 km (40 miles). ~1.5 hours by car or 2 hours by bus; ~1.5 hours by train to Ferrandina, then a short bus ride to Matera.
  • From Polignano a Mare: ~50 km (31 miles). ~1 hour by car or 1.5 hours by bus; no direct train service.
  • From Alberobello: ~35 km (22 miles). ~45 minutes by car or 1 hour by bus; no direct train service.
  • From Gallipoli: ~130 km (81 miles). ~2.5 hours by car; no direct train service; consider a bus.
  • From Otranto: ~150 km (93 miles). ~2.5 to 3 hours by car; no direct train service.
  • From Lecce: ~160 km (99 miles). ~2.5 to 3 hours by car or bus; ~2.5 hours by train to Ferrandina, then a short bus ride to Matera.

Where to Stay in Matera

As mentioned before, if you have the time, I highly recommend spending at least one night in Matera, preferably two! 

And definitely sleep in a boutique cave hotel during your time in Matera. I mean, what a unique experience (kinda like spending a night in a trulli in Alberobello)! The cave hotels are often set right within the ancient Sassi, the iconic cave dwellings carved into the rock. Think exposed stone walls, private terraces, hot tubs, and/or spa facilities!

There’s plenty of luxury options (what we opted for), with a blend of ancient charm and modern comfort. Just remember – these caves had been inhabited for thousands of years before being converted into hotels/accommodation, whoa! 

Aquatio Cave Luxury Hotel: This is where we stayed, and WHOA! After doing tons of research, we ultimately chose to spend 2 nights at Aquatio Cave Luxury Hotel, and what a fantastic choice that was. The hotel was newly opened in 2018, and located right in the center of the Sassi on a ridge by the Sasso Caveoso district. I’m honestly not sure if we got upgraded (the room we got was way bigger than what we thought we booked), but hey, no complaints there! Just look at it – we literally showered (and went to the bathroom) in a cave!

We feasted on huge breakfast buffets each and every morning, the service was top-notch, and the views straight from the hotel were some of the best we found in all of Matera. Plus, Aquatio boasts an insane spa (and wellness center) in a beautifully lit cave that we definitely took advantage of, haha. Book early as there’s only 35 rooms and suites (and they do sell out in summer)!

If Aquatio Cave Luxury Hotel is sold out or not within budget, here’s some other popular cave hotels in Matera:

I do want you to consider that you’ll likely be dragging your luggage up and down stairs to your hotel in the Sassi (although some hotels offer valet service). So choose a hotel wisely – we ended up walking 15 minutes or so to our hotel (we had a hard time finding a parking spot nearby), but thankfully most of the walk was through the newer part of Matera which is mostly flat.

What to Eat in Matera

Cuisine in Matera is simple and nourishing, characterized by the most easily available foods such as bread and pasta. Since this is a region rich in agricultural produce (just look at those tomatoes growing right in town!), it reflects the local flavors and traditions.

We didn’t make any restaurant reservations while planning our Matera itinerary, and I instantly regretted that mistake as soon as we arrived. As mentioned earlier, Matera was insanely crowded during our visit. Everything we ate was absolutely delicious though – I don’t think you can have a bad meal.

Here’s a few dishes and specific foods to try: 

  • Pane di Matera: traditional bread made from special wheat that has a distinct flavor
  • Cialledda: local bread salad with fresh veggies, herbs, and sometimes beans (great for a refreshing lunch)
  • Orecchiette: an ear-shaped pasta that’s a regional favorite, often served with a simple sauce made from turnip tops (cime di rapa) or a tasty tomato sauce
  • Peperoni Cruschi: crispy, dried peppers that are a great snack or add a flavorful kick to dishes
  • Burrata: creamy cheese great with fresh with local tomatoes and a drizzle of olive oil (although more famous in Puglia)
  • Agnello al Forno: slow-roasted lamb seasoned with local herbs and spices (super hearty and satisfying)
  • Pignata: a traditional super flavorful stew made with meat and vegetables, slow-cooked in a clay pot
  • Fave e Cicoria: a simple classic dish featuring pureed fava beans served with sautéed chicory
  • Focaccia: soft and flavorful flatbread often topped with herbs, olives, or tomatoes

Brief History of Matera

This wouldn’t be a complete Matera itinerary without touching upon its rich and complex history! I mean, human settlement in the area traces back to the Paleolithic era! Over the centuries, Matera has seen a whirlwind of cultural influences, especially from the Romans and Byzantines, which have really shaped its one-of-a-kind character.

The Sassi, those incredible ancient cave dwellings, popped up as a clever solution for housing in the rocky landscape. Carved directly into the stone, these structures create a fascinating labyrinth of homes, churches, and public spaces that tell the amazing story of life in Matera throughout the ages.

In the 20th century, the Sassi gained a reputation for their tough living conditions, especially after World War II, which led to many residents having to relocate due to overcrowding and sanitation issues, causing feelings of abandonment and a major drop in the area’s population. It’s wild to think that people lived in these caves without electricity or running water as recently as the 1950s!. 

But here’s the good news: restoration efforts kicked off in the 1980s, and by 1993, the Sassi were designated a UNESCO World Heritage site! This was a real turning point for their preservation and revitalization.

Matera really hit the spotlight when it was named a European Capital of Culture in 2019, drawing in international attention and investment. This initiative sparked a vibrant arts scene, with trendy cafes and boutiques popping up right alongside traditional crafts. Its stunning landscapes and unique architecture have even turned it into a favorite spot for filmmakers – you might recognize it from hits like “The Passion of the Christ” and “No Time to Die”!

Today, Matera is a captivating mix of ancient history and modern culture. It’s some place I really think everyone should visit, even if it’s just for a day!

Other FAQs and Info About Matera

  • What’s so special about Matera? I mean, just look at the photos! Matera is famous for its ancient cave dwellings, the Sassi, which are among the oldest continuously inhabited settlements in the world and are recognized as a UNESCO World Heritage Site. Plus, the city has stunning landscapes, a rich history, and vibrant culture. It’s seriously like nowhere else I’ve been before (although I have a feeling Cappadocia in Turkey is somewhat similar).
  • Is Matera worth visiting? 1000% yes! Just prepare for lots and lots of stairs (comfy shoes help!), and take breaks when you need to get outta the hot summer sun. It’s super, super unique, so way different from other spots in Italy and the Mediterranean you’ve been. 
  • Is Matera expensive? Depending where you stay, it certainly can be. Our luxury cave hotel was the most expensive place we stayed on our entire Puglia road trip, but there’s certainly cheaper accommodation. We found meals and activities to be pretty good value, and we honestly kinda just wandered around during the day (meaning we didn’t spend much besides food and hotel).
  • Currency in Matera: Like the rest of Italy, Matera uses the Euro (€) as its official currency. ATMs are widely available, and credit and debit cards are accepted in most shops and restaurants, though it’s always a good idea to have some cash on hand for smaller establishments or markets.
  • Language in Matera: The official language spoken in Matera is Italian. However, you might also hear local dialects, particularly “Lucano,” which reflects the region’s unique cultural heritage. English is spoken in many tourist areas, but locals really appreciate it when you at least attempt basic Italian phrases.

Historic Sassi vs. Matera’s Modern City

Matera is divided into two distinct areas: the Sassi (the old part) and the modern city. And you’ll be able to tell the difference straight away, as they look entirely different, haha. There’s no way not to notice the contrast. Here’s a quick breakdown of them both:

Old Matera (Sassi)

The Sassi di Matera is an absolute must-see, and what makes Matera oh so unique! This UNESCO World Heritage Site is famous for its ancient cave dwellings and rock churches, some dating back thousands of years. Picture narrow alleys and winding streets lined with stunning limestone buildings carved right into the rock – it’s like stepping back in time.

But it’s not just about the sights; you get a real taste of local life here. Many cave houses are still occupied, and you’ll find charming artisan shops, cozy restaurants, and historical sites around every corner. It’s a cultural experience that truly immerses you in the heart of Matera!

New Matera (Modern City)

Something I didn’t realize before spending one day in Matera? That there’s a modern side of Matera as well! This newer side of Matera is called the Piano, and it’s just like any chic little city you’d find elsewhere in Italy, complete with sleek architecture, trendy shops, and a range of hotels and restaurants.

It’s got a much more common city layout, and way less steps and steep hills to climb. Although there’s no caves… so make sure you in fact don’t spend all your time here in modern Matera, haha. This area is definitely alive with energy though – there was actually a half marathon taking place throughout the streets when we visited (something we definitely didn’t expect!).

Most people who live in Matera live here in the Piano, where the Italian government relocated the residents of the Sassi to in the early 1950s.

So let’s get started with our day trip to Matera — full of all the iconic, historic spots in the city and breathtaking views at every turn. The perfect one day in Matera itinerary, coming right up!

One Day in Matera Itinerary

Tips to Maximize Your Matera Itinerary 

  • Start early! If you’re spending the night in the city before your one day in Matera, wake up and get out exploring at a reasonable hour! If you’re driving over as part of a much-longer Puglia road trip, set your alarm so you get to Matera before 10am (preferably earlier).
  • Craft your one day in Matera itinerary ahead of time. With such a short amount of time, don’t get to Matera without a plan. I of course recommend prioritizing visits to the iconic attractions (the Sassi di Matera, the Cave Churches, Piazza del Duomo, etc). However, the entire city is like a maze with unique architecture at every turn, so if you’re not fussed about seeing certain spots, you can honestly just wander around and take it all in.
  • Pay for parking if need be. Driving? If you’ve only got 24 hours in Matera (or less if you’re doing a day trip), you don’t wanna spend half your day looking for parking. Yes, paying for parking sucks (I get it — I’d rather save that cash for vino and gelato), but sometimes you just gotta suck it up. Time is money, people! Look for garages in advance and plan to park your car there the whole day.
  • Plan out your food stops in advance. It’s hard to have a bad meal in Matera (this is Italy afterall!), but if you’re an indecisive person like me, the choices may overwhelm you. Do your research ahead of time so you don’t waste time deciding where to eat. Plus, if you’re visiting in high season (June through August/September), make some dinner reservations if there’s a specific spot you wanna eat at!
  • Consider a guided tour. Really wanna make the most of your time and learn tons about Matera in just one day? Walking tours and ape tuk-tuk tours are fantastic for this purpose, as you can typically see more in less time and get tons of info from a local guide! 

And finally, here’s how I’d spend one day in Matera!

Morning in Matera: Explore the Sassi

Wake up (hopefully in your epic cave hotel), and you’ll immediately feel the magic of Matera. Our hotel had such a fantastic view I could’ve been content simply staring out a few feet from our accommodation, haha. But of course, we had a whole city to discover! After enjoying the gorgeous breakfast spread from our hotel, we set off to explore. 

The city is known for its cave dwellings, and they’ve got some wild stories to tell. I recommend taking the morning to simply wander through the streets of the Sassi. We felt like we were walking in an open air museum, and loved getting lost in the meandering alleyways (although to be honest, we actually got lost a few too many times, haha).

These unique structures, carved right into the limestone, date back thousands of years and are actually a UNESCO World Heritage site. The Sassi di Matera is made up of two districts – Sasso Barisano and Sasso Caveoso – where you can just wander the narrow alleys and stumble upon cool rock churches, quirky shops, and some great local food.

We kinda just wandered around looking for the pins on my map until we got hot and hungry, haha. But there’s a few things you shouldn’t miss while exploring the Sassi:

Take a scenic stroll along Via Madonna delle Virtù

Kick off your day in Matera with a leisurely walk down Via Madonna delle Virtù. We LOVED this charming street – with its elevated position you get a stunning perspective of the iconic Sassi cave dwellings and the lush Valle dei Diddi below. 

It kinda hugs the Sassi and is mostly flat, so it’s the perfect spot to take in the landscape before diving into the rest of your day in this UNESCO World Heritage site.

Admire the stunning rock churches 

When you’re in Matera, you absolutely have to check out its stunning rock churches – especially the Church of Santa Maria di Idris and the Church of San Pietro Caveoso. These incredible structures are not just architectural feats; they’re masterpieces carved right into the rock, complete with vibrant frescoes and intricate sculptures that tell a story of the city’s rich heritage.

I’ve never seen a church like this before so was totally blown away; I mean, just look at it!

The Church of Santa Maria di Idris, often referred to as “Madonna de Idris,” is one of the most scenic rock churches in the area (and my favorite!). It sits atop the rocky spur of Montirone (right in the middle of Sasso Caveoso), offering breathtaking views of the surrounding landscape. This unique Catholic church features a crypt that houses well-preserved frescoes, showcasing the artistic heritage of the region.

San Pietro Caveoso (Chiesa di San Pietro Caveoso) is the second of the most famous of the rock churches in Matera, dating back to the 13th century, and right next to The Church of Santa Maria! Carved directly into the soft limestone of the Sasso Caveoso, the church blends Romanesque and Gothic styles with a simple yet striking interior, including a barrel-vaulted ceiling and ancient frescoes. Plus tons of spectacular panoramic views over the maze of cave dwellings and the valleys below. 

And a quick tip: if you plan to explore these sacred spaces during your one day in Matera, make sure to dress appropriately! Covering your shoulders and knees is a must – it’s all about showing respect for the traditions of Italy. 

Learn about Matera at Casa Grotta

Time to learn about Matera and the cave dwellings! This historic home is a recreated traditional cave house that gives visitors a glimpse into the daily lives of the people who lived here for centuries. It’s a great experience to have in order to understand how the villagers lived thousands of years ago.

The Casa Grotta nei Sassi di Matera is set up as a small museum, showcasing the simple, rustic living conditions of Matera’s past residents. The cave is furnished with authentic period furniture, tools, artifacts, and even household items that were used by families who once lived in these rock homes. You’ll see how they lived with minimal comforts, relying on the natural surroundings for shelter and resources.

Check out Matera Cathedral (Cattedrale di Santa Maria della Bruna)

The Matera Cathedral is one of the most prominent landmarks in Matera, and something you shouldn’t miss out on. Perched on top of Civita Hill at the highest point in the city, it’s hard to miss, and the view over the Sassi district? Absolutely unreal. The church itself is a beautiful blend of Romanesque and Apulian Romanesque styles, with that stunning white stone facade and rose window that makes it stand out. A real showstopper.

Inside, it’s just as impressive – think vaulted ceilings, frescoes, and a crypt that’s got some serious historical vibes. Plus, the location means you get those epic panoramic views over the city and its cave dwellings. So, yeah, it’s definitely worth a visit if you’re in the area.

Learn history at Casa Noha

If you’re looking to dive into Matera’s history, Casa Noha is a great place to start. It’s not a typical museum with exhibits or old furniture, since the space was fully renovated, but it offers something pretty unique—a 25-minute film experience spread across three rooms. 

The documentary is an awesome way to get a deeper understanding of Matera’s past, and honestly, we kind of wish we’d started our whole trip here! The audio is provided in multiple languages, so it’s easy to follow, and the storytelling is well done.

That said, Casa Noha does get mixed reviews – some people find it a bit overpriced, but if you’re looking for a quick, engaging way to learn about the city, it’s definitely worth the time. I’d suggest watching the film first, then heading out to explore the city with all that context in mind — it’ll totally change how you see Matera!

Sip cocktails in a cave at Bar Zipa

Bar Zipa is the coolest little cave bar in Matera, and it ended up being a great recommendation from our hotel! The place has cushions scattered around, creating a super chill vibe where you can relax and enjoy a drink.

When we visited, it was pretty busy (and HOT!), and of course, all the shaded spots were already taken. We gave up on waiting for a spot outside and decided to head inside because, honestly, I couldn’t bear the thought of basking in the sun any longer, haha! 

Note that this spot is usually recommended for sunset, BUT – there’s no view of the Sassi here! Instead, we came for a drink midday when we needed a little pick me up, and went to a terrace bar overlooking the Sassi later on for sunset.

Take an Ape tour of Matera 

If you’re looking to learn about Matera’s history without doing more walking (because let’s be real, those cobblestone streets and steps can get tiring), an Ape tour is a fun and chill way to see the city! 

Apes are three-wheeled Italian vehicles, and there’s plenty of tours that take you to all of the must-see spots. We saw them all over Puglia as well. 

Late Afternoon Matera Itinerary: Modern Matera

Lunch at a Local Trattoria

After huffing and puffing up and down the stone steps of the Sassi, you’re probably ready for some lunch! We had a super casual meal of fresh pasta from Passeggiando 1 – The Way Of Pasta and it was delicious! You’d think after a week of road tripping around Puglia and eating pasta everyday we’d get sick of it, but nope! Our love of homemade pasta goes deep! 

If you’re looking for another option, head to Il Rusticone (literally a one minute walk from The Way of Pasta, haha). While pizza is their specialty, they also serve meat and cheese boards and puccia (kind of like a panini, but with pizza crust and stuffed with a variety of cured meats and cheeses).

Explore Matera’s New Town (The Piano)

When you’ve had your fill of ancient cave dwellings and stunning views of the Sassi, it’s time to head to Matera’s New Town, also known as The Piano. This part of the city is a world away from the rustic charm of the Sassi, offering a totally different vibe. Think modern shops, cozy cafes, and lively piazzas. 

The Piano is where most of Matera’s residents moved to in the 1950s, after the government relocated them from the Sassi to help with overcrowding and sanitation issues. It’s a blend of traditional Italian streets with a more contemporary feel — so it’s the perfect place to spend an afternoon shopping or just wandering around, soaking up the local atmosphere.

Of course there’s a few things not to miss over in this part of Matera:

  • Cool down underground at Palombaro Lungo: If you’re looking for a break from the sun (because, let’s face it, it can get toasty in Matera), check out Palombaro Lungo, an incredible ancient underground cistern. It’s carved right into the rock and was once used to store water for the city. The best part? It only takes about 10 minutes to walk through and only a few euros.
  • Snack Stop at Bar Caffè Tripoli: Need a quick pick-me-up? Bar Caffè Tripoli in the New Town is a great spot for coffee and pastries. With its classic Italian café vibe, it’s perfect for relaxing and enjoying the local atmosphere. Grab a seat outside, enjoy a cappuccino, and soak in the vibe of Matera’s more modern side.
  • Tre Archi Viewpoint: Head to Belvedere Luigi Guerricchio dei “Tre Archi” (aka the Three Arches viewpoint) for one of the best panoramic views of Matera. I loved admiring the city’s unique layout and getting a sense of the contrast between the modern town and the ancient cave dwellings here.
  • Cool Off with some Gelato: No visit to Matera is complete without gelato! After a snack, head to one of the local gelaterias for a scoop (or two) of creamy, delicious gelato. We’re obsessed with classic flavors like stracciatella and pistachio – mmm… the best! We went to both Gelateria Caffè Cremeria dell’Angelo (in the modern part of Matera) and I Vizi degli Angeli (near our hotel) and enjoyed both spots, haha.

Cave Spa

Before getting ready for sunset and dinner, might as well take advantage of the spa (if your hotel has one of course). Luckily for us, our hotel, Aquatio, had one of the most epic spas I’ve seen in my life –  an entire wellness center complete with a swimming pool carved into the rock. 

Belvedere Murgia Timone – OPTIONAL

If you have time (and don’t mind moving your car…), drive over to Belvedere Murgia Timone (about 15 minutes away) – another of the best viewpoints of Matera! Some people decide to hike here, but to be honest, I really don’t recommend that if it’s even a little hot out. 

After finally finding a parking spot the day before, the last thing we wanted to do was move our car and lose our spot, so we decided to skip this. I guess we could’ve gone the next day once we left Matera, but we had a few other stops on the way back to Bari we wanted to see (namely Gravina in Puglia and Altamura), so we decided to skip Belvedere Murgia Timone.

Things to do in Matera at Night

Enjoy an aperitivo with a view

After a relaxing spa session (or perhaps a hike up to Belvedere Murgia Timone), it’s time to grab a sunset spritz! And the best part about Matera is that since the entire town is built into the rocks, there’s plenty of great spots to enjoy your drink with a view.

  • Crialoss Panoramic Cave Cafe Bistrot: This charming little spot offers some of the best views of Matera, along with drinks and light bites like salads, sandwiches, and bruschettas. We actually ended up here midday, simply because it was on the opposite side of town and, well, I wasn’t about to climb all those steep steps again later on (lol!). Note that the cafe is open from 1-10pm, but you can only make a reservation until 6pm – after that, it’s first-come, first-served, so plan accordingly.
  • Terrazza Cavaliere: This is where we went for sunset, and lemme tell you – it was packed! We got lucky and snagged a table a bit before the rush, so if you want a good spot, I recommend arriving early to beat the crowd. But once you’re settled, the views are definitely worth it.
  • Area 8: If you’re looking for something a bit different (way more modern with a cool, colorful vibe), head to this cocktail bar! It admittedly doesn’t have a sweeping view of Matera like the others do, but hey, nothing wrong with a little variety!

Sunset at Belvedere di Piazza Giovanni Pascoli 

Matera has tons of great places to watch the sunset thanks to its dramatic landscape of cave dwellings and ancient architecture. But if you’re looking for the perfect spot? Belvedere di Piazza Giovanni Pascoli is a personal favorite – mainly because it was just a short walk from our hotel, and next to Terrazza Cavaliere, haha.

If you’ve had a few cocktails, it’s easy to lose track of time, so make sure you arrive a bit early to grab a good spot and enjoy the changing colors as the sun dips behind the Sassi! It gets busy, busy, busy, but understandably so since it’s just gorgeous!

Enjoy dinner in Matera

When it comes to dining in Matera, you’ve got plenty of delicious options to choose from. I mean, this is Italy we’re talking about! BUT if you wanna eat at one of the top restaurants in town, you’ll need to make a reservation. Most places are on the smaller side and tend to fill up quickly.

We didn’t plan ahead at all (whoops), so ended up at a random spot, Morgan Restaurant, which turned out to be a great find with homemade pizza and pasta!

If you’re looking for something fancy, you’ll be excited to hear that Matera’s home to a few Michelin-starred restaurants, including Dimora Ulmo, Vitantonio Lombardo Ristorante, Le Bubbole, Baccanti, and Ego Ristorante Matera. 

In the mood for something a little less formal but still high-quality? Check out Osteria Matera Mì, Ristorante Burro Salato, OHIMÈ Matera, Ristorante 900 Casa Taccardi, and Osteria al Casale. These spots offer refined, high-end meals with a relaxed vibe, perfect if you want great food without the stuffy atmosphere.

A few other dinner options if you wanna be more prepared than we were (aka make a reservation):

  • Regiacorte Restaurant and Lounge Terrace: This is one of the most popular upscale restaurants in all of Matera, since you get an amazing view of the Rock Church. It’s definitely on the pricier side, but there’s both tasting menus and a la carte options. Make a reservation and be sure to request a table with a terrace view (although the indoor seating is inside a cave, so no bad options here).
  • La Lopa: With lots of traditional dishes of Matera on the menu and literally tucked away inside a cave, what can be better?!
  • Vitantonio Lombardo Ristorante: One of the most creative menus in Matera, with a few tasting menus to choose from. Everything at this fine-dining restaurant is presented in a super creative way, and you get to eat inside a cave! Albeit it’s definitely on the pricier side.
  • Trattoria del Caveoso: Here you’ll find regional cheeses, pasta, & grilled meats in a stylish, rustic space carved right into the rock, plus a terrace! Expect warm and authentic flavors in a cozy, inviting atmosphere.

Take an Evening Stroll Through the Sassi

After dinner, take an evening stroll through the Sassi. The narrow, winding streets really come alive at night, illuminated by soft street lamps that make the ancient stonework look even more enchanting. We loved wandering through the alleys after dinner – everything just looks so different in soft lighting. 

And if you’re craving a bit of nightlife, hit up some of Matera’s trendy bars. Bar Vico Solitario has a cozy vibe with killer cocktails, while Caffè Montalbano often features live music or events that keep the energy alive. And you’ll probably even see some of the locals come out – it’s not all tourists here like most other Italian spots.

To wrap up your night, don’t miss the chance to take in the views from one of the lookouts over the Sassi. And yes, we went back to Belvedere di Piazza Giovanni Pascoli, haha – told you we went there a lot! The skyline at night, with the ancient cave dwellings illuminated, is a sight I’ll never forget. Grab a few photos or simply soak in the beauty – it’s a magical way to end your one day in Matera!

Hope this gives you lots of ideas on things to do in Matera! Are you planning to spend one day in Matera soon?!



The post One Day in Matera Itinerary: Italy’s Breathtaking Sassi Escape appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/things-to-do-in-matera-itinerary/feed/ 0
7 Days in Puglia: The Perfect 7 Day Puglia Road Trip Itinerary https://apassionandapassport.com/puglia-road-trip-itinerary/ https://apassionandapassport.com/puglia-road-trip-itinerary/#respond Mon, 04 Nov 2024 02:50:14 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=31579 Headed to southern Italy and looking for the perfect Puglia itinerary? Keep reading for my complete 7 day Puglia road trip, which covers everything you need to know and then some! Imagine sunrise over Puglia’s breathtaking cliffs in Polignano a Mare. Wandering through the iconic trulli of Alberobello and driving through the cacti-filled countryside. SavoringContinue Reading

The post 7 Days in Puglia: The Perfect 7 Day Puglia Road Trip Itinerary appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Headed to southern Italy and looking for the perfect Puglia itinerary? Keep reading for my complete 7 day Puglia road trip, which covers everything you need to know and then some!

Imagine sunrise over Puglia’s breathtaking cliffs in Polignano a Mare. Wandering through the iconic trulli of Alberobello and driving through the cacti-filled countryside. Savoring more delicious orecchiette and fresh seafood than you ever thought possible. What about laying on sun-soaked beaches, exploring the endless olive groves, and having dinner at a local masseria. That’s what this Puglia road trip is all about! And it’s glorious.

The perfect Puglia itinerary blends vibrant cities, charming towns, and stunning beaches. Known as the heel of Italy’s boot, Puglia offers a gorgeous rugged coastline alongside colorful, historic architecture. And with a mild climate of ~300 sunny days a year and some of Italy’s best wines and fresh burrata at every meal, what could be better? It truly is the Southern Italian way of life.

There’s no denying that I’m head over heels for Italy. Over the years, I’ve been to Rome, Florence, Cinque Terre, Venice (and Burano!), Naples, the Amalfi Coast, Verona, Lake Como, and more. So I was thrilled when I finally got to head off on a Puglia road trip with my husband. And what a week it was – relaxing by the sparkling sea, exploring the whitewashed villages, and eating all the fresh seafood we could handle.

I had started hearing about this gorgeous region a few years ago, so I knew I wanted to get there before the masses of tourists started pouring in. Puglia is still largely untouched by international travelers, but it definitely won’t stay that way for long. We encountered mostly Italian and European tourists, although the region is definitely becoming more popular with Americans. It may not be a hidden gem anymore, but you can still stumble upon local favorites and soak up the authentic Puglian vibe.

Get ready for homemade orecchiette and mouth watering focaccia, beautiful baroque and medieval cities, and all the sunset Aperol spritz you can imagine – la dolce vita indeed (the sweet life)!

Puglia Itinerary At-A-Glance

There’s tons of ways to do a Puglia road trip, but after doing extensive research and taking our own trip, I’m sharing our exact week in Puglia (with extra time for Matera). And honestly, I wouldn’t change a thing – our Puglia itinerary was practically perfect! 

A fantastic blend of exploring the white-washed streets of Ostuni, relaxing in picturesque coastal towns like Monopoli and Gallipoli, and visiting the iconic trulli in Alberobello. Plus lots of time at the pristine beaches and grottoes (my favorite).

We did a clockwise Puglia road trip from Bari, starting with Polignano a Mare and Monopoli, heading inland to the towns of the Valle d’Itria, driving along the southern coastline from Otranto to Gallipoli, then finally making our way towards Matera (and then back to Bari).

Most Puglia road trips focus on the eastern coast of the peninsula, but I found a bunch of stops on the western coast that I really wanted to see, so I made sure to include those as well! 

  • Day 1: Polignano a Mare
  • Day 2: Monopoli
  • Day 3: Towns in Valle D’Itria 
  • Day 4: Ostuni and Otranto
  • Day 5: East Coast of Southern Puglia
  • Day 6: Scenic Stops on the Salento Coast
  • Day 7: Gallipoli
  • Day 8: Matera (Optional)
  • Day 9: Matera and Bari (Optional)

7 Days in Puglia Itinerary Logistics

Where is Puglia

First off, where is this Adriatic gem anyways? For starters, Puglia is located in the southeastern region of Italy, often referred to as the “heel” of the Italian boot (look at a map and you’ll see exactly what I mean). It’s not a specific town or city, but a whole bunch of whitewashed villages, agricultural plains (so many olive groves!), picturesque towns on the sea, and charming coastal cliffs. It’s an entire region of Italy, kinda like Provence in the South of France.

Puglia is bordered by the Adriatic Sea to the east and the Ionian Sea to the southeast, meaning tons of sun-kissed beaches and sea views – my kinda place! To the west, it shares a border with the Basilicata region (where you’ll find Matera), while Campania (with Naples and the Amalfi Coast) lies to the northwest. AND it boasts the most eastern point in Italy (Cape Palascìa, commonly known as Capo d’Otranto).

Here’s a look at the distances from Puglia to some major cities and destinations in Italy:

  • Bari (Puglia’s capital): ~0 kilometers (as it’s in Puglia)
  • Naples: ~250 kilometers (155 miles)
  • Amalfi Coast: ~270 kilometers (168 miles)
  • Rome: ~400 kilometers (250 miles)
  • Florence: ~570 kilometers (354 miles)
  • Cinque Terre: ~650 kilometers (404 miles)
  • Milan: ~950 kilometers (590 miles)

Looking to combine a Puglia road trip with another destination in Italy? A lot of people pair their Puglia itinerary with the Amalfi Coast, but here’s a tip: hit up Amalfi first. Trust me on this one. 

After soaking up the charm of Puglia, the crowds and steep prices in Amalfi can be a bit of a shock. Knock out Amalfi first, and you’ll be pleasantly surprised when you roll into Puglia – fewer tourists and way better prices (on everything from spritz, gelato, and accommodation).

How to Get to Puglia

Thankfully, getting to Puglia is relatively straightforward, whether you’re traveling from within Italy or coming from abroad. 

Flying to Puglia

Yes, there’s airports in Puglia itself (I didn’t realize this until starting to research for our trip). The main airports are Bari Karol Wojtyła Airport (BRI) and Brindisi Airport (BDS). Note that if you’re coming from the US, you’ll most definitely need to connect through a major European hub like Rome or Milan.

Bari Airport is larger and has more international connections, while Brindisi mainly serves regional and seasonal flights. If you’re already in Italy you can fly into either, but choose Bari if you’ll be starting your Puglia road trip in the northern part of the region (like us), or Brindisi to enjoy the endless sandy beaches of Salento and explore Lecce.

Taking the Train to Puglia

Already in Italy like we were? You can easily take the train!

We started our Italian Euro trip in Rome, then took a direct high-speed Trenitalia train from Roma Termini station to Bari Centrale station in just over 4 hours. There’s also direct routes from Naples as well, taking about 3 hours or so.

Psst – there’s also long distance buses available through companies like FlixBus which offer routes to Bari and Lecce from cities like Rome and Naples. These buses take a bit longer than the train, but are often way less expensive.

How to Get Around During your 7 Days in Puglia

Driving around Puglia

Driving is the most popular way to get around Puglia, which is why I highly recommend doing a Puglia road trip! Driving gives you utmost flexibility and freedom – perfect if you wanna savor that second gelato and/or spend a few extra hours swimming in the sparkling sea. 

You can rent a car from Bari or Brindisi airports, the train station in Bari (what we did!), or from major cities.

BUT driving does have its disadvantages unfortunately – parking is tough and to be honest, Italian drivers are kinda aggressive and don’t follow the rules of the road. Way more helpful tips below.

A few parking and driving tips:

Finding a parking spot: Parking in Puglia can be a bit of a learning curve compared to what you’re used to back home. You’ll find a mix of paid and free street parking, plus plenty of parking lots that come in handy. Psst – if you can’t find a lot, just search for “parcheggio” in the town you’re visiting.

On the street (and in some lots), you’ll see different colored lines which indicate specific parking rules. To avoid any annoying tickets (we unfortunately got one!), remember this:

  • Blue lines: You can park here, but a fee is required.
  • White lines: This indicates free parking in the designated area.
  • Yellow lines: Reserved for local residents only (not you!)

If you’re interested in paying for parking via app, download the Easy Park app in advance. You can only use the app if you see a sign for Easy Park on the meter (you’ll need to enter the zone number in the app). 

What is ZTL? The ZTL (Zona a Traffico Limitato) is an area in cities and towns across Puglia and Italy where most cars, especially those of visitors, are restricted. Meaning if you’re not a local, you can’t drive or park in these zones (a big no-no!). ZTL areas are usually located in historic city centers, like those you’ll find in Lecce, Alberobello, Ostuni, etc.

This means you’ll need to park outside the ZTL and walk into the center. But don’t worry – most towns have large paid parking lots conveniently located just outside. We parked plenty of times in the lots and simply walked over to the city center.

International driver’s permit: In order to rent a car in Italy as an international tourist, you need to present an International Driver’s Permit. We typically get ours from AAA, and it’s a super easy process and only ~$20 (plus passport photos). 

Rent a small car: There’s no need for a huge car here in Puglia, and I actually recommend renting the smallest car possible to make parking easier. We drove around in a small Fiat Panda, and were able to park in small spots and navigate the narrow streets with ease. Psst – make sure you know how to properly drive stick if you rent a manual (which is common in Italy and all of Europe). 

Be cautious of local drivers: Just being real and sharing our experience of course, but… we found that locals don’t follow the rules and are super aggressive; they don’t stop at stop signs, they tailgate (pretty badly), and hardly follow speed limits. I guess they’re getting annoyed with the increase of tourism… which I totally get. They don’t look, signal, or stop, they just GO. So be extra, extra vigilant and careful. And always let the locals pass you.

Gas stations: We had no difficulty filling up our car on our Puglia road trip. There’s lots of gas stations around, but be sure to have cash on hand in case your credit card doesn’t work (happened to us a few times). 

Road conditions: Expect mostly paved roads, with lots of one ways, traffic circles, and one lane highways/roads. We thankfully didn’t hit any toll roads (much unlike our Norway road trip, haha), which meant extra cash for gelatos and taralli! You’ll probably encounter some dirt local roads leading to smaller towns and rural areas – these are usually narrower and some have potholes (but OMG the views are outstanding).

Taking the Train around Puglia

If you’re not renting a car (maybe you’re nervous about driving in a different country or would rather not deal with parking), you’ll be glad to know Puglia has a good train network. 

Ferrovie del Sud-Est, which is now under Trenitalia’s ownership, links the smaller towns and inland areas of Puglia. Additionally, Ferrovie Appulo-Lucane connects Puglia with Basilicata, home to the historic city of Matera, Altamura, and Gravina.

Just know there’s not many announcements in English on the trains (keep track of where you are), they run pretty slow, and just assume you’ll be delayed. But hey, they’re not expensive! Just remember to validate your ticket before getting on the train.

While trains make it relatively easy to travel between major cities like Bari, Lecce, and Alberobello, you’ll have a difficult time getting to certain spots on the coastline. Meaning you unfortunately won’t be able to follow my Puglia itinerary exactly.

On foot

Once you’re in town, you can easily wander around on foot. The towns and cities are pretty small, so it’s not hard to see the main highlights by walking. Plus, cars aren’t even allowed in most of them anyways (with the exception of larger cities like Lecce and Bari), so don’t expect any ride shares, haha.  Or you can always get an ape if you’re tired of walking!

When to Plan your 7 Day Puglia Itinerary 

Puglia experiences a Mediterranean climate with distinct seasons, although it’s never a horrible time to visit. I mean, it’s Italy afterall – gelato tastes delicious year round!

Summer (High Season): June to August

Summer is hot and dry. If you’re looking for the heat of Italian summer, you’ll wanna come between June and September (temps often exceed 30°C (86°F)). Yes, it’s the most popular time to visit, but if swimming in the sea, sipping on Aperol spritzes, and enjoying vibrant outdoor festivals are your vibe, then brave the tourists, haha.

But personally? I’d avoid the scorching summer months of July and August. Why? Puglia is an EXTREMELY popular destination for Italian tourists. Meaning the beaches will be over-crowded, restaurants will be hard to get into, and accommodation will be booked out months in advance. Plus, it’s way too hot to actually enjoy strolling around the cities and towns. 

Whatever you do, DO NOT BOOK A TRIP around the holiday “Ferragosto“ on August 15th (there’s an overwhelming number of local tourists then).

Instead of mid-summer, I recommend either very-late May or the very beginning of summer (which I recommend when visiting Greece as well).

For reference, we visited Puglia in early to mid June, and experienced minimal crowds (still lively but nothing insane), near-perfect weather, and the opportunity to enjoy local experiences without the rush. Quite simply, la dolce vita! It wasn’t quite the high season yet, and more crowded than shoulder season, so somewhere in the middle, haha. In my opinion, this is the best time to plan your Puglia itinerary (but make sure you go soon before word gets out about how special Puglia is!). 

Spring (Shoulder Season): March to May

Spring in Puglia brings mild temperatures, ranging from 15°C to 25°C (59°F to 77°F) – meaning it’s the perfect time to explore without breaking a sweat. Crowds are low, especially in March and early April, making it a great time for budget travelers. But just remember that Easter is a huge deal here, so avoid visiting around then.

The sea might be a bit chilly in May, but it’s still fine for a quick dip. Most places will be open for the season by then, and you’ll find the coast is definitely quieter compared to the bustling crowds of July and August.

Fall (Shoulder Season): September to November

Fall starts warm in September (at almost summer temps!), gradually cooling to around 15°C to 25°C (59°F to 77°F) by November. September still sees plenty of tourists, but by early October, the crowds have begun to drop, making it a more relaxed time to visit. 

Plus, prices begin to drop after summer, particularly in late October and November, so this may be a good time to snag some deals on accommodations (luxury masseria, anyone?!)! 

Winter (Low Season): November to February

Winter in Puglia sees cooler temperatures, ranging from 5°C to 15°C (41°F to 59°F). Although tourist numbers are low and accommodations and flights are much less expensive, the weather can be pretty iffy. 

Personally? I’d skip this time of year and visit when there’s a better chance of sun and warm weather – especially if you wanna swim!

Where to Stay in Puglia

When we first started planning our Puglia itinerary, I was super overwhelmed with where to stay. There’s over a dozen towns and cities within the region, so it can be hard to decide exactly which to pick. After doing tons of research (literally hours beyond hours), we ultimately decided to stay in a few different spots!

Note that the eastern side of Puglia is the most popular (this is where you’ll find towns like Alberobello, Polignano a Mare, Ostuni, and Monopoli), so hotel prices will be higher, especially in the height of summer. 

I recommend breaking up your trip into a few parts, and choosing a few home bases so you aren’t lugging your stuff around each and every day (and needing to change hotels every night, how annoying!).

Special accommodation in Puglia

Whatever you do, don’t miss a bucket list experience staying in a trulli and/or a masseria (an old, renovated farmhouse kinda similar to a Finca in Spain). Our trulli was actually set on a masseria so we got the best of both worlds and had both experiences all on the same night!

Make sure to book a trulli hotel and/or masseria way in advance as they get booked up early – sometimes even a few months in advance.

Masseria: As soon as we started planning our Puglia itinerary, I kept hearing about masserias! What are they? Old farmhouses and estates that have been beautifully renovated and converted into tourist accommodations. Many have stylish minimalist designs and an emphasis on lush gardens, traditional cuisine, and sometimes even their own olive groves or vineyards.

There’s a whole bunch in the Itria Valley, and we had such a hard time choosing which one to book! We ultimately decided on the stunning Borgo Canonica, but I was also looking into Masseria Moroseta, Masseria Il Frantoio, Masseria Grieco, and Masseria Le Carrube (we missed out on a few of these because we booked too late).

Trulli: Another speciality accommodation in Puglia! These are the famous iconic round stone structures with conical roofs. You’ll find plenty of them in Alberobello, but they’re actually dotted all around the valley. Expect whitewashed walls, exposed stone, rustic allure, and modern comfort. 

We moved around a bit more than I’d like, staying in Polignano a Mare, a masseria outside of Cisternino, Otranto, Gallipoli, and Matera. Plus a night in Bari before our Puglia road trip since our train got in so late from Rome. It definitely worked and I loved that we maximized our time, but I personally hate having to pack up my suitcase every damn time, haha. 

Of course you can stay in any of the towns in Puglia, but we based ourselves in the following for our 10 day trip:

If you follow my exact Puglia road trip itinerary (or something similar), those areas will work really well if you wanna minimize your driving times. 

Additional Puglia Itinerary FAQs

Currency in Puglia: Like in most other European countries, the currency of Italy (including Puglia) is the euro. Don’t expect to use dollars or pounds (or any other currency) here. I recommend carrying around a bit of cash for street vendors, markets, small, family-owned restaurants, and local shops.

Language in Puglia: The official language in Puglia is Italian. However, you’ll also encounter some regional dialects, such as Pugliese, which can vary significantly across different areas of the region. 

While most people in the hospitality industry (like hotel staff and restaurant workers) speak some English, it’s important to note that Puglia isn’t as heavily frequented by international tourists as other regions of Italy. Therefore, you shouldn’t expect everyone to speak English fluently. We got by with our extremely limited Italian, and locals really appreciated it when we tried to speak their language. 

Is Puglia expensive? Depends who you’re asking, haha. Puglia has become more expensive over the past 10-15 years, but it’s still a budget-friendly option compared to the Amalfi Coast, Cinque Terre, and major cities like Rome and Florence. 

Accommodations in Puglia often provide better value, with charming agriturismos and affordable B&Bs available. We found restaurants to be generally less expensive (a huge plate of delicious fresh pasta was no more than 15 euro), and while some beach clubs charge for loungers and umbrellas, there’s also plenty of free public beaches. 

Beaches in Puglia: Puglia is known for its stunning beaches, but most visitors don’t realize that many of these are actually rocky! Although you can totally hang out on the rocks like the locals do, just bring water shoes. 

Note — Head to the western coast for the best sandy shores. 

You’ll see many lidos (Italian beach clubs) dotting the coastline, with things like sun loungers, umbrellas, and beachside dining. And thankfully they usually come at a reasonable price, unlike those on the Amalfi Coast!

How many days to spend in Puglia? We spent 7 days in Puglia (9 if you count our time in Matera), and thought it was the perfect amount of time. 

Many people come for less (4 or 5 days in Puglia seem to be kinda popular), but I honestly don’t think it’s enough. This can work if you focus on the popular spots of Polignano a Mare, Alberobello, and the towns in the Valle d’Itria, but gives little room to really explore and relax at the beaches (or head to the stunning west coast).

If you can swing it, I highly recommend at least a week in Puglia.

What are the main towns in Puglia?

  • Bari: The vibrant capital of Puglia, known for its historic old town, beautiful seafront promenade, and the stunning Basilica di San Nicola.
  • Lecce: Often called the “Florence of the South,” Lecce is famous for its baroque architecture, including the intricate Basilica di Santa Croce and stunning piazzas.
  • Alberobello: Renowned for its unique trulli houses, this ridiculously popular (and crowded!) UNESCO World Heritage site offers a fairytale-like atmosphere with its cone-roofed buildings.
  • Ostuni: Known as the “White City,” Ostuni features charming whitewashed buildings perched on a hilltop, offering stunning views of the surrounding countryside.
  • Polignano a Mare: A picturesque coastal town famous for its dramatic cliffs, crystal-clear waters, and charming old town, as well as being the birthplace of the famous singer Domenico Modugno.
  • Monopoli: This coastal gem boasts beautiful beaches, a charming old town with narrow streets, and a lovely harbor lined with fishing boats.
  • Gallipoli: A historic town on the Ionian Sea, Gallipoli is known for its beautiful beaches, old town situated on an island, and a lively seafood scene.
  • Matera: Although technically in the Basilicata region, it’s often included in Puglia itineraries for its breathtaking cave dwellings (Sassi) and rich history as a UNESCO World Heritage site.

Puglia vs. Salento: When I first started planning our Puglia road trip, I was a tad confused about this! Puglia refers to the entire region (all the way from Gargano in the north to Santa Maria di Leuca in the south), while Salento is only the southern peninsula of Puglia (the actual heel looking part of the region).

What to Eat in Puglia (Local Specialities)

Let’s face it – one of the main reasons we love traveling to Italy is to eat ALL the delicious food. And lemme tell ya – Puglia did not disappoint one bit. Let’s just say we ate really well during our week in Puglia, haha.

There’s a reason Puglia is often called the “breadbasket of Italy” – the land is super fertile here, which then produces an abundance of high-quality ingredients. Puglia prioritizes fresh, seasonal produce, the pasta is often handmade, and OMG that olive oil is delicious. And the region is famous for its burrata – reason enough for a Puglia road trip, haha.

Here’s some of the most popular local dishes and specialties you should try:

  • Orecchiette: ear-shaped pasta that’s the true signature dish of Puglia, often served with cime di rapa (turnip tops/broccoli rabe) or a simple tomato sauce
  • Focaccia Barese: a thick, soft focaccia topped with tomatoes, olives, and sometimes herbs — a perfect snack or appetizer
  • Pasticciotto: a sweet pastry filled with custard or cream (my new favorite, especially when served warm)
  • Burrata: a creamy cheese that originated in Puglia, made from mozzarella and cream. My all-time favorite thing!
  • Sgagliozze: fried polenta squares, usually served as a street food snack
  • Tiella di Riso, Patate e Cozze: a savory pie made with rice, potatoes, and mussels, baked to perfection
  • Cicoria: sautéed chicory, often served as a side dish, highlighting the region’s fresh vegetables
  • Lampascioni: sweet-tasting wild hyacinth bulbs, often pickled or sautéed
  • Seafood: Puglia’s coastal location means fresh seafood is a staple — dishes like spaghetti alle vongole (spaghetti with clams) and grilled fish are common
  • Vino Primitivo: a robust red wine native to Puglia
  • Taralli: a crunchy, ring-shaped cracker that’s often flavored with olive oil eaten as a snack (and it’s delicious!)

Now that all the important logistics are outta the way, let’s get started on the Puglia road trip! 

Perfect 7 Day Puglia Road Trip Itinerary

A few notes about this Puglia road trip:

  • This Puglia itinerary assumes you have 7+ full days to explore the region. Meaning you’ve arrived the day/night before, and are ready to start exploring the next morning. If you have less time for your Puglia road trip, you’ll unfortunately need to cut out a few towns/villages. 
  • This Puglia road trip itinerary is a ROAD TRIP. Yes, you can still see and do a lot on this Puglia itinerary by taking the trains, but you’ll need to skip quite a few local experiences/sights and you won’t be able to be as flexible. 
  • In order to see and do a whole lot, it’s very go-go-go. While there’s a little time on this Puglia itinerary for some relaxation and beach time, it’s still a very active trip. Feel free to pick and choose what you do in each town if you’d rather swim a bit more. 
  • You’ll wanna make some restaurant reservations in advance, especially if you’re visiting between July and September – the most crowded months in Puglia.
  • Whatever you do, don’t miss a night at a masseria and/or a trulli, dinner at a masseria (farmhouse), and a local cheese making demonstration. Three of our favorite experiences. 
  • This itinerary assumes you’re moving around and NOT basing yourself in Bari or one town. Distances are long (Puglia is larger than most people realize – it’s 10x the size of Rhode Island!), so you’ll need to switch accommodation every few nights in order to minimize drive times.
  • It skips Lecce entirely. Why? Since we were more focused on scenic beauty, beaches, and small towns, we decided to skip Lecce, one of the larger cities on the Puglian peninsula. I’ll make a note in the itinerary below where it’d fit best if you wanna include it on your Puglia itinerary. 

Day 0: Getting to Bari

First things first, get yourself over to Puglia!

Since we were coming from San Francisco all the way in Northern California, we opted to take nonstop flights to Rome (we’ve come to hate connecting flights and will always choose direct if possible, haha). Because of that, after some gelato and spontaneous colosseum sightseeing, we took a 4 hour train from Roma Termini station straight to Bari.

We arrived quite late (well after dark), so were glad we booked a hotel within walking distance to the train station. If you arrive earlier than we did, you can drive straight to Polignano a Mare for an extra night over there. 

Where to Stay in Bari: Palazzo Danisi Rooms & Suites (great location and large, clean rooms, although a teeny-tiny elevator, haha)

Day 1: Pick up rental car in Bari, head to Polignano a Mare

Benvenuto in Puglia (Welcome to Puglia!). It’s the first official day of your Puglia road trip, so go pick up your rental car (we rented from Sixt by the Bari Centrale train station), and make your way over to Polignano a Mare! The drive should only take about 30 minutes or so.

Polignano a Mare is one of the most popular towns in all of Puglia. Known for its breathtaking cliffs and crystal-clear waters, it features a jaw-dropping landscape that perfectly captures the vibe of the Italian coastline. The town is also famous for its charming old town, filled with narrow streets and vibrant local culture.

And once you get here, spend the day exploring this stunning coastal town. You can honestly just wander around (the whole area is stunning right on the Adriatic Sea), but here’s a few things not to miss:

  • Grab cocktails with a view at Aquamarea
  • Have some of the best focaccia of your life at La Focacceria
  • Stroll through the Old Town
  • Admire the views from Belvedere su Lama Monachile – THE iconic viewpoint in Polignano a Mare (it gets busy over here)
  • Take photos from Belvedere Terrazza Santo Stefano and Pendma Chiatt (two other stunning viewpoints)
  • Take a boat ride through the cliffs and caves – this was easily our favorite thing we did in Polignano a Mare (complete with swimming in the sparkling sea and sunbathing on the deck) 
  • Sunbathe on Lama Monachile surrounded by dramatic towering cliffs (if you can find a spot for your towel, haha)
  • Indulge in the best gelato at MOREA Gelatieri (we loved the pistachio and stracciatella flavors)
  • Try the special coffee (coffee, amaretto, cream, and lemon zest) at The Super Mago del Gelo Mario Campanella
  • Learn how to make orecchiette pasta in an Apulian cooking class with a local 

Should you have dinner at the iconic Grotta Palazzese? This is the most famous restaurant in Polignano a Mare, and possibly all of Puglia. Reviews say the food is nothing to write home about and it’s nothing special, BUT it’s the experience of literally dining inside a natural sea cave overlooking the sea that’s the real draw. 

We opted to skip it, as there’s a minimum spend of €195 per person and we’d rather spend that money on other things. But you decide for yourself – it’s always busy for a reason (you need to make reservations months in advance).

Where to Sleep: San Michele Suites in Polignano a Mare 

We absolutely adored this hotel, and had the famous viewpoint right next to us! Breakfast was served in a cozy dining room every morning, staff were beyond helpful with anything and everything, and we loved the private parking – so convenient. 

If San Michele Suites is sold out or you’re looking for a hotel a bit more lively, check out Aquamarea (we couldn’t decide between the two and kinda just flipped a coin, haha).

Day 2: Day Trip to Monopoli

Next up on this Puglia itinerary – a day trip to Monopoli, only a 15 minute drive from Polignano a Mare. 

Morning: Cheese Demonstration

But first, a cheese demonstration and tasting! There’s a few of them in the area, but we chose to book at Masseria Lamapecora, a super authentic, family-owned dairy farm. We saw the entire process of burrata, stracciatella, and fresh mozzarella making from start to finish. 

And once the demonstrations were over, we were given entire plates full of soft and hard cheese to snack on (the ricotta was TO DIE FOR), salami, olives, bread, AND an entire jug of wine (so much that even we, self-proclaimed cheese lovers, couldn’t finish it all). I’d plan to skip breakfast for sure. A definite highlight of our Puglia road trip.

Psst – if you’d rather do a cheese tour on Day 4 closer to Ostuni, here’s two options: 

Afternoon: Hang in Monopoli

After stuffing yourself with cheese, make the short drive to Monopoli – it’s only 15 minutes away.

Monopoli is a traditional fishing town set right on the Adriatic with a picturesque port and a charming old town. It’s a bit more laid-back and feels more authentic than nearby Polignano a Mare, and definitely one of our favorite little towns on this Puglia itinerary. You can definitely see glimpses of everyday life here – exactly what we love about traveling in Italy.

A few things to not-miss here in Monopoli:

  • Get lost and photograph the historic old town (centro storico)
  • Step into the stunning Cattedrale Maria Santissima della Madia, a beautiful domed Baroque church with tons of marble artwork
  • Hang on the rocks by Cala Porta Vecchia (Monopoli’s town beach) and take a dip in the sea 
  • Stroll along the lungomare (a walking promenade that runs along the coast) and visit Castello Carlo V (a beautifully restored 16th century castle)
  • Visit Porto Antico, a cute fisherman’s harbor with iconic blue and red gonzo fishing boats 
  • Take a walking tour of Monopoli to learn about its rich history and local traditions
  • Sample Puglian specialities (like focaccia, panzerottini, gelato, taralli, olives, and a glass of wine on a street food tour 

Night: Dinner at a Masseria 

A dinner at a masseria (a restored farmhouse often set amidst olive groves and farmland) is an intimate experience you don’t wanna miss while here in Puglia. And boy were we blown away! Most offer home-cooked meals featuring local ingredients, and only have a few tables available per night – so be sure to book early!

We chose dinner at Masseria Il Frantoio, and lemme tell ya, the website doesn’t do the place justice (at all). To be honest, we didn’t know exactly what we were booking, and were more than pleasantly surprised. We feasted on an 8-course meal with dishes like asparagus flan, squash blossom fritters, ragout pasta (cooked to absolute perfection I might add), meat rolls with caciocavallo cheese, and chard with lentil cream. 

I could eat that meal every single night of my life and die happy. And I LOVED that the dishes were 100% organic, with most ingredients straight from the farm on their property! Exactly what we come to Italy for.

We sat outside in the courtyard filled with blooming flowers, twinkling fairy lights, and candles – oh so romantic and dreamy.  One of our favorite nights on our Puglia itinerary by far! 

I had really wanted to do the blind tasting meal at Masseria Moroseta, but sadly it was already booked up! Once you know your dates, book dinner at a masseria ASAP.

Logistically, dinner at Masseria Il Frantoio may work better on Night 3 as it’s closer to Ostuni/Cisternino, but we wanted to ensure we had ample time to enjoy our hotel the next night (you’ll see what I mean). Plus, we booked too late and it was completely sold out other nights, whoops.

Where to Sleep: San Michele Suites or Aquamarea in Polignano a Mare 

Day 3: Towns in Valle D’Itria 

Morning: Alberobello

Wake up bright and early – we’re off to Alberobello, Puglia’s trulli town (about a 30 minute drive from Polignano a Mare)! This is where you’ll find the iconic trulli, traditional dry stone huts with conical roofs. And it sure looks like a fairytale with over 1,000 trulli here!

Since Alberobello is one of the most touristy towns in Puglia, you’ll wanna get here on the earlier side to beat the big buses that drop people off in hundreds. We parked around 8:30am or so and wandered amongst the trulli for a bit until it got crowded. Then we had some of the best focacceria al pomodoro of our lives at La Lira and promptly left, haha. A few hours was enough for us (plus we had more towns to see!). 

There’s honestly not tons to do here besides strolling around the UNESCO World Heritage Site, so just soak in the atmosphere and pick up a fun souvenir or two. Alberobello is the main tourist trap in Puglia, but still a must-see (just arrive early!).

The town is divided into two main districts: Rione Monti and Rione Aia Piccola. Rione Monti is the more touristy area (with the highest concentration of trulli), where many trulli have been converted into shops, cafes, and accommodations. Rione Aia Piccola is a smaller but less touristy area of trulli, that’s much quieter and has a more residential feel. 

If you’d rather wander around with a local guide and actually learn a thing or two, consider signing up for this 2-hour guided trulli tour. I think our visit would have had a lot more meaning if we understood the history and significance.

Pro tip: Keep an eye out for signs that say “Vista Panoramica” and head up to enjoy the view from the shop’s terrace. To access the stunning viewpoints, you’ll need to buy something from the shop – just a small purchase will do!

Psst – before heading to Alberobello we checked out of our hotel and packed up our bags so we could leave them in the car for the day. No reason to head back to Polignano a Mare if there’s no reason to. We made sure to remove any valuables and left nothing in plain sight (something we’re accustomed to living in San Francisco).

Afternoon: Explore the Itria Valley 

Once you’ve had enough of the inevitable crowds in Alberobello, make your way to a few other towns in the Itria Valley (Valle d’Itria). This is a picturesque region in Puglia known for its rolling hills, charming towns, idyllic countryside, and distinctive trulli houses (like what we just saw this morning).

Besides Alberobello, there’s three popular towns in the valley not far from each other (10-15 minutes away). I suggest picking two and wandering throughout those for an hour or two each, stopping whenever you’re hungry, haha. 

One of the main draws of these towns is the lack of tourist attractions (and crowds) – simply wander around and enjoy (with a few aperol spritz of course). 

They each offer a slice of authentic Italian life, very much the opposite of touristy Alberobello, haha.

  • Locorotondo: We loved little Locorotondo! The town is known for its circular historic center, whitewashed buildings, and breathtaking views of the surrounding countryside. We had a lovely afternoon break sipping cocktails at a charming terrace bar overlooking the vineyards, olive groves, and trulli below. Truly relaxing and idyllic, even with the Italian sun beating down on us. Don’t miss Punto Panoramico Locorotondo – we loved this little park at the top of the hill with panoramic views of the Itria Valley.
  • Cisternino: Another quaint hilltop town renowned for its well-preserved medieval architecture and narrow cobblestone streets. Time really slows down here, and it’s the perfect spot to enjoy a coffee or aperitivo.
  • Martina Franca: We didn’t end up making it over to Martina Franca, but I’ve heard really good things! Known for its stunning baroque architecture, the town features impressive palaces and churches, particularly the Basilica di San Martino, which showcases intricate details and a beautiful facade. 

Note that many towns essentially shut down between 1 PM and 4 PM – meaning they’re super quiet and not much is open (although parking may be free!). We inadvertently visited Cisternino during this down time and found practically everything closed besides one gelato shop. Other people seem to love Cisternino but it was way too quiet for us, possibly due to the hours we visited. Just something to keep in mind.

Night: Relax and Dinner at Borgo Canonica

After exploring the tiny towns of the Itria Valley, we made our way to our accommodation for the night – the special Borgo Canonica! Part masseria, part trulli, it’s truly the best of both worlds.

We spent a few relaxing hours lounging by the pool, sipping spritz’ at sunset, enjoying our spacious trulli suite, and then eating a delicious dinner amongst the olive trees. Another perfect night. 

If you really can’t sit still and wanna take advantage of the night, you can head over to Borgo Antico Bistro in Ostuni for sunset and dinner/drinks. We absolutely LOVED our time at Borgo Canonica so decided to stay on the masseria grounds instead of rushing around. 

Where to Sleep: Borgo Canonica (right outside Cisternino)

There’s quite a few trulli hotels to choose from, but we LOVED this one set in the heart of Valle D’Itria, while still feeling remote, quiet, and relaxing. The hotel grounds are stunning, the pool is oh so peaceful, and it was so fun to sleep in a trulli! Plus, there’s free private parking which is always appreciated. 

Day 4: Ostuni and Otranto

Late morning and Lunch: Ostuni

After a slow morning at our masseria, we had an eventful few hours in Ostuni. It’s known as the “White City of Puglia” because of all the beautiful whitewashed houses, which many say resemble Greece, but I honestly didn’t see it, haha.

Regardless, we had the most insane orecchiette pasta, loved the views over the valley, and ended up at the police station (for a parking ticket… which took us forever to figure out how to pay lol).

A few things not to miss in Ostuni:

  • Lunch at Osteria Piazzetta Cattedral, a Michelin-starred restaurant with a cozy dining room where we had a delicious meal of orecchiette with turnip tops 
  • Take in the views of Ostuni from Aussichtspunkt Ostuni Altstadt
  • Admire the frescoes of the Duomo di Santa Maria Assunta
  • Stroll along Via Cattedrale, a famous street with plenty of shops and restaurants
  • Take a photo of the iconic Blue Door (La Casa con la Porta Blu) 
  • People watch and enjoy a gelato at Arco Scoppa
  • Explore the maze of narrow, winding streets in the historic center 
  • Beat the heat and save your feet by taking an Ape tour of the town (a 40 minute tour of the old city on wheels)
  • Enjoy aperitivos and wine at Borgo Antico Bistrot 

If you’re looking to include Lecce on your Puglia itinerary, this is the afternoon to do so. Lecce is a larger city with a more urban vibe, famous for its gigantic cathedral in the massive Piazza del Duomo and the Roman Amphitheater at Piazza Sant’Oronzo. And make sure to try the local pastry, the delicious cream-filled pasticciotto.

I think if we hadn’t gotten that parking ticket, we would have spent a few hours in Lecce, but we sadly missed it. I honestly wasn’t too fussed about missing out since I was more interested in all the scenic beauty than the history and Baroque architecture in Lecce. Plus, I was heading to Florence in a few weeks, and people say Lecce is the “Florence of the South”, so… lol. 

Afternoon/Night: Otranto

​​After you’re done strolling through Puglia’s Città Bianca (White City), make the drive over to Otranto, about an hour and a half away (or 35 minutes from Lecce).

We spent a few hours wandering around Otranto, grabbing cones at Gelateria Fisotti (such big chunks of pieces), admiring the turquoise sea, and walking around the shops in the centro storico. To say we got lucky with sunset is an understatement – just look at those gorgeous colors! We watched from the rooftop patio of our hotel (Hotel Palazzo Papaleo) and the colors just kept getting better!

If you’re looking for a dinner rec, I HIGHLY recommend Patronale – my shrimp spaghetti was some of the best I’ve ever had, and my husband devoured his linguine alle vongole (pasta with clams).

Where to sleep: Hotel Palazzo Papaleo in Otranto (or Lecce if you’re feeling a more urban vibe)

Our hotel had a fantastic rooftop complete with hot tub, bar, and sunset views, in a perfect location right in the center of town, plus the staff were SO helpful (basically helped us plan out our next two days AND helped us understand how to pay the parking ticket, haha). Such a great stay!

Day 5: Otranto and East Coast of Southern Puglia

We’re off to the sea today! The east coast of southern Puglia is absolutely spectacular (and filled with breathtaking rock formations and sparkling waters), so you should make a day trip out of it. Thankfully the furthest spot is only 25 minutes away from Otranto! 

Our day actually started with a cloudy morning and then our first Italian thunderstorm (spritzes were had and we paid our parking ticket lol), so we had a later-than-anticipated start. Hopefully this doesn’t happen to you, but oh well, travel be like that sometimes!

There’s three specific spots I recommend you visit:

Torre Sant’Andrea 

Our first stop was Torre Sant’Andrea – and thankfully there’s easy paid parking at Parcheggio dei Faraglioni. From there, it’s just a quick stroll to reach the stunning viewpoints. If you’re only here for photos, plan to spend about 30 to 60 minutes soaking in the scenery. 

However, if you’re keen on swimming, be sure to allocate a few hours for a proper dip in the crystal-clear waters. Just a heads-up: while you can swim here, it’s best to wear water shoes since the entrance is rocky and there isn’t a sandy beach.

The unique rock stacks known as I Faraglioni di Sant’Andrea reminded me of the dramatic cliffs along the Seven Hanging Valleys Trail in Lagos, Portugal, and even the Great Ocean Road in Australia!

Torre Dell’Orso 

Next, we made our way to Torre dell’Orso, one of my favorite spots on our entire Puglia road trip! Just wait until you see the aquamarine waters from above – oh so sparkly and inviting. 

Note that there’s kinda two parts to Torre dell’Orso –  a large sandy beach (Torre dell’Orso Beach) with plenty of beach clubs and calm turquoise waters, and a cliff viewpoint overlooking Le Due Sorelle, the two sisters (at Panorama due Sorelle). 

These are two rock formations that rise dramatically from the Ionian Sea – and while the rocks were great for photos, I actually loved looking out towards the crystal-clear sea even more! 

We didn’t make it down to the beach and just enjoyed the views from above on the cliffs, but if you’re itching to swim you’ll wanna drive over. 

Grotta Della Poesia/Cave of Poetry

Last but not least on our itinerary for the day was Grotta Della Poesia, or the Cave of Poetry. This natural swimming pool is renowned for its beauty, though swimming is no longer permitted here (although some people break the rules, don’t be one of them — the cave is closed for a reason). To access the cave, it costs a few euros to enter the larger Roca Archaeological Area. 

I have to admit that I enjoyed the scenery walking to the cave better than the cave itself, haha. But it’s still quite epic of course. 

Night: After a few hours along the rugged coastline of Salento, we spent the rest of the day and night further exploring the streets of Otranto. 

We had more gelato at Gelateria Fisotti (I swear, not all gelato is created equal), hung out at the public beach, and tried some pasticciotto from Martinucci Laboratorio! We were blessed with yet another gorgeous sunset along the sea and indulged in some delicious pasta on one of the quiet streets. 

Where to sleep: Hotel Palazzo Papaleo in Otranto 

Day 6: Beach Hopping on the Salento Coast

After saying goodbye to gorgeous Otranto (it was my husband’s favorite town!), we made our way over to Gallipoli. But not without plenty of scenic stops and beach hopping of course. It was definitely the most beautiful drive of the entire Puglia road trip since we were along the coast for a good portion of it.

Here’s how we spent our day:

Stop 1: Cava di Bauxite

Cava di Bauxite is a former bauxite quarry (where bauxite was mined), with vibrant red rocks contrasting with the deep blue waters. This was a quick stop for us (just know you’ll need to walk about 15 minutes or so to reach the cave) and loved the natural beauty and unique geological features – I had never seen anything like it.

I wouldn’t consider Cava di Bauxite an absolute must do, but since it’s less than 10 minutes away from Otranto and on the way to our next stop, why not pop over? The landscape really is quite unique and dramatic, although it was SUPER windy when we visited (my hair was EVERYWHERE, hence no pics of me, haha).

Stop 2: Bagno Marino Archi

Time for our first stop by the sea! Bagno Marino Archi is a quintessential Italian lido where you can rent loungers and umbrellas, although it’s definitely on the pricier end. We actually didn’t end up renting anything (we didn’t think we’d be there for too long), so instead we walked along the cliffs and checked out the views instead. 

Note that there’s no proper beach here, but instead ladders to get into the sea. When we visited in the AM in early June, there was hardly anyone there. But I heard it’s packed midday in July, so come early!

Stop 3: Porto Miggiano Beach

I only had time for a quick look at Porto Miggiano Beach, but damn, it was drop-dead gorgeous! The dramatic cliffs and crystal-clear turquoise waters had me wishing I could stay longer and soak in the beauty of this local favorite. Again, there’s no sandy beach here, but everyone just hangs out on the rocks and jumps in.

We were a little confused as to where to park at first (we mistakenly parked at the port instead) and ended up walking through a private beach club to get here – but don’t worry, there’s a lot super close, haha. Whoops!

Stop 4: Piscina Zinzulusa 

Piscina Zinzulusa is a stunning saltwater swimming pool overlooking the Adriatic sea. And whoa those views! Cliffs and grottos and the deep blue sea.

And get this – there was literally no one there, just us!!! If this spot was on the Amalfi Coast, Sicily, Greece, or anywhere else really, it’d be beyond packed. But since it was early June in Puglia, we had it all to ourselves! So, so wild! But come later in the season, and it’ll most likely be packed, haha.

Stop 5: Grotta Zinzulusa 

Right by the pool you’ll find Zinzulusa Cave where you can explore the underground wonders of Puglia on a short guided tour. 

In all honesty, while the cave was cool (and I saw tons of stalagmites and stalactites), I actually liked the views leading to the grotto more than the cave itself, haha. We had to wait quite a while for the tour to start, so if you’re short on time and wanna see lots on your Puglia road trip, I might skip this if I were you.

Stop 6: Anam Terrace and Calle d’ Acquaviva 

Anam Terrace is the ultimate spot for cocktails and lunch, with killer views over Calle d’Acquaviva – a stunning grotto with crystal-clear turquoise waters. The vibe was so chill it felt more like Bali than Italy, and my husband’s obsession with the cacio e pepe made it even better – just be warned, it’s packed in the summer (are you sensing a theme yet?). 

Stop 7: Spiaggia di Pescoluse (Maldive del Salento)

Spiaggia di Pescoluse is known as the Maldives of Salento, and yes, it’s a beautiful beach with fine sand and turquoise waters! But does it compare to the beaches in the Maldives? While I haven’t been just yet, I honestly don’t think so (based on photos I’ve seen). We got unlucky with lots of wind, but hey, it’s better than dripping in the heat!

Night: Sunset and Dinner in Gallipoli 

We made it to Gallipoli just in time for sunset at the port (thank goodness for long summer days)! AND we somehow got a table at Trattoria La Puritate – where we feasted on yet more plates of pasta (my spaghetti al limone was just wow!).

Parking in Gallipoli: Like other towns in Puglia, you can’t park directly in Old Town. If your hotel doesn’t have its own parking lot (like ours did!), you’ll need to find a space in the large parking lot by the main port (Parcheggio Porto Gallipoli). From there, it’s a short walk to the castle and Old Town.

Where to sleep: Biancodonda Lifestyle Hotel & SPA in Gallipoli

We loved this hotel and its convenient parking lot, spacious room (which was HUGE with a fabulous shower), and included spa facilities. We didn’t end up using the outdoor pool, but it looked pretty great.

Day 7: Gallipoli, beaches, then Matera

Morning: Explore Gallipoli

Gallipoli is a beautiful coastal city on the western side of Salento, with an old town located on an island (you can easily walk there from the mainland by bridge). It’s small, so you really only need a few hours to wander around. 

To be honest, there’s not a ton of things to do in Gallipoli; a visit is more about strolling the streets and city walls, taking in the beach and coastal views.

A few things not to miss in Gallipoli:

  • Get lost in the narrow, charming streets of Gallipoli’s historic center (Old Town)
  • Check out Castello Angioino, an epic 13th century castle for killer views and a dose of history
  • Chill at Spiaggia della Purità, the main beach in Gallipoli with soft sand and gorgeous water
  • Snap pics at the Cathedral of Sant’Agata, a beautiful cathedral with stunning baroque architecture 
  • Stroll the seafront promenade/city walls for views of the sea and fishing boats (where we watched the sunset the night before)

Afternoon: Punta Prosciutto Beach

Between Gallipoli and Matera (our next stop if you have a few extra days), there’s quite a few spectacular beaches! May as well stop for a quick swim or sunbathe session!

We stopped at Punta Prosciutto Beach for a bit, and basked in the sun with limon granitas in hand. Pure paradise in Puglia! The sea was sparkling, the sun was shining, and we were completely relaxed under our umbrellas.

There’s also Porto Selvaggio, Spiaggia di Torre Lapillo (with lots of beach clubs like Orange Sun and Bahia del Sol Porto Cesareo), and tons more along the coastline. 

Night: Matera

If you only have time for 7 days in Puglia, you’ll need to head back to Bari or Brindisi or wherever you’re leaving from. BUT if you’ve got more time for your Puglia road trip, I HIGHLY recommend making your way over to Matera

This city is technically not in Puglia itself, but next door in the Basilicata region. Which is why so many people include it on their Puglia itinerary.

Matera is a remarkable city in southern Italy (and actually Italy’s oldest at 9,000 years old), famous for its ancient cave dwellings known as “Sassi.” I won’t go into much detail here since I’ll be explaining more on Day 8, but the second we arrived at our hotel, WHOA just WHOA. We truly felt like we entered another world, and I highly recommend arriving before sunset so you can really take advantage of some daylight before heading to dinner.

After checking into our cave suite at Aquatio Cave Luxury Hotel, we promptly set off for sunset drinks at Terrazza Cavalieri – one of the most popular spots overlooking the Sassi. It gets busy here but thankfully we got a seat!

Quick Note: Parking in Matera is kinda a nightmare. You’ll need to stick to the newer part of the city and make sure to avoid the ZTL. We parked in the first spot we saw (on the outskirts of the Sassi), paid for street parking for the entire duration of our time in Matera, and then didn’t move the car until we were ready to leave the city for good. 

Past — make note of where you park your car. We had a slight panic attack when we realized the night before leaving that we didn’t remember where we parked (on some random side street I might add, haha). Luckily, we had paid enough attention the previous afternoon and found it no problem, phew!

Sleep: Aquatio Cave Luxury Hotel in Matera

I HIGHLY recommend sleeping in a cave hotel during your time in Matera. I mean, what a unique experience! There’s plenty of luxury options (what we opted for), with a blend of ancient charm and modern comfort. These caves had been inhabited for thousands of years – whoa! Our hotel (Aquatio Cave Luxury Hotel) boasted an insane spa in a beautifully lit cave that we definitely took advantage of, haha.

We also looked at Sextantio Le Grotte Della Civita, Sant’Angelo Luxury Resort, and Cenobio Hotel & Spa Matera – but ultimately chose Aquatio Cave Luxury Hotel due to its location and mid-level price.

Day 8: Full day in Matera

Wake up in Matera (hopefully in your epic cave hotel), and you’ll immediately feel the magic of Matera. The city is known for its cave dwellings, and they’ve got some wild stories to tell.

These unique structures, carved right into the limestone, date back thousands of years and are actually a UNESCO World Heritage site. The Sassi di Matera is made up of two districts – Sasso Barisano and Sasso Caveoso – where you can just wander the narrow alleys and stumble upon cool churches, quirky shops, and some great local food.

Matera’s got such a fascinating history – people have been living there since Roman times, all the way through the Byzantine era and beyond. You’ll really notice the contrast when you see the “Sassi,” which are the two areas filled with those ancient cave dwellings. They’re totally different from the newer parts of town, so it’s easy to spot!

The city started getting attention recently, especially when it was named a European Capital of Culture in 2019. Its gorgeous landscapes and incredible architecture have even made it a hotspot for filmmakers; you might recognize it from movies like “The Passion of the Christ” and “No Time to Die.”

Honestly, the mix of ancient history, stunning views, and a lively cultural scene makes Matera such a cool place to visit if you want to see a different side of Italy.

Definitely read my full guide to Matera afterwards, but here are some things you definitely don’t wanna miss:

  • Visit some of the top lookout points, including Belvedere of Luigi Guerricchio (Three Arches) and Belvedere Murgia Timone (15 minutes away)
  • Admire some of Matera’s cool “rock churches” (namely Church of Santa Maria de Idris and Church of Saint Peter Caveoso)
  • Explore Palombaro Lungo, the city’s historic underground cistern (only takes 10 minutes to see and a nice respite from the heat) and pretty cool
  • Wander the sassi’s narrow alleyways, get a little lost (in a good way), and keep an eye out for hidden gems
  • Explore Matera New Town, drastically different from the “Sassi” (a whole different vibe), with lots of shops and places to grab a bite
  • Sip cocktails in a cave at Bar Zipa and sunset spritz with a view at Crialoss Panoramic Cave Cafe Bistrot  
  • Take an Ape tour of Matera to learn the history of the city and get off your feet for a bit

Sleep: Aquatio Cave Luxury Hotel in Matera

Day 9: Head back to Bari 

It’s sadly the last day of our Puglia road trip, so say goodbye to all the cute kitties (and views) in Matera, and make your way back to Bari. But not before making a few stops of course! 

If you need to get back ASAP for a train/flight, just know the drive takes about 50 minutes to Bari and 1 hour, 45 minutes to Brindisi without stopping. Since we had a train later in the day, we had a few hours to explore before our train from Bari to Rome.

Stop 1: Gravina in Puglia

Gravina in Puglia is such a cool spot, especially if you’re into James Bond – the bridge over here was featured in the latest movie, No Time to Die! 

But honestly, while the bridge is impressive, the ravine it spans is even more breathtaking. We wanted to get closer but there was a lot of construction going on and we got confused about where to drive, haha.

Stop 2: Altamura 

We made a short stop in Altamura to try the famous bread at Antico Forno Santa Caterina dal 1391. Yes, these ovens have been used for over 750 years, and the craftsmanship is impressive. The focaccia we tried was delicious and we watched the bakers preparing the bread right in the shop.

We even got to see a sweet older woman hand-shaping tons of orecchiette pasta right across from the bakery. Although she spoke zero English (to be expected, haha), it was such a cool moment to watch – and definitely gave me a taste of the real Puglia vibe!

Stop 3: Bari

Our last stop of the day before getting on our train to Rome. Bari was way more modern and hip than I anticipated, and it’s a shame mostly everyone skips it as we really enjoyed our few hours here! 

We strolled through the narrow, winding streets of the Old Town (Bari Vecchia), saw local women making orecchiette pasta on the streets (at La Via delle Orecchiette), had gelato at Antica Gelateria Gentile, window shopped along Via Sparano da Bari (the main shopping street in Bari) and wandered through Giardini di Plaza Umberto I. 

And that’s a wrap on our time in Puglia (plus Matera)! It was honestly one of our favorite trips to date, and I can definitely see us coming back. We stuffed our faces with way too much pasta, had gelato every single day (whoops), took plenty of dips in the sparkling sea, saw half a dozen Italian towns, neither of us got drastically sunburned, and we only got one parking ticket! 

Are you planning a Puglia road trip?! Come soon – I’d say most of our trip was 85% Italian tourists or so, BUT I see that changing sooner than later. Such a special place.



The post 7 Days in Puglia: The Perfect 7 Day Puglia Road Trip Itinerary appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/puglia-road-trip-itinerary/feed/ 0
A Festive London Christmas Itinerary: 3 Days in London in December https://apassionandapassport.com/london-christmas-itinerary/ https://apassionandapassport.com/london-christmas-itinerary/#respond Wed, 09 Oct 2024 06:50:02 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=31522 Looking for a 3 day London Christmas itinerary? Here’s how to plan the perfect London Christmas trip, filled with dazzling displays, iconic Christmas lights, and delicious markets!  Everything you need to know to plan your Christmas in London itinerary, coming right up! London is truly one of the most magical places in the world toContinue Reading

The post A Festive London Christmas Itinerary: 3 Days in London in December appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Looking for a 3 day London Christmas itinerary? Here’s how to plan the perfect London Christmas trip, filled with dazzling displays, iconic Christmas lights, and delicious markets!  Everything you need to know to plan your Christmas in London itinerary, coming right up!

London is truly one of the most magical places in the world to embrace the festive spirit. The whole city just sparkles, and it’s honestly impossible not to have an amazing time. After our own unforgettable trip, I felt inspired to create this detailed 3 day London Christmas itinerary so you can enjoy it just as much as we did! I spent HOURS researching the best things to do in London at Christmas, so I really hope it helps you plan your trip. 

Honestly, London at Christmas is unlike any other city I’ve visited for the holidays. The whole place buzzes with excitement – think ice skating at Somerset House, savoring rich hot chocolates, marveling at stunning window displays, and exploring festive pop-ups. And let’s not forget the holiday afternoon teas and yule log cakes!

After several visits (mostly in summer), I can confidently say that London in December has become my favorite time of year to visit. No one in the U.S. does Christmas quite like London does – well, maybe New York comes close, but even that’s a stretch.

During our 2.5-week winter Euro trip – starting with the famous Christmas markets in Prague, then picturesque Cesky Krumlov, snowy Hallstatt, charming Bruges, and finally landing in London – it was the British capital that stole my heart. Sure, the markets might not have matched those in the Czech Republic, and we missed the speculoos chocolates from Belgium, but wow, does this city go all out.

All this to say that we loved Christmas in London so much that we’re planning another trip back this year for the holidays, haha. Normally, I’m not one to revisit places so soon, but London at Christmas is calling me back!

If you’re counting down the days until the holiday season in London, I totally get it! I’m already itching to head back for all the festive vibes (and of course, more afternoon teas – because why not?). With this London Christmas itinerary, you’ll have all the info you need to plan your very own festive trip! Honestly, there’s no better place to celebrate than the UK capital!

3 Day London Christmas Itinerary Logistics

Christmas in London itinerary At-A-Glance

  • Day 1: Soho and Mayfair
  • Day 2: Belgravia and Covent Garden
  • Day 3: City of London and South Bank

How to get to London for Christmas

Excited for your 3 day Christmas in London itinerary? Great news – the city is super accessible! You’ve got plenty of options, whether you prefer flying, taking the train, or driving.

Flying to London

London is oh so easy to reach via plane! It boasts Heathrow International Airport (a huge hub for a whole slew of airlines), and easily connects the US and other parts of Europe. 

And it’s honestly not as far as you may think! When we lived in NYC, it took about the same amount of time to get to London as it did to California (totally wish we took advantage of this more!).

From NYC, expect the flight to take approximately 7 hours nonstop. From the West Coast, like San Francisco and Los Angeles, the flight will expectedly be longer, at roughly 10 hours nonstop.

And the moment we stepped off the plane into Heathrow Airport I felt the Christmas spirit already – there were even Christmas trees at the gates!

Psst – if Heathrow doesn’t fit into your plans, there’s 4 other main airports to choose from — absolutely wild!

  • Gatwick (LGW): ~30 miles south of Central London; mainly serves international flights, including many low-cost carriers
  • Stansted (STN): ~40 miles northeast of Central London; a smaller airport popular for low-cost airlines, especially for flights within Europe
  • Luton (LTN): ~35 miles north of Central London; a smaller airport that serves many low-cost carriers and some charter flights
  • London City Airport (LCY): ~6 miles east of Central London, near Canary Wharf; primarily serves business travelers and short-haul flights, including some international routes

Since we were coming from San Francisco, we flew into London Heathrow International then opted to take the Piccadilly Line to our hotel near Mayfair. If you’re coming from the States, you’ll probably fly into either Heathrow or Gatwick.

Getting to London from the Airport

Depending where you fly into, you’ll of course need to get into the city center to start your Christmas in London itinerary. 

  • From Heathrow: Take the Heathrow Express train to Paddington (only 15 minutes but pretty expensive) or the London Underground (Piccadilly Line) to Central London.
  • From Gatwick: The Gatwick Express goes straight to Victoria Station or cheaper trains to various central locations.
  • From Stansted: The Stansted Express takes you directly to Liverpool Street Station in about 45 minutes.
  • From Luton: There are shuttle buses to Luton Airport Parkway, where you can catch a train to St Pancras (about 30-40 minutes total)
  • From London City Airport: It’s well-connected via the Docklands Light Railway (DLR) to central stations (Underground and overground trains)

Taking the Train to London 

If you’re already in Europe, consider taking the train! It’s a convenient and efficient way to travel, especially if you’re coming from other parts of the UK or from nearby countries. Major train stations include Paddington (from the west), King’s Cross/St. Pancras (from the north/servicing Eurostar), and Liverpool Street (from the east).

We love taking the Eurostar, a high-speed train service that connects London with major cities in France and Belgium, including Paris, Brussels, and Lille. It’s pretty expensive compared to other trains, so be sure to include the cost into your travel budget! And book early – you’ll find cheaper rates this way.

You can get from Paris to London in ~2 hours and 15 minutes, or from Brussels to London in ~2 hours! Quick and easy!

Note – if you end up at King’s Cross/St. Pancras for any reason (we took the Eurostar to get to Bruges later on in our trip), you’ll be able to see the famous Christmas tree made entirely of books in the station! Super unique and one of my favorites in the city!

How to Get Around on your London Christmas Itinerary

Getting around London is easy and convenient – there’s an extensive public transport network and neighborhoods are super walkable! It’s just as good as the subway in NYC and dare I say public transit in Tokyo?!

Psst → I don’t recommend renting a car in London. The public transport is too good, and city driving and parking is just too much of a hassle to make a car worth the expense.

Walking

London is a walking city (yes, even when it rains, lol). I’ve designed this Christmas in London itinerary by neighborhood – meaning there’s lots of attractions within walking distance to each other. But don’t let that fool you; we still walked about 25k steps a day! An important reason to wear comfortable boots during your trip.

London Underground (The Tube) 

If you’ve done any research (or watched any English movies), I’m sure you’ve heard of The Tube before. Just like NYC’s subway, The Tube is London’s Underground rail network, and it’s a great way to travel to, from, and around central London. It’s the quickest way to get around, and we used it tons to get all over London fast and efficiently! 

There’s 11 lines covering most of the city, divided into 9 zones. But if you’re just staying within Central London, you’ll most likely only need Zone 1, so don’t worry about the others! As you move further and further away from the city, you’ll pass through Zones 2-9.

I used to recommend grabbing an Oyster Card when you first arrived in London, but now public transit uses a contactless payment system. Meaning you can just tap your phone or credit card instead! 

Tip: Avoid rush hours (7:30–9:30 AM and 5:00–7:00 PM) if possible – it’s crazy crowded during these times! 

By Bus

London has an extensive bus network that complements The Tube. And plus, buses are a great way to see the city above ground (which is great for this London Christmas itinerary since the whole city is practically covered in festive lights!). Google Maps makes it super easy to find a bus and know when to get off; just know buses have a flat fare regardless of distance.

The downside is you may get gridlocked (meaning tons of traffic in all directions – and yes, it happens). If so, just hop off and Google the nearest tube. But go on a double decker at least once – it’s a true London experience!

Taxis and Rideshares

Rideshare apps like Uber operate in London, and there’s also the iconic black cabs that can be hailed on the street (or booked via apps). BUT just remember there’ll undoubtedly be tons of traffic, so you may as well just take The Tube anyways…

Where to Stay During your 3 Day London Christmas Itinerary

For this London Christmas itinerary, I highly recommend staying in either Soho, Mayfair, or Covent Garden

These neighborhoods are conveniently located near many of the best Christmas sights, and you’ll be right in the heart of the festive action. The city is huge, so it’s important to be strategic about where you book accommodation.

Most hotels are pretty pricey (a Christmas trip to London is super popular after all), so just be prepared to book early and spend a pretty penny, I mean pound, haha. If you’re on a budget, consider hotels further from the city center and taking the tube. You’ll need to factor in some additional transit time though, since most of these attractions are clustered in the central areas.

London’s got a seriously impressive lineup of hotels, but here’s a few that really nail that festive vibe:

  • The Ritz London: A true symbol of opulence! The Ritz goes all out for Christmas with stunning decor and extraordinary festive dining experiences (like a lavish five-course Christmas Day lunch).
  • Covent Garden Hotel: Nestled right in the heart of the action, this hotel is perfect for immersing yourself in the magical atmosphere of holiday markets and dazzling lights. You’ll be steps away from some of the best festive events!
  • Claridge’s: An absolute Mayfair classic, famous for its luxurious Christmas decorations and festive afternoon teas! 
  • Treehouse Hotel: We kicked off our trip here, and wow, what an experience! With its cozy ambiance and whimsical design, the Treehouse Hotel captures the magic of Christmas perfectly. The rooftop views are great, and oh wow that restaurant – oh so festive and fun! And they even had a DIY candy bar – the key to my heart!
  • The Savoy: Wow those decorations are stunning! Although we couldn’t snag a reservation for afternoon tea (pro tip: book early!) and staying here wasn’t an option (too pricey for us), we still ventured over to admire the hotel’s lavish decor. The whole place was decked out and I swear I took about 100 photos, haha.
  • The Dorchester Hotel: If money is no object, stay here! And if it’s way out of your budget (like it was ours, haha), definitely check out the lobby – they go all out every year. 

Weather during Christmas in London

Overall, winter weather in London is pretty mild (compared to other spots in Europe in winter), but definitely be prepared for some rain – this is the British capital we’re talking about! The earlier in the season the warmer it’ll be, but it never gets insanely freezing like it does in Hallstatt or The Swiss Alps (at least during the day). 

The best time to visit is late November once all the decorations and pop ups are up, but it’s not freezing cold yet and the massive crowds haven’t arrived. And no matter when you visit, plan a mixture of inside and outside activities.

Late November

London’s weather in late November is typically cool, with average daytime temperatures around 8-10°C (46-50°F). Doesn’t seem that chilly, but evenings can drop to around 4-5°C (39-41°F), so it’ll feel nice and crisp when you’re out exploring the Christmas lights after dark. 

Rain is common (you could’ve told me that, haha), so definitely pack a travel umbrella or rain jacket for wandering through the markets and admiring the Christmas displays.

December

December in London brings true winter vibes, with temperatures averaging between 5-8°C (41-46°F) during the day and dipping to 2-4°C (36-39°F) at night. The Christmas lights add a warm glow to the city, but expect chilly air, especially once the sun sets. 

Unfortunately snow is rare in December (or anytime during winter in London actually, – it’s usually too warm for anything but light flurries), but there’s often a light drizzle or mist.

For reference, we planned our London Christmas itinerary for late December, and got lucky with higher-than average temps and little-to-no rain! I was hot in my winter jacket at times, and had to carry it around. Just be prepared for temperamental temps and wear layers. 

January

January tends to be the coldest month in London, with daytime temperatures around 3-7°C (37-45°F). Nights are understandably colder, with the mercury often dropping to 1-3°C (33-37°F). 

While the Christmas lights start to come down after New Year’s, the winter sales are in full swing, and there’s still plenty of festive atmosphere left. You may catch a frosty morning, but snow is still infrequent. And when it does snow, it doesn’t stay on the ground too long – it typically melts away very quickly!

Can I expect snow during this London Christmas itinerary? 

Don’t hold your breath… It hardly snows during December in London. Why? Mostly because the city is just too warm – the city generates tons of heat from all the buildings and cars. And when it does get cold enough, it melts quickly (sometimes before the snow can even settle). 

Psst – London is usually a few degrees warmer than the surrounding countryside outside the city. Meaning, if you wanna see snow, you’ll have a greater chance over there (or just go to Hallstatt, Switzerland, or Tromso where you’re practically guaranteed some of the white stuff!).

And if you get to experience snow at Christmas in London, you’re extremely lucky! The last time there’s been a truly white Christmas was back in 1999 – over 20 years ago. Blame global warming…

If you’re realllyyyy craving some snow – head over to Covent Garden! It “snows” every hour on the hour from noon to 7pm right by the massive Christmas tree! 

Additional London Christmas Itinerary Facts

  • Currency: The ‘pound’ or GBP (Great British Pound) is the national currency of the U.K, written as £. Lucky for us visiting, the pound has gone down significantly over the years. But it’s still an expensive place to visit (just not as daunting as it was 10+ years ago). Many businesses don’t accept cash anymore (even to pay for the bathrooms!), so plan to use your credit card for the majority of your trip. And set up Apple Pay as it’s literally everywhere!
  • Prepare for the crowds: It’s no surprise – Christmas is peak season in London. You’ll need to book restaurant reservations early (spontaneous walk-ins are rare), and hotel rooms fill up fast. Pro tip: If you’re looking for fewer crowds, come during the quieter days in late November or early December (weekdays are usually better). The closer it gets to Christmas the more crowded it’s gonna be. 
  • Public transport is your best friend: Forget about driving in London – it’s a logistical nightmare. Luckily, you can easily tap your contactless card on public transportation, so no need to grab an Oyster Card. Just hop on the Tube and you’re set!
  • The markets aren’t as magical as you’d think: Sure, there’s mince pies, gourmet cheese toasties, and handcrafted trinkets. But if you’re expecting epic, over-the-top magical Christmas markets, you’re gonna be disappointed. They’ve got nothing on markets in other European countries (Austria! Germany! France!). You don’t go to London for the markets – you go for the overall festive energy and holiday decorations around the city – the markets are just an added bonus.  
  • Expect to splurge on hotels: Accommodation in central London during Christmas is pricey – no surprise there. If you want to be near all the action (like Soho, Mayfair, or Covent Garden), make sure to book early (a few months in advance). The festive atmosphere comes at a premium, but it’s worth every penny. If you wanna save some money, stay during the week if possible. Weekends can be double the price.
  • Be strategic with your London Christmas itinerary: Planning is key to making the most of London at Christmas. I like to map out my must-see spots (Google Maps is honestly my best friend, haha) and plan meals and activities nearby to save time. With so much to see in London in December, it’s not the time to wing it! And that’s where my 3 day London Christmas itinerary comes in!
  • Short days, long nights: With sunrise around 8am and sunset around 4pm, it’s true – daylight hours are limited during London at Christmas. But honestly? We don’t typically mind this as we get more time to soak up all the glittering lights and then get to bed early, haha (which is always necessary after walking 25k steps in a day!). I also suggest starting each day of this London Christmas itinerary on the earlier side, as there’ll be fewer crowds, especially if you’re visiting in the crazy days right before/after Christmas.

What to Pack for Christmas in London 

  • Warm Winter Coat: For those frigid winter days, you’ll really wanna invest in an insulated parka. I’ve got my eye on this North Face parka (I currently wear one from 10+ years ago – it’s about time for a new jacket). Looking for one a bit less expensive? This one’s crazy popular on social media, and with the length and sherpa-lined hood, I can totally see why. However note that it’s only water resistant, not waterproof, so not the best choice for those inevitable rainy London days.
  • Packable Puffer Jacket: I wear this one – it’s lightweight and water resistant, plus comes in a bunch of fun colors and the pockets are super deep (perfect for storing your phone). It packs down to almost nothing in the little included pouch – perfect for travel! 
  • Fleece Zip-Up: On those absolutely frigid days when you need a little something between your sweater and warm winter coat, a fleece zip-up (like this Columbia full-zip) will come in handy. Or if it’s unseasonably warm this can take the place of your winter jacket! There’s a reason it’s got 45k positive reviews!
  • Base Layers: I’ve been wearing heat tech long sleeve tees ever since I went to Banff in winter a few years back, and they’ve saved me from those frigid temps! They’re super lightweight and perfect to wear under a sweater, and leave you feeling dry and warm without the bulk!
  • Fleece-lined leggings: I used to layer two pairs of regular leggings, but now that fleece-lined leggings are a thing, I only wear those! They’re just as comfy as regular leggings, but keep your legs staying warm and toasty. I’ve worn these pairs a few times and they’ve been great, and come in a bunch of fun colors! If you’re looking for something to wear under jeans or snow pants instead, these come highly recommended (although too thin to wear on their own; more like a base layer).
  • Chapstick: Cold and dry air make your lips susceptible to chapping super easily. Ugh, the worst! I’m low-key obsessed with this cocoa butter swivel stick – it makes your lips so super soft and it smells a tad like chocolate! My favorite! It also works wonders on dry, chapped skin. You’ll wanna reapply multiple times throughout the day.
  • Power Bank: Batteries die faster in the cold, so come prepared with a power bank to recharge your stuff on the go. This compact power bank gives up to 10 full charges! I always throw this tiny one in my bag also, just in case, as a backup. My phone is my life-line (especially when traveling solo), so I like to be extra prepared!
  • Beanies: I’ve got this fleece-lined beanie (pom pom included) in a few colors, and always bring a thick headband along too for when I want to put my hair up. 
  • Warm Gloves: I like to take a few pairs of gloves with me – loving these wool-blend mittens and this pair that’s super lightweight and waterproof (good enough to go skiing in). Trust me, cheapie cotton gloves just ain’t good enough.
  • Scarves: I tend to bring a few, since they’re so easy to accessorize with! This blanket scarf is one of my faves (a great neutral option that matches everything), and chunky-knit infinity scarves are oh so cozy!
  • Waterproof Snow Boots: Even though it hardly snows during Christmas in London, I still recommend a comfy waterproof boot! Gotta keep your feet warm and dry and comfy on the streets; especially since you’ll probably be walking at least 15k steps a day! And THESE Sorel waterproof boots are easily the best ones out there – they’re 100% waterproof, seam-sealed, and actually look pretty cute (unlike most snow boots out there). I practically lived in them 2 weeks straight and got zero blisters! Leave the heeled boots at home – you’ll want flat boots for max comfort!
  • Polarized sunglasses: Yes, it’s sunny sometimes in London in December – I’ve been wearing these exact ones for years and I just love ‘em.
  • Travel umbrella: We all know rain is a thing in London, so come prepared with a small umbrella that you can easily pack in your day bag.
  • Dressier outfits: You’ll want a dressy outfit or two for festive dinners or shows – bring along a Christmas sweater (or jumper as they say in London!) for some extra cheer!

My Festive London Christmas Itinerary

A few notes about this 3 day itinerary:

  • This London itinerary assumes you have 3 full days in the city. Meaning you’ve arrived the day/night before, and are ready to start exploring the next morning.
  • In order to see and do (and eat!) a lot, there’s a lot of neighborhood hopping. Some neighborhoods you can easily walk between, while others you’ll need to hop on the tube for. You can totally rearrange this itinerary, but I grouped together neighborhoods and attractions by their proximity.
  • This London Christmas itinerary hits the ground running. Face it – London is beyond HUGE and there’s TONS to do for the festive holiday season. It’s packed and very go-go-go. If you’d rather a more relaxed trip, skip a few things or add on an extra day.
  • It primarily focuses on Christmas and holiday-themed activities. If you’re looking to include all the typical tourist attractions as well, you’ll 100% need to stay a few extra days. This Christmas London itinerary misses top attractions like Buckingham Palace, Notting Hill, Churchill War Rooms, and Tower of London – there’s just too much to include.
  • You’ll need to make restaurant reservations well in advance – meaning if you’re booking kinda late and only a few time slots are available, you’ll probably need to rearrange bits and pieces of this Christmas in London itinerary to make room for your reservations.

So let’s get to it! The perfect Christmas in London itinerary coming right up!

London Christmas Itinerary Day 1: Mayfair and Soho

Stop 1: Spend the morning/early afternoon in Mayfair 

Mayfair is one of the most festive neighborhoods in London, making it a great starting point for your London Christmas itinerary. This area boasts stunning holiday decorations like the extravagant luxury store displays on Bond Street to the beautiful angels illuminating Regent Street and the quirky vibes of Carnaby Street. You’ll also find spectacular department store windows and fancy, festive AF hotels.

The city is gloriously decked out for Christmas, and Mayfair is no exception.

I recommend starting the morning on the earlier side as this area can get quite crowded (understandably). We spent HOURS here and couldn’t get enough of all the seasonal sparkle.

Must-See Streets

  • Bond Street and New Bond Street: A luxury shopping haven with brands like Cartier, Tiffany & Co., and Chanel. My favorite place to snap a photo is across from Cartier by the iconic red phone booth!
  • Regent Street: Famous for its stunning Christmas angels, this street is perfect for holiday shopping at flagship stores like Hamleys and Liberty.
  • Carnaby Street: Known for its unique and vibrant decorations, like the Carnaby Universe I saw last year (with planets flying overhead)
  • Burlington Arcade: A historic arcade featuring charming boutiques under an elegant glass roof (perfect when you wanna warm up)
  • Royal Arcade: A victorian era shopping arcade completed in 1880 with beautiful architecture and unique shops
  • South Molton Street: A lovely pedestrian street filled with high-street brands and independent boutiques

Breakfast Options

  • Ralph’s Coffee: Located in front of Cartier on Old Bond Street, this is one of the most festive coffee shops around. We waited on a long line, but it was well worth it for some delicious coffee and hot chocolate.
  • Buns from Home: One of my favorite bakeries in London! If you prefer a quicker option, check out one of their two nearby locations for some tasty baked goods. I indulged in a hand rolled cinnamon bun later on one day, and damn was it legendary (although maybe a tad too sweet, haha).

Don’t Miss

  • St. Christopher’s Place: A charming area filled with shops and eateries.
  • Department Stores: Visit Selfridges, Fortnum & Mason, and Liberty London for their stunning holiday displays.
  • Fancy Hotels: Check out The Dorchester, The Connaught, and The Ritz London for their festive decor.

Additional Highlights

  • Annabel’s: This swanky private members’ club in Berkeley Square dazzles with extravagant holiday displays. While only members can enter, anyone can admire its stunning exterior. Last season (2023), they featured a massive hot air balloon surrounded by twinkling stars. Just a heads-up: it’s on a busy road, so getting the perfect photo might be tricky!
  • KOYN: Known for its incredible sushi and izakaya dishes, KOYN also goes all out for the holidays with adorable festive decor, including a vintage car stacked with Christmas presents and topped with a tree – definitely one of my favorite photo spots on this Christmas in London itinerary!

Tip: Plot these spots on your map to avoid wandering around aimlessly in the cold. Some of these locations, like KOYN and Annabel’s, are on side streets, so a little planning will save you time.

Stop 2: Late Lunch at Sketch 

Sketch is one of the most popular restaurants in all of London (year round), and is even more festive for the holidays! Making it a great meal for your Christmas in London itinerary! 

Pricey, posh, and perfectly photogenic, especially during the Christmas season. Even the iconic egg-shaped bathroom stalls that we’ve all seen were decorated for Christmas as well! It’s the perfect place to go if you’re feeling fancy and festive. Stepping into this wintry wonderland the moment we walked through the doors was nothing short of magical – talk about a first impression!

The restaurant features four distinct rooms, each with its own avant-garde decor that’s spectacularly over-the-top. We had lunch in the Glade Room (we made reservations a few weeks in advance and there was even limited availability then), which was absolutely enchanting and filled with twinkling fairy lights and lush green garlands, complete with a ballerina dancing around for a bit! 

If you wanna enjoy afternoon tea in The Gallery, be sure to book SUPER early – it’s beyond popular. It’s definitely a pretty penny (one of the priciest afternoon teas in London), but the food is fantastic, the atmosphere is superb, and it’s insanely Instagrammable – especially during Christmas in London.

Psst – if you’re looking for the iconic plush pink room, you sadly won’t find it anymore! They’ve revamped it into a cheerful yellow, and it’s more vibrant than ever (although I was definitely missing the pink!).

Stop 3 (Optional): Westminster

If you’re new to London, a visit to Westminster is a must! This area is home to some of the city’s most iconic attractions, making it a great addition to your London Christmas itinerary. You can easily head to this area by public transit from Mayfair by getting off at Westminster Abbey (Stop X).

Must-See Attractions:

  • Buckingham Palace: While you can’t enter the palace during Christmas (tours are available from June to September), you can still admire the stunning exterior and stroll through the surrounding gardens. If you’re there earlier in the day, don’t miss the Changing of the Guard ceremony at 10 AM – it’s a quintessential London experience.
  • Westminster Abbey: This UNESCO World Heritage site is not only breathtaking but also steeped in history. It’s the venue for royal ceremonies, including weddings and coronations. While you can’t take photos inside, the stunning architecture and intricate details make it worth the visit. Be sure to check the opening hours, as they can vary, especially during the holiday season.
  • Big Ben and the Houses of Parliament: Just a short walk away, you can snap classic photos of the iconic clock tower, now known as the Elizabeth Tower, alongside the impressive Houses of Parliament. The sight is especially beautiful when lit up at night.
  • Churchill War Rooms: Dive into history at this fascinating museum dedicated to Winston Churchill and the British government’s efforts during WWII. The underground war rooms have been preserved as they were during the war, offering a unique glimpse into a pivotal time in history.
  • Tate Britain: If you’re an art lover, don’t miss Tate Britain, home to an extensive collection of British art from 1500 to the present. The museum often has special exhibitions, so check what’s going on during your visit.

Tip: Westminster can be quite busy, so come with this in mind. The festive decorations around the area add extra charm during the holiday season, making it a perfect stop on your London Christmas itinerary!

Stop 4: Dukes (in Mayfair Hotel)

Time for martinis! Head over to Dukes, a classic hotel bar renowned for its expertly crafted tableside cocktails! If you wanna snag a table, be sure to arrive about 20 minutes before they open – it fills up quickly, especially during the festive season. The first time we went we arrived an hour after opening and were told we mayyyyy be able to sit in a few hours, haha.

We love the upscale (yet cozy!) ambiance, and it’s a great place to unwind after all that walking during the day. This is my husband’s favorite place in the entire city for drinks, so you should definitely make a stop here on your Christmas in London itinerary. 

Stop 5: Hyde Park Winter Wonderland 

Psst – you can either go see the Christmas lights once again at night, wander around Hyde Park Winter Wonderland, or do both! Entirely up to you! If you are gonna head to Hyde Park, I’d go in late afternoon (right after drinks at Dukes) as it gets extremely busy as the night goes on. 

Hyde Park Winter Wonderland is a total Christmas extravaganza – London’s biggest and most famous festive spot, and it’s not just a market, it’s a whole experience.

Picture traditional wooden chalets selling gifts, bratwurst, churros, mulled wine, and more. Add to that a Bavarian Village, carnival rides, the UK’s largest outdoor ice skating rink, and a whole ice sculpture exhibition, and you’ve got one epic holiday adventure. You can even grab a drink at the ice bar, where everything (yup, everything) is made of ice.

And don’t forget, you’ll need to buy a ticket to enter Winter Wonderland (only a few pounds), with extra fees for things like ice skating, the ice bar, and other attractions. But trust me, it’s worth it – we already have our tickets for this coming year!

Stop 6: Christmas Lights DIY Walking Tour

The last stop on the first day of this London Christmas itinerary – back to the iconic lights it is! I know you already went here in the morning, but admiring the Christmas lights after dark is SUCH a different experience since they’ll be all illuminated and sparkly! 

Note that most lights turn on around 3-4pm, and don’t shut off until ~11pm. Since the sun sets around 4pm or so (yes, this early!), there’s plenty of time to see them all lit up!

Pretty much everything sparkles, so you can honestly just wander around and get lost in the magical atmosphere. But if you don’t wanna miss anything, be sure to plot these streets on your map! I was blown away by all the dazzling displays – no one does Christmas quite like London, so make sure to soak it all in!

If you’re looking for a late-night cocktail, head on over to Mr. Fogg’s Residence, a classy cocktail bar styled circa 1873!

Here are some of the highlights you’ll see on a DIY Christmas lights walking tour:

  • Oxford Street: sustainable shining stars brightening up the skies above the famous street
  • New and Old Bond Street: Cartier always has something amazing, like the glimmering hot air balloon last year!
  • Fortnum and Mason: admire the iconic annual advent calendar illuminating the street in red
  • Regent Street: check out the return of the famous glimmering Regent Street Angels (yes, I’m pretty sure they’re coming back!)
  • South Molton Street: walk through the iconic arch illuminating the street
  • Carnaby Street: one of the capital’s coolest areas, with quirky installations and/or immersive light shows every year
  • Ever After Garden: visit Grosvenor Square to see 25,000 illuminated white roses dedicated to lost friends and loved ones 

OR make your lives super easy and sign up for a Christmas lights tour! If you don’t wanna subject yourself to the cold, check out this Open Top Christmas Lights Bus Tour or this similar one (since it’s bound to sell out around the holidays). 

You can even hop on a Christmas lights bike tour if that’s your thing or download a self-guided audio walking tour if you prefer that instead. Traveling with a few friends/family? You can even go for a private tour in an iconic black cab! So many options!

London Christmas Itinerary Day 2: Belgravia/Knightsbridge and Covent Garden

Stop 1: Peggy Porschen Belgravia

Start Day 2 with a little something sweet at Peggy Porschen! Hey, it’s almost Christmas after all (and a little cupcake never hurt anyone). I don’t always recommend filling up on sugar this early in the AM, but hey, when in London, right? You can always order something savory as well if sweet breakfasts aren’t really your thing.

If you’re a sucker for super cute holiday cupcakes, don’t miss it! I honestly thought it’d just be a cute photo op, but OMFG my cupcake was orgasmic, haha. This place is practically an iconic London landmark – all decked out in peony pink no less. Perfect for pretty pictures and sipping on a warm drink in the cozy tea room. They change out the front decor every season, and of course Christmas is just sensational.

And if you’re in the mood for something extra special, you can even enjoy afternoon tea at the Parlor.

Stop 2: Wander Belgravia a Bit

I absolutely loved strolling through Belgravia before/after our delicious feast of festive cupcakes. It’s one of the prettiest (and wealthiest) neighborhoods in London and seriously feels like a scene out of Love Actually. The decor isn’t as wow and over-the-top as the streets in Mayfair/Soho, but super classy and chic. 

We wandered down Elizabeth Street, grabbed festive cupcakes at Peggy Porschen (as noted before!), and took in all the chic Christmas vibes (grand Georgian townhouses and beautifully adorned white stucco facades included). Definitely hit up Dominique Ansel Bakery for cronuts and the stunning Moyses Stevens flower shop while you’re there!

But my #1 spot in Belgravia? Easily Neill Strain Floral Couture! This is one of the most over-the-top decorated shops, and it’d be a shame to miss it! It honestly feels like an art installation, haha.

I fell in love with the decorations last December (all decked out with vibrant baubles and a massive red bow) – perfect for photos! It’s technically a flower shop, but they go all out for the holidays. If you’re gonna go slightly outta the way for some decorations, make it this one.

Psst – there’s a few Neill Strain Floral Couture’s around the city, but the Belgravia location is known to be the most extravagant!

Stop 3: Shopping and Lunch at Harrods (or nearby)

Harrods is a Christmas classic, and I make it a point to visit every time I’m in London (we love their fish and chips). Plus, it’s always fun to gawk at the bougie designer goods, haha. 

The store usually dazzles with golden lights and wreaths, but when we visited, they skipped the exterior decorations – total bummer! At least the purple Valentino Christmas tree was a highlight.

Inside, there’s fancy ornaments, gold accents, and a dedicated Christmas department full of luxury decorations. And whatever you do, don’t miss The Food Hall – there’s literally everything you can think of here (mince pies to gourmet chocolates and everything in between). Here’s hoping they bring back the exterior lights next season!

If you’re not in the mood for fish and chips or are overwhelmed by the food hall (I always am!), consider lunch at a festive restaurant nearby. The Ivy Chelsea Garden and Daphne’s are both popular options, so be sure to make reservations well in advance (I’m talking weeks/months).

  • The Ivy Chelsea Garden: Come for the (good quality) food, stay for the (over-the-top) decor! Known for its stunning decor and modern British menu, this location is housed in a beautiful Georgian building. Even if you can’t get a reservation, the facade is worth seeing!
  • Daphne’s: A classic London spot, especially magical during the holidays with its bauble-covered conservatory. While the food is standard and on the pricier side, the ambiance is the real draw. If you go, try to snag a table by the fireplace for a cozy experience. Just a heads-up – it’s popular, so book ahead!

Stop 4: Covent Garden

After exploring Belgravia, head over to Covent Garden for the next few stops on this 3 day London Christmas itinerary. You’ll need to take The Tube since it’s not really walkable from Belgravia, especially in foul weather (cold, rainy London weather).

The second you get there, you’ll see what all the fuss is about, I promise! It’s easily one of my favorite Christmas displays in London, and every year they switch things up a bit, so you never really know what you’re gonna get – but it’s always festive and fabulous. I just LOVED the vintage Santa sleigh on display on the second floor of the Apple Market. So fun to take pics with!

Spend an hour or so wandering the stalls of the Apple Market, stopping by the Jubilee Market Hall, and checking out all the fun pop ups! There’s bars serving mulled wine and festive cocktails, the cutest gingerbread hut with lots of beers and ciders on tap, and even a ginormous tree.

Don’t miss the snow falling on the hour by the tree from 12 PM to 7 PM – it adds the perfect wintry touch! It’s beautiful, but just a quick heads up: it only lasts about a minute, so try to time your visit to avoid waiting around too long (there’s too many things to do on our London Christmas itinerary so you don’t wanna waste any time).

Nearby, grab a drink at Mr. Fogg’s Tavern or a festive hot chocolate at Whipped London (just FYI it was sickenly sweet, haha). Or have a late lunch at Clos Maggiore here instead of earlier in Belgravia (just know you’ll need a reservation here as well!).

Stop 5: Stop by The Savoy

Obsessed with over-the-top decorations like I am? Make sure to head over to The Savoy for a sneak peek of their spectacular Christmas displays. 

And wow, those decorations are stunning! Although we couldn’t snag a reservation for afternoon tea (pro tip: book early!), we still ventured over to admire the hotel’s lavish decor. The highlight was the vintage steam train where you can sip sparkling champagne in one of its ornate carriages – how cool is that?! And the mountain of presents spilling out of the gorgeous gift-wrapped display. So classy and fun at the same time.

Stop 6: Ice skating at Somerset House

London has a whole slew of ice rinks to check out, so lace up your skates and get out onto the ice! I’m kinda a clutz on skates (ask my friends…), so I didn’t do any skating myself. BUT I’m making it my mission to get on the ice next season – since we’re actually headed back to London for Christmas! 

And one of the best rinks in the city? Somerset House! This iconic rink is set in a stunning 18th-century courtyard, complete with a massive Christmas tree that adds to the festive atmosphere. While we didn’t skate ourselves, it was a blast watching everyone glide around the rink, surrounded by all the twinkling lights. And of course sipped a cocktail at the Moët & Chandon Skate Lounge!

More coordinated than I am? Book a skating session in advance – sessions typically run for about 45 minutes, and it’s best to reserve your tickets online to avoid disappointment, especially during peak times (weekends and the days leading up to Christmas).

Stop 7: Neal’s Yard and Seven Dials Market

Cut back through the market stalls at Covent Garden and head to Seven Dials Market. There’s plenty of independent food vendors here (everything from holiday treats to global flavors), so it’s a great place for a snack! We were too stuffed from lunch to try anything, but honestly, I came for the decor anyway, haha. Pro tip: grab a mulled wine or hot chocolate while you wander!

Plus, it’s indoors, so perfect if you wanna escape the chilly temps outside.

After that, take a short stroll through Neal’s Yard – a colorful alleyway that really shines with twinkling decorations. We went a tad too early and it was still light out, but it still had a magical feel. Expect to find unique, independent cafes, bars, and shops lining the streets. Honestly, it takes all of 5 minutes to walk through, so it’s worth popping in for a quick visit and some festive photos!

Stop 8: Dinner at Dishoom

Not the least bit Christmassy (haha), but one of my all-time fave restaurants in London! I’m begging you to check it out if you’re a fan of Indian food! Who doesn’t love a little comfort food when it’s chilly out?! We end up here every single time we’re in the city, and it hasn’t disappointed yet. 

Their menu is loaded with must-try dishes, like the legendary chicken tikka (we get this every time!), rich, aromatic biryanis, and the fluffiest naan you’ll ever have. We also love the pav bhaji and veggie samosas. It’s super popular, so you might have to wait for a table (but hey, they’ve got locations all over the city, so there’s usually less of a wait at each now than in the past).

Stop 9: See a Christmas Show! 

This wouldn’t be a proper Christmas in London itinerary without diving into the theatre scene! 

The city is absolutely renowned for its performances, and come December, it’s bursting with festive shows. From elegant ballets to classic tales with seasonal twists and captivating orchestras, there’s something for everyone. You’ve got holiday classics like The Nutcracker at the Royal Opera House and A Christmas Carol at the Old Vic, plus all those long-running West End musicals that are always a hit.

I caught Elf! on Broadway at the Dominion Theatre, and loved this take on the beloved Will Ferrell film. You really can’t go wrong!

As with most popular events on this London Christmas itinerary, you’ll wanna snag your tickets well in advance. London loves its theatre and seats fill up fast, especially during the festive season!

London Christmas Itinerary Day 3: City of London and South Bank

After two days of running around (quite literally, we managed about 25k steps each day!), this 3rd and final day of my London Christmas itinerary is a bit more relaxed thankfully! 

If you’ve never been, you can squeeze in a short visit to Shoreditch in the afternoon if you wanna bulk the day up. We love walking down Brick Lane, getting salt beef bagels at Beigel Bake, seeing the graffiti on New Inn Broadway, and checking out a few art markets (Backyard Market, Old Spitalfields, and BOXPARK are all great).

Stop 1: Breakfast at Coppa Club Tower Bridge

Kick off Day 2 of your Christmas in London itinerary with breakfast at Coppa Club Tower Bridge – yes, this is where you can eat in one of their famous heated igloos! Super instagram-worthy with stunning views of Tower Bridge, and all decked out for the holidays.

I was super excited to visit but found out I was a few months too late for a reservation – these igloos are in high demand, with only nine available! If you manage to snag a spot, definitely let me know how it goes! I’ve heard that while it can get a bit hot and sticky inside, the festive decor and delicious holiday drinks make it totally worth it.

Pro tip: There’s a minimum spend of around £35 per person for lunch and dinner, but good news – there’s no minimum spend for breakfast! Which is one of the reasons I recommend coming for breakfast, haha.

Stop 2: Sky Garden (or The Garden at 120)

A visit to the Sky Garden is a highlight of any London Christmas itinerary! What is it exactly? A stunning public space with observation decks located on the 35th floor of the Walkie Talkie building (20 Fenchurch Street) with breathtaking panoramic views of the city. 

And of course for the Christmas season, it’s all decked out with decorations, trees, and lush greenery.

Sky Garden Details:

  • Reservations: Tickets are free (!!!) but must be reserved three weeks in advance. Given its popularity, securing your spot early is absolutely essential! You can’t go up without a ticket.
  • Opening Hours: The terrace is open daily from 10 AM to 6 PM on weekdays and 11 AM to 9 PM on weekends. You could visit for sunset, but to be honest, considering the time of year, there probably won’t be a sunset, haha. 

The Garden at 120 (Alternative Option): If you can’t get a reservation for Sky Garden, consider visiting The Garden at 120 instead! This is another spacious rooftop garden with a fantastic viewpoint, and hardly anyone knows about it (meaning its way less crowded) – and you don’t even need a reservation. The main negative – it’s not fully enclosed, so you’ll be out in the elements (cold, rain, wind, etc)!

Stop 3: Leadenhall Market

Once you’re done admiring the views from Sky Garden (or The Garden at 120), head over to Leadenhall Market (only a 3 minute walk away!). And trust me, this place is pure magic during the holidays! Not only is it a Harry Potter filming location, but its stunning Victorian architecture and twinkling lights will have you feeling like you’ve stepped straight into a cozy Christmas novel. 

The centerpiece? An impressive 8-foot Christmas tree, perfectly positioned under a star-covered atrium – perfect for capturing those holiday photos!

If you’re lucky enough to be around in mid-November, definitely don’t miss the annual tree-lighting ceremony – it’s a fun way to kick off the festive vibes. I found the decorations to be a bit low-key, but the rich red, green, and gold tones of the market are great for Christmassy shots regardless.

We unfortunately visited towards the tail end of the season so the market stalls were already closed and the tree lights were off, oh well.

Stop 4: Borough Market

Cross the London Bridge (you can either walk or take public transit), and head to Borough Market, another must-stop on your London Christmas itinerary. It’s a great place for a late lunch, just make sure you come hungry since there’s tons at this historic food market. 

A few of my favorites being Humble Crumble, donuts from Bread Ahead, and toasted cheese sandwiches at Kappacasein Dairy. With almost everything freshly made, you’ve really got your pick (there’s also paella, fresh pasta, oysters, fish n chips, etc – see, tons). 

Whatever you do, DO NOT MISS the legendary chocolate covered strawberries. Yes, they’re overly expensive at ~£8 a cup, but OMFG I’d eat them every day if I could.

If you get overwhelmed and wanna try all the things, consider signing up for a market tour! What’s better than a local foodie guiding you to top-rated vendors to try authentic, British cuisine?!

Stop 5: Tower Bridge/Winter by the River

Once you’re nice and full, head over to Winter by the River (previously Christmas by the River), near Tower Bridge! You’ll pass by The Shard, so be sure to look up! 

Winter by the River is a charming riverside market running along the South Bank, with stunning night views of the bridge and the Tower of London. 

You’ll find festive stalls selling snacks like nutella hot cocoa, chocolate covered marshmallows, Dutch style mini pancakes, and strawberry crepes. Plus a few savory options as well (but I bet you’ll be plenty full from Borough Market).

If you have time, head over to the Tower of London and/or take a river cruise!

Stop 6: Christmas in Leicester Square 

The last official stop on our 3 day London Christmas itinerary! If you’re staying over by Soho/Mayfair, you’ll need to head back this way anyways, so you may as well pop by the Leicester Square Market! Yes, another market, haha.

Leicester Square’s Christmas market may be small, but it’s cozy and bustling with festive cheer. Located right in the heart of London’s West End, it has some charming unique shops, beautifully decorated stalls, and of course, some delicious street food (DIY roasted marshmallows, anyone?). We also saw mini pancakes, waffles, and German sausages covered in molten raclette cheese – yummmm.

We went twice because, well, the cheese wheel pasta and hot cider were just that good. Definitely a cute spot to browse for some handcrafted jewelry, decorations, and gifts while getting into the holiday spirit.

Hope this helps you plan out the best 3 day Christmas in London itinerary! Are you headed to the UK for the holidays?!



The post A Festive London Christmas Itinerary: 3 Days in London in December appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/london-christmas-itinerary/feed/ 0
Best Things to do in London at Christmas (My Huge London in December Guide) https://apassionandapassport.com/best-things-to-do-in-london-at-christmas/ https://apassionandapassport.com/best-things-to-do-in-london-at-christmas/#respond Sat, 05 Oct 2024 07:18:08 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=31385 Planning to visit London for Christmas?! That’s a fantastic idea! Keep reading for all my favorite things to do in London in December, including iconic Christmas lights, cozy markets, and festive ice rinks. Everything you need to know for the ultimate Christmas in London, coming right up! I swear, London at Christmas is like noContinue Reading

The post Best Things to do in London at Christmas (My Huge London in December Guide) appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Planning to visit London for Christmas?! That’s a fantastic idea! Keep reading for all my favorite things to do in London in December, including iconic Christmas lights, cozy markets, and festive ice rinks. Everything you need to know for the ultimate Christmas in London, coming right up!

I swear, London at Christmas is like no other city I’ve ever been to. The entire city buzzes with energy – there’s ice skating at Somerset House, indulging in decadent hot chocolates, gazing at dazzling window displays, and discovering festive pop-ups. And you can’t forget all the holiday afternoon teas and yule log cakes!

After a few visits to the city (mostly in summer), I have to say London in December is my new favorite. Nowhere in the States does Christmas quite like London does, except for mayyyybee New York, but even that’s pushing it.

I never considered myself a Christmas person until I went to London in December. And now? Call me crazy, but I’ve officially joined the festive fan club and can’t get enough of the twinkling lights and over-the-top decorations!

We loved Christmas in London so much that we’re actually planning another trip back there this year for the holidays, haha! I typically hate revisiting destinations (especially less than a year later), but London at Christmas is just something else. 

During our 2.5-week winter Euro trip (starting with the popular Christmas markets in Prague, followed by picturesque Cesky Krumlov, snowy Hallstatt, charming Bruges, and finally arriving in London), it was the British capital that truly captured my heart. Sure, the markets may not have rivaled those in The Czech Republic and we missed the speculoos chocolates from Belgium, but boy oh boy does the city go all out.

If you’re counting down the days until Christmas in London, I don’t blame you! I cannot wait to head back to the city for all its festive magic (and to indulge in more afternoon teas – because who’s kidding, haha). ‘Tis the season to be jolly, and there’s no better place to soak in the magic than the UK capital!

Christmas in London Logistics

When is Christmas in London

Sounds like a silly question, but hear me out! Obviously the actual holiday of Christmas is celebrated on Christmas Day, but the festivities span from early November all the way until the very beginning of January! Most things to do in London for Christmas end right after New Year’s Day, but the main lights typically stay on until January 6th or so.

And London’s Christmas lights in popular areas like Oxford Street and Regent Street typically turn on in mid-November – making the holiday season feel extra long! The Christmas markets, ice rinks, and holiday events begin around the same time. You may even start seeing Christmas trees towards the end of October, although there’s obviously no guarantee.

So start planning your London Christmas trip – I promise you won’t regret it!

Where to Stay in London at Christmas

The city is huge, so it’s important to book accommodation near the spots you wanna see. I highly recommend booking a place in either Soho, Mayfair, or Covent Garden, as these neighborhoods are conveniently located near many of the city’s festive highlights.

Most hotels are pretty pricey (Christmas in London is super popular after all), so just be prepared to book early and spend a pretty penny, I mean pound, haha. If you’re on a budget, consider hotels further from the city center and taking the tube.

London’s got a seriously impressive lineup of hotels, but here’s a few that really nail that festive vibe:

  • The Ritz London: A true symbol of opulence! The Ritz goes all out for Christmas with stunning decor and extraordinary festive dining experiences (like a lavish five-course Christmas Day lunch).
  • Covent Garden Hotel: Nestled right in the heart of the action, this hotel is perfect for immersing yourself in the magical atmosphere of holiday markets and dazzling lights. You’ll be steps away from some of the best festive events!
  • Claridge’s: An absolute Mayfair classic, famous for its luxurious Christmas decorations and festive afternoon teas! 
  • Treehouse Hotel: We kicked off our trip here, and wow, what an experience! With its cozy ambiance and whimsical design, the Treehouse Hotel captures the magic of Christmas perfectly. The rooftop views are great, and oh wow that restaurant – oh so festive and fun! And they even had a DIY candy bar – the key to my heart!
  • The Savoy: Wow those decorations are stunning! Although we couldn’t snag a reservation for afternoon tea (pro tip: book early!), we still ventured over to admire the hotel’s lavish decor. The highlight was the vintage steam train where you can sip sparkling champagne in one of its ornate carriages – how cool is that?!
  • The Dorchester Hotel: If money is no object, stay here! And if it’s way out of your budget (like it was ours, haha), definitely check out the lobby – they go all out every year. 

Weather during Christmas in London

Overall, winter weather in London is pretty mild (compared to other spots in Europe in winter), but definitely be prepared for some rain – this is the British capital we’re talking about!

I’m including weather for late November and early January since the festivities often start early and continue into the new year. But of course most of the fun happens during December in London.

Late November

London’s weather in late November is typically cool, with average daytime temperatures around 8-10°C (46-50°F). Doesn’t seem that chilly, but evenings can drop to around 4-5°C (39-41°F), so it’ll feel nice and crisp when you’re out exploring the Christmas lights after dark. 

Rain is common (you could’ve told me that, haha), so definitely pack a travel umbrella or rain jacket for wandering through the markets and admiring the Christmas displays.

December

December in London brings true winter vibes, with temperatures averaging between 5-8°C (41-46°F) during the day and dipping to 2-4°C (36-39°F) at night. The Christmas lights add a warm glow to the city, but expect chilly air, especially once the sun sets. 

Unfortunately snow is rare in December (or anytime during winter in London actually, – it’s usually too warm for anything but light flurries), but there’s often a light drizzle or mist. 

For reference, we visited London for Christmas in late December, and got lucky with higher-than average temps and little-to-no rain! I was hot in my winter jacket at times, and had to carry it around. Just be prepared for temperamental temps and wear layers. 

January

January tends to be the coldest month in London, with daytime temperatures around 3-7°C (37-45°F). Nights are understandably colder, with the mercury often dropping to 1-3°C (33-37°F). 

While the Christmas lights start to come down after New Year’s, the winter sales are in full swing, and there’s still plenty of festive atmosphere left. You may catch a frosty morning, but snow is still infrequent. And when it does snow, it doesn’t stay on the ground too long – it typically melts away very quickly!

Tip: Layers are your best friend when visiting London for Christmas (it gets exceptionally hot on the tube). The city can be damp (it’s known for its rain afterall!), and temperatures fluctuate, so make sure to pack a mix of warm clothes, a good coat, scarf, gloves, and comfy boots to keep you warm while exploring all the Christmas magic! I’m giving way more packing advice below! 

Can I expect snow during Christmas in London? 

Don’t hold your breath… It hardly snows during December in London. Why? Mostly because the city is just too warm – the city generates tons of heat from all the buildings and cars. And when it does get cold enough, it melts quickly (sometimes before the snow can even settle). 

Psst – London is usually a few degrees warmer than the surrounding countryside outside the city. Meaning, if you wanna see snow, you’ll have a greater chance over there (or just go to Hallstatt, Switzerland, or Finnish Lapland where you’re practically guaranteed some of the white stuff!).

And if you get to experience snow at Christmas in London, you’re extremely lucky! The last time there’s been a truly white Christmas was back in 1999 –  over 20 years ago. Blame global warming…

What to Pack and Wear for Christmas in London

  • Warm Winter Coat: For those frigid winter days, you’ll really wanna invest in an insulated parka. I’ve got my eye on this North Face parka (I currently wear one from 10+ years ago – it’s about time for a new jacket). Looking for one a bit less expensive? This one’s crazy popular on social media, and with the length and sherpa-lined hood, I can totally see why. However note that it’s only water resistant, not waterproof, so not the best choice for those inevitable rainy London days.
  • Packable Puffer Jacket: I wear this one – it’s lightweight and water resistant, plus comes in a bunch of fun colors and the pockets are super deep (perfect for storing your phone). It packs down to almost nothing in the little included pouch – perfect for travel! 
  • Fleece Zip-Up: On those absolutely frigid days when you need a little something between your sweater and warm winter coat, a fleece zip-up (like this Columbia full-zip) will come in handy. Or if it’s unseasonably warm this can take the place of your winter jacket! There’s a reason it’s got 45k positive reviews!
  • Base Layers: I’ve been wearing heat tech long sleeve tees ever since I went to Banff in winter a few years back, and they’ve saved me from those frigid temps! They’re super lightweight and perfect to wear under a sweater, and leave you feeling dry and warm without the bulk!
  • Fleece-lined leggings: I used to layer two pairs of regular leggings, but now that fleece-lined leggings are a thing, I only wear those! They’re just as comfy as regular leggings, but keep your legs staying warm and toasty. I’ve worn these pairs a few times and they’ve been great, and come in a bunch of fun colors! If you’re looking for something to wear under jeans or snow pants instead, these come highly recommended (although too thin to wear on their own; more like a base layer).
  • Chapstick: Cold and dry air make your lips susceptible to chapping super easily. Ugh, the worst! I’m low-key obsessed with this cocoa butter swivel stick – it makes your lips so super soft and it smells a tad like chocolate! My favorite! It also works wonders on dry, chapped skin. You’ll wanna reapply multiple times throughout the day.
  • Power Bank: Batteries die faster in the cold, so come prepared with a power bank to recharge your stuff on the go. This compact power bank gives up to 10 full charges! I always throw this tiny one in my bag also, just in case, as a backup. My phone is my life-line (especially when traveling solo), so I like to be extra prepared!
  • Beanies: I’ve got this fleece-lined beanie (pom pom included) in a few colors, and always bring a thick headband along too for when I want to put my hair up. 
  • Warm Gloves: I like to take a few pairs of gloves with me – loving these wool-blend mittens and this pair that’s super lightweight and waterproof (good enough to go skiing in). Trust me, cheapie cotton gloves just ain’t good enough.
  • Scarves: I tend to bring a few, since they’re so easy to accessorize with! This blanket scarf is one of my faves (a great neutral option that matches everything), and chunky-knit infinity scarves are oh so cozy!
  • Waterproof Snow Boots: Even though it hardly snows during Christmas in London, I still recommend a comfy waterproof boot! Gotta keep your feet warm and dry and comfy on the streets; especially since you’ll probably be walking at least 15k steps a day! And THESE Sorel waterproof boots are easily the best ones out there – they’re 100% waterproof, seam-sealed, and actually look pretty cute (unlike most snow boots out there). I practically lived in them 2 weeks straight and got zero blisters! Leave the heeled boots at home – you’ll want flat boots for max comfort!
  • Polarized sunglasses: Yes, it’s sunny sometimes in London in December – I’ve been wearing these exact ones for years and I just love ‘em.
  • Travel umbrella: We all know rain is a thing in London, so come prepared with a small umbrella that you can easily pack in your day bag.
  • Dressier outfits: You’ll want a dressy outfit or two for festive dinners or shows – bring along a Christmas sweater (or jumper as they say in London!) for some extra cheer!

A Few More Things to Know about Christmas in London 

  • Prepare for the crowds: It’s no surprise – Christmas is peak season in London. You’ll need to book restaurant reservations early (spontaneous walk-ins are rare), and hotel rooms fill up fast. Pro tip: for that perfect IG photo, come during the quieter days in late November or early December. The closer it gets to Christmas the more crowded it’s gonna be. 
  • Public transport is your best friend: Forget about driving in London – it’s a logistical nightmare. Luckily, you can easily tap your contactless card on public transportation, so no need to grab an Oyster Card. Just hop on the Tube and you’re set!
  • The markets aren’t as magical as you’d think: Sure, there’s mince pies, gourmet cheese toasties, and handcrafted trinkets. But if you’re expecting epic, over-the-top magical Christmas markets, you’re gonna be disappointed. They’ve got nothing on markets in other European countries (Austria! Germany! France!). You don’t go to London for the markets – you go for the overall festive energy and holiday decorations around the city – the markets are just an added bonus.  
  • Expect to splurge on hotels: Accommodation in central London during Christmas is pricey – no surprise there. If you want to be near all the action (like Soho, Mayfair, or Covent Garden), make sure to book early (a few months in advance). The festive atmosphere comes at a premium, but it’s worth every penny. If you wanna save some money, stay during the week if possible. Weekends can be double the price.
  • Don’t try to do it all in 3 days: London is downright massive, and there’s just too much to cover in a short visit (festive neighborhoods, holiday activities, bauble-covered restaurants, etc). If you’re focusing on Christmas cheer, 3 days will give you a solid taste, but if you’re planning on mixing in tourist spots, you’ll need more time to truly explore the city.
  • Be strategic with your itinerary: Planning is key to making the most of London at Christmas. I like to map out my must-see spots (Google Maps is honestly my best friend, haha) and plan meals and activities nearby to save time. With so much to see in London in December, it’s not the time to wing it! Psst – here’s my festive 3 days in London Christmas itinerary (which you can totally steal and includes so many of these fun holiday activities).
  • Short days, long nights: With sunrise around 8am and sunset around 4pm, it’s true – daylight hours are limited during London at Christmas. But honestly? We don’t typically mind this as we get more time to soak up all the glittering lights and then get to bed early, haha (which is always necessary after walking 25k steps in a day!).
  • Christmas in London vs. Winter in London: Christmas and winter are two different beasts. Once January hits, most of the festive decorations disappear. If you’re after that glitz and sparkle, make sure you visit before mid-January when the Christmas magic fades.

Christmas Day in London (What’s Open) 

Understandably, most businesses and attractions are closed on Christmas Day. Locals deserve to spend time with their families, too! But if you’ll be here on Christmas Day, don’t worry – there’s still a few things you can do! 

Psst – most museums and galleries in London are closed on Christmas Day. However, some may be open on Boxing Day, such as The British Museum and The National Gallery. Always double and triple check opening hours before heading anywhere on Christmas, haha.

  • Take a Christmas Day walk or two: Explore London’s iconic sights, like Big Ben, Tower Bridge, or Hyde Park, without the usual crowds. You can also go for a walk along the Southbank! And of course all the decorations will be up!
  • Christmas Day River Cruises: Some companies offer festive river cruises along the Thames, complete with a Christmas meal and beautiful views of London’s skyline! One of the best things to do in London on Christmas Day, especially because you won’t need to worry about a meal (which can be hard to find on Christmas). This 3-hour lunch cruise down the River Thames (complete with 4-course traditional Christmas lunch) looks absolutely lovely! 
  • Take in the Christmas Lights: Even though the shops are closed, the festive lights on Oxford Street, Regent Street, and Carnaby Street are still on – and they’re utterly spectacular (although it’s sure to be busy, busy, busy)! This Open-Air Christmas Bus Tour is available on Christmas Day (although it’ll definitely sell out quickly!)
  • Hotel restaurants: Plan to either eat market food (our cheese-wheel pasta was perfect after wandering around in the cold) or make a reservation at a hotel restaurant (most serve special festive menus!). Most other restaurants will be closed on Christmas Day unless they have special Christmas menus ($$$). 

How do I get around London on Christmas Day?

Public transport operates on reduced services on Christmas Eve and Boxing Day, but on Christmas Day, most transport, including the tube and buses, is completely shut down. Meaning literally ZERO trains/buses. Yup, it’s a bit of a headache for visitors, haha. There’ll still be taxis on Christmas day, but understandably will charge a higher fare.

That’s why it’s super important to pick a hotel within walking distance of the main attractions if you’re visiting during Christmas. And don’t forget to book your Christmas Eve and Christmas Day meals in advance at restaurants nearby (which you can easily walk to)!

We actually flew out of London (for a few magical days celebrating Christmas in Prague) on Christmas Day itself – and we were SO worried there’d be ZERO public transit and/or rideshares available. 

Because of this, we decided to stay in an airport hotel (Holiday Inn Express Heathrow Terminal 4) the night beforehand so we didn’t have to worry about getting to the airport on Christmas Day. Highly recommended if you’re flying out early Christmas Day like we were. Took all those public transit stressors away thankfully! 

Best Things to do in London at Christmas

And now, what you probably came here for — my super long list of the best things to do in London at Christmas time! 

I was surprised to learn that Victorian England (with a little help from Germany!) pretty much created our modern idea of Christmas. So yes – they’re basically the OG of holiday cheer!

See the Spectacular Christmas Lights in London

London’s Christmas lights are next-level festive, so if you really wanna get into the holiday spirit, dedicate a few hours to the lights! From the glitz of Oxford Street to the quirkiness of Carnaby Street, London really knows how to do Christmas in style. 

Pretty much everything sparkles, and you can honestly just wander around and get lost in the magical atmosphere. But if you don’t wanna miss anything, be sure to plot these streets on your map! I was blown away by all the dazzling displays – no one does Christmas quite like London, so make sure to soak them in!

OR make your lives super easy and sign up for a Christmas lights tour! If you don’t wanna subject yourself to the cold, check out this Open Top Christmas Lights Bus Tour or this similar one (since it’s bound to sell out around the holidays). You can even hop on a Christmas lights bike tour if that’s your thing or download a self-guided audio walking tour if you prefer that instead. Traveling with a few friends/family? You can even go for a private tour in an iconic black cab! So many options!

Here’s some streets/neighborhoods you can’t miss:

Oxford Street: The city’s most famous (and crowded!) shopping street (Oxford!) becomes a total winter wonderland with tons of lights illuminating the chaos. We’re talking about thousands of twinkling stars, all made from recyclable materials and energy-efficient LED bulbs – they shine bright but get switched off after 11 pm to save energy. I love how the city is prioritizing the need to be eco-friendly!

Off of Oxford Street you’ll find South Molton Street which is worth a wander as well!

Carnaby Street: Always funky and colorful, Carnaby Street keeps things fresh with a new theme every year. When we visited in 2023, it was all about the “Carnaby Universe,” with planets flying overhead. And it was super cool. 

Previous themes have featured everything from electric vibes to rainbow-colored displays with disco balls and underwater worlds. It’s one of the coolest, quirkiest places to check out in London – a guaranteed vibe for sure!

Regent Street: I think this was the street I was most excited to see! Why?! Because it’s where you’ll find the iconic angels floating high above the street! And oh wow they were worth the wait!

Apparently the 2023 season was the last for the angels (hope this isn’t true!), but fingers crossed they make a comeback because they’re absolutely stunning. A true testament to Christmas in London, and it’d be a huge disappointment for the city if they were gone for good. 

Psst this is where the tradition of hanging Christmas lights in London actually started!

Bond Street and New Bond Street: If you love luxury, this is your spot. High-end brands like Cartier, Tiffany’s, and Chanel are decked out with the fanciest Christmas window decorations. And they’re all just gorgeous!

Even if you’re just window shopping (hey, a trip to London at Christmas is expensive enough, haha), it’s worth the stroll to soak up the holiday glam. Think Crown Jewels level fancy! I think we walked these streets half a dozen times – they’re just so festive and fun!

Getting chilly? Walk through nearby Royal Arcade and Burlington Arcade both 19th century covered shopping streets that are full of Christmas decorations too!

Belgravia: I absolutely loved strolling through Belgravia. It’s one of the prettiest (and wealthiest) neighborhoods in London and seriously feels like a scene out of Love Actually. It’s not as wow and over-the-top as the streets in Mayfair/Soho, but still just as classy and chic. 

We wandered down Elizabeth Street, grabbed festive cupcakes at Peggy Porschen, and took in all the chic Christmas vibes (grand Georgian townhouses and beautifully adorned white stucco facades included). Definitely hit up Dominique Ansel Bakery for cronuts and the stunning Moyses Stevens flower shop while you’re there!

Admire the London Christmas Trees

What’s Christmas without a few trees?! There’s a whole bunch scattered throughout the city (wayyy too many to list), but here’s a few of my faves (and they’re all festive AF of course). 

Trafalgar Square: Every December, Trafalgar Square receives a towering Christmas tree as a gift from Norway, symbolizing friendship and peace between the nations. It’s a tradition that’s been happening since 1947! Standing tall and elegantly decorated with vertical strings of lights, this tree is one of the most iconic sights in London at Christmas. 

Plus, the surrounding area is packed with holiday vibes and a small market – perfect for snapping festive pics or just soaking in the Christmas spirit.

Covent Garden Christmas Tree: What a showstopper! It’s over 60 feet tall, covered in 30,000 lights, and absolutely impossible to miss in the middle of all the Christmas hustle. Plus, the mistletoe chandeliers and holiday stalls just add to the festive feel. You’ll find the tree right outside the Apple Market, which was decked out in massive red ornaments and golden bells.

One of my favorite parts? It literally (fake) snows every hour on the hour from noon to 7 PM – a magical winter wonderland moment since London doesn’t get much snow, haha! If you’re looking for Christmas vibes, Covent Garden is the place to be.

Somerset House: The Christmas tree at Somerset House lights up the skating rink, and it’s honestly such a perfect winter scene. The decorations are stunning every year, with the tree adding to the historic charm of Somerset House. Even if you’re not skating, just sipping on a hot chocolate (like us!) while watching the skaters against this wintry scene is pure holiday perfection.

St. Pancras Station: St. Pancras Station has one of the most unique Christmas trees I’ve ever seen – it’s literally made of books! Sponsored by Hatchard’s (London’s oldest bookshop), this 12-meter-tall tree is stacked with 3,800 hand-painted books (and some even light up because why not?!). Safe to say itsy a total standout and almost reaches the ceiling, haha. 

As a book lover, I was beyond obsessed! You can even step inside the tree and chill in a few cozy reading nooks. And the best part? You don’t need a train ticket to enjoy it – just stop by and take it all in (we got lucky and we’re already here for the Eurostar to Bruges)! For the best view, head up the escalators. 

Leadenhall Market: Leadenhall Market is pure magic during the holiday season – and not just because it was a filming location for Harry Potter (true story!). With its stunning Victorian architecture and twinkling lights, it feels like you’re stepping straight into a cozy Christmas novel. The market’s centerpiece is an 8-foot real Christmas tree, sitting right under the breathtaking star-covered atrium.

If you’re lucky enough to be visiting in mid-November, don’t miss the annual tree-lighting ceremony – it’s such a fun way to kick off the festive season. Plus, the whole market is packed with seasonal treats, so definitely make time to wander around! We unfortunately visited towards the tail end of the season so the market stalls were already closed and the tree lights were off. 

Admittedly, the Christmas decorations tend to be kinda low key. BUT the red, green, and gold tones of the market are perfect for Christmassy shots!

Other Festive Christmas Trees to See:

  • Coal Drops Yard: Tucked away in the trendy King’s Cross area, Coal Drops Yard serves up a super modern Christmas tree that’s all about London’s cool, contemporary vibe. With its unique design and festive flair, it’s a hit with holiday shoppers and anyone hunting for the perfect Instagram shot.
  • The Connaught: A super elegant tree in a super elegant hotel! Chic and sophisticated, with a great afternoon tea. 
  • The Ritz: The epitome of luxury! If you’re all about glam, The Ritz Christmas tree is a whole mood. 

Check out the Best Christmas Displays in London

Annabel’s

Every Christmas, Annabel’s in Berkeley Square pulls out all the stops with its extravagant holiday displays. There’s a reason it’s one of the most popular places on Instagram! Even though it’s a swanky private members’ club, anyone can admire the exterior, and trust me, it’s worth the visit! 

When I went last season (2023), they had a massive hot air balloon surrounded by twinkling stars – totally over-the-top and so fun to see in person. In previous years, they’ve done gingerbread houses, carousels, and Nutcracker themes. You’ll definitely want to snap a pic here, but heads up, it’s on a busy main road, so getting the perfect shot can be a bit tricky.

Neill Strain Floral Couture 

This is one of the most over-the-top decorated shops, and it’d be a shame to miss it! It honestly feels like an art installation, haha.

I fell in love with the decorations at the Belgravia location last December, and it was decked out with vibrant baubles and a massive red bow – perfect for photos! It’s technically a flower shop, but they go all out for the holidays, and the Belgravia store is especially elaborate. If you’re gonna go slightly outta the way for some decorations, make it this one.

I randomly came across another one of their stores while wandering Mayfair, and it was just as festive (although not as showy and elaborate). If you’re into holiday decor and florals (like me!), this is a must-see.

Christmas at Kew

Kew Gardens at Christmas is pure magic – the garden lights up with a stunning after-dark display that feels straight out of a fairy tale. Think sparkling, illuminated pathways and whimsical light installations – perfect for an evening stroll! It’s one of the most popular holiday displays in London, so booking early is a must (it’s incredibly popular), but sadly, I ran out of time and missed it. 

KOYN

KOYN may be known for its incredible sushi and izakaya dishes, but during the holidays, it’s all about the festive decor! When I visited, there was the cutest vintage car parked outside, stacked with Christmas presents and topped off with a tree – it ended up being one of my favorite Christmas displays in London!

Seven Dials Market

Cozy holiday charm all in a foodie paradise – what more could you want?! Right in the heart of Covent Garden, this place goes all out with twinkling lights, massive wreaths, and a festive vibe that’s hard to resist. AND it’s inside so perfect when it’s beyond freezing outside.

Independent food vendors serve up everything from holiday treats to global flavors, so whether you’re craving a classic mince pie or something a bit more adventurous, you’ve got options. We were too stuffed from lunch to try anything unfortunately, but I honestly came for the decor anyways, haha. Pro tip: grab a mulled wine or hot chocolate while you wander!

Covent Garden Market Halls

Eeee – Covent Garden! The moment I laid eyes on those shimmering baubles and massive golden bells, I fell in love with London at Christmas! A huge grin was literally plastered on my face, haha. The entire market gets a holiday makeover and they really go all out – this year’s display might just be my favorite (based on the fabulous photos I’ve seen online of previous years).

Don’t miss the snow falling on the hour by the tree from 12 PM to 7 PM – it adds the perfect wintry touch! It’s beautiful, but just a quick heads up: it only lasts about a minute, so try to time your visit to avoid waiting around too long (there’s too many things to do in London at Christmas so you don’t wanna waste any time).

It’s easily one of my favorite Christmas displays in London, and every year they switch things up a bit, so you never really know what you’re gonna get – but it’s always festive and fabulous. I just LOVED the vintage Santa sleigh on display on the second floor of the Apple Market. So fun to take pics with!

Ever After Garden

Ever After Garden in Grosvenor Square is hands down one of the most touching displays I’ve seen in London for Christmas. It’s a sea of 25,000 illuminated white roses, each one dedicated to lost friends and loved ones. 

When I went, it was such a peaceful, reflective space amidst all the holiday hustle and bustle. If you’re looking for something a bit more meaningful during the holidays, this is the spot to visit – it’s truly beautiful and moving.

Go Ice Skating

London has a whole slew of ice rinks to check out, so lace up your skates and get out onto the ice! I’m kinda a clutz on skates (ask my friends…), so I didn’t do any skating myself. BUT I’m making it my mission to get on the ice next season – since we’re actually headed back to London for Christmas! 

Remember – most of the rinks are outdoors and open to the elements. Meaning it’ll be cold and possibly drizzly – dress appropriately and wear thick socks!  

Here’s a few iconic ice rinks in the city:

  • Somerset House: Somerset House is one of the most iconic rinks in London, located in a gorgeous 18th-century courtyard with a massive Christmas tree in the center. We didn’t skate, but loved watching everyone that was and then warming up with a cocktail at the Moët & Chandon Skate Lounge. Plus the tree is oh so grand and gorgeous!
  • Hampton Court Palace: Ever wanted to skate around while admiring the grand Tudor architecture of a historical palace?! You can over here! The ice rink is set against the backdrop of Henry VIII’s historic home, so once you’re done skating, head inside Hampton Court Palace – there’s even a historic chocolate kitchen!
  • GLIDE Battersea (Power Station): This is one of the newest open-air ice rinks in London, and it’s super Christmassy! Complete with a gingerbread house, cozy see-through igloos, a carousel, and a grand Christmas tree right in the middle of the rink. Plus really cute little support penguins for the kids. Pro-tip: go once it dark out to get the full effects of all the lights!
  • Queen’s House: Skate with a beautiful view of the Queen’s House and the nearby National Maritime Museum. It’s on the smaller size and a bit more relaxed; perfect for kids. Unfortunately the rink is closed for the 2024/25 season.
  • Canary Wharf Ice Rink: This rink’s partially covered (actually the only one in London!), so no need to worry about the city’s unpredictable weather. Skate around under the skyscrapers in the business district of Canary Wharf, and once you’re done, head over to the Oasis Bar & Terrace for some cozy après-skate drinks!

PS: Sadly, The Natural History Museum’s iconic ice rink is no more. It’s been permanently closed since 2021, with no plans to reopen.

Do Some Holiday Shopping in London

London is well-known for its luxury department stores, and they all go absolutely wild for Christmas. I’m talking dazzling lights, festive displays, and extravagant decorations – both inside and out!

So naturally, we ducked into department stores when we wanted to warm up (London’s chilly at night!). Plus, many of the shops have over-the-top window displays that are just amazing to see.

Harrods

Harrods is always a Christmas classic, and I make it a point to visit every time I’m in London, no matter the season (their fish and chips are chef’s kiss!). Plus, it’s always fun to gawk at the bougie designer goods, haha. 

In past years, the entire store exterior was decked out with golden Christmas lights and stunning wreaths. But unfortunately, when we visited, they decided to forgo decorations entirely! I was SUPER bummed, especially since I had seen photos from previous years and it all looked so epic! Guess it’s a reason for me to head back to London for Christmas.

Inside, though, they still delivered on the festive vibes (thankfully!). Think fancy ornaments, gold accents, and a Christmas department full of luxury decorations. Plus, the food hall is a must-visit, offering everything from mince pies to gourmet chocolates. Fingers crossed they bring back the exterior lights in future seasons!

Selfridges

Selfridges on Oxford Street is known for their extravagant holiday windows (15 in total!), and this year didn’t disappoint. The theme for 2023 was Showtime, featuring giant rotating candy canes, “The Belle of the Bauble” (a stunning figure draped in a shimmering bauble dress), and a delightful Bow Ballerina – everything was creative and whimsical. Don’t miss their epic Christmas Shop on the ground floor!

Fortnum & Mason

One of London’s oldest department stores, Fortnum & Mason truly shines during the holiday season! The annual advent calendar adorning the facade is simply stunning – definitely check it out at night, as I found it even more mesmerizing in the dark. 

Inside you can find curated gift baskets filled with tea, mince pies, Christmas pudding, brandy butter, and spiced treats. We had no room in our suitcases so couldn’t buy any (unfortunate for us since everything looked so good). Instead we just wandered around and soaked up the classic British Christmas charm!

Psst – you can also pop into Harvey Nick’s and Liberty London if you have time – but honestly, we were a little department store’d out by now!

See a Festive Holiday Performance

London is absolutely famous for its theater scene. And come December, London is FILLED with Christmas shows – there’s everything from elegant ballets, classic tales with seasonal twists, and captivating orchestras. 

Here’s some of the most popular holiday performances to check out in London in December:

  • The Nutcracker at the Royal Opera House: A holiday classic with stunning choreography and a magical atmosphere. The story follows a young girl named Clara on her adventure through a fantastic world filled with dancing dolls, sugar plums, and her brave Nutcracker prince. I saw this in SF once and I’d love to see it again!
  • A Christmas Carol at the Old Vic: A must-see for Dickens fans! This classic story follows Ebenezer Scrooge, a grumpy old man who hates Christmas and only cares about his business and money. The tale explores how he learns to embrace the holiday spirit and change his ways.
  • West End Musicals: If you’re not into traditional Christmas shows, many long-running West End musicals run throughout December, including Disney’s The Lion King (I LOVED this one!), Wicked, Matilda The Musical, Les Miserables, and Harry Potter and the Cursed Child (saw this one too!). On my last trip to London in December, I saw Elf! at the Dominion Theatre and loved this take on the beloved Will Ferrell film. You really can’t go wrong!

Best London Christmas Markets

Let’s be real – London’s Christmas markets definitely don’t have the same grandeur as those in Germany, France, or Austria (don’t hate me for saying that!), but that doesn’t mean you should skip them. Sure, they’re not super elaborate (with the exception of Winter Wonderland), but they’re still fun for some festive shopping, mulled wine, and stocking up on unique gifts.

We managed to hit up the markets in Leicester Square, Trafalgar Square, and Covent Garden, but the others are still on my London Christmas bucket list for next time. If you’d rather venture around with a local guide, sign up for this small group Christmas market tour (lunch and oysters and lots more included!).

A little tip: some markets end in late December, while others stick around until early January. Make sure to check exact dates on the official websites before planning your trip!

Winter Wonderland in Hyde Park

Winter Wonderland is a total Christmas extravaganza – London’s biggest and most famous festive spot, and it’s not just a market, it’s a whole experience. 

Picture traditional wooden chalets selling gifts, bratwurst, churros, mulled wine, and more. Add to that a Bavarian Village, carnival rides, the UK’s largest outdoor ice skating rink, and a whole ice sculpture exhibition, and you’ve got one epic holiday adventure. You can even grab a drink at the ice bar, where everything (yup, everything) is made of ice.

It’s best to go in the early afternoon if you want to avoid the crazy crowds. And don’t forget, you’ll need to buy a ticket to enter Winter Wonderland (only a few pounds), with extra fees for things like ice skating, the ice bar, and other attractions. But trust me, it’s worth it — we already have our tickets for this coming year!

Trafalgar Square Christmas Market

We stumbled upon the Trafalgar Square Christmas Market one evening (located on the terrace in front of The National Gallery), and to be honest, it wasn’t my favorite. It’s super small with only a handful of stalls, and nothing really stood out (except for some cute London-themed ornaments). 

While I wouldn’t go out of my way to visit, if you’re already nearby, it’s worth a quick wander. At least you’ll get to see the iconic Christmas tree, which is a gift from Norway each year and has quite the history behind it!

Greenwich Christmas Market

Set within the historic Greenwich Market, this one boasts over 150 stalls and has a bit more character than some of the others. 

Unfortunately, we didn’t have time to make it here (it’s a bit further away from the most popular things to do in London at Christmas), but I’ve heard it’s a gem for finding handcrafted gifts. You can expect eco-friendly candles, leather accessories, homemade jewelry, and unique homewares. It’s a fantastic spot to support independent vendors, plus Santa’s Grotto is a hit for families. 

Covent Garden Christmas Village

Okay, so Covent Garden Christmas Village may not be your typical market, but it was hands down one of my favorite spots in London during December. The whole area transforms into a festive wonderland, with massive baubles, shimmering lights, and a giant Christmas tree that snows (fake snow, but still!). 

Loads of restaurants in the area roll out seasonal menus, and the pop-up bars serving mulled wine and festive cocktails are an absolute must. Boutique shops line the streets for some holiday retail therapy, and honestly, it’s perfect for Instagram! Plus there was the cutest gingerbread hut when we visited with lots of beers and ciders on tap!

Southbank Centre Winter Market

Right along the Thames and just steps away from the London Eye, Southbank Centre Winter Market has its own charm but feels a bit more low-key. There’s a handful of wooden chalets selling mostly food and drinks rather than gifts or souvenirs. 

It’s pretty small, so unless you’re already planning to ride the London Eye or head to the National Theatre, I wouldn’t go out of my way. But if you’re nearby, it’s a cute stop for some festive snacks with views of the river.

Leicester Square Christmas Market

Leicester Square’s Christmas market may be small, but it’s cozy and bustling with festive cheer. Located right in the heart of London’s West End, it has some charming unique shops, beautifully decorated stalls, and of course, some delicious street food (DIY roasted marshmallows, anyone?). We also saw mini pancakes, waffles, and German sausages covered in molten raclette cheese – yummmm.

We went twice because, well, the cheese wheel pasta and hot cider were just that good. Definitely a cute spot to browse for some handcrafted jewelry, decorations, and gifts while getting into the holiday spirit.

Christmas by the River at London Bridge

Tucked between London Bridge and Tower Bridge along the south bank of the Thames, this market offers festive fun with a killer backdrop. Cozy pop-up stalls sell everything from ornaments to scarves, all while you’re surrounded by London’s most iconic sights—think Tower Bridge and The Shard. 

Yeah, it gets a little packed (because who wouldn’t want to shop with those views?), but the setting totally makes it worth the tight squeeze.

Best Restaurants for a Festive Meal

‘Tis the season of overindulgence! There’s no shortage of festive places to eat in London, and it’s nearly impossible to visit them all during a Christmas visit, especially if you’ve only got a few days. 

There’s heated igloos, spaces completely covered in baubles, and colorful Christmassy cupcakes – OH and definitely pick out a festive afternoon tea for a classic British experience!

Restaurants get booked up – you’ll definitely wanna make reservations ahead of time for most of these below! Many have special menus just for the holiday season, so be sure to check them out and secure your spot early.

Daphne’s

Daphne’s is such a classic London spot, especially around the holidays! Its bauble-covered conservatory area is simply magical (have you seen the photos?!), which makes indulging in some Italian food all that more festive. 

While the food is pretty standard (and the prices are high), you’re really there for the ambiance! Pro-tip: ask for a table by the fireplace; it adds a cozy touch. Just a heads-up – the place has mixed reviews, with some people saying it’s overrated, so do your research ahead of time. But regardless of that, the place is always booked up, so definitely make a reservation at least a few weeks in advance.

Peggy Porschen Belgravia

We swung by Peggy Porschen Belgravia for breakfast one morning (because, honestly, who says cupcakes aren’t a breakfast food?), and I totally fell for all the holiday-themed treats, haha. It was hard to choose – everything is oh so pretty!

This place is practically an iconic London landmark – all decked out in peony pink no less! Perfect for pretty pictures and sipping on a warm drink in the cozy tea room. They change out the front decor every season, and of course Christmas is just sensational.

They do offer savory breakfast and brunch items, but let’s be real, most folks come for the sugary treats. And if you’re in the mood for something extra special, you can even enjoy afternoon tea at the Parlor.

Sketch

Pricey, posh, and perfectly photogenic, especially during the Christmas season. Even the iconic egg-shaped bathroom stalls that we’ve all seen were decorated for Christmas as well! It’s the perfect place to go if you’re feeling fancy and festive. Stepping into this wintry wonderland the moment we walked through the doors was nothing short of magical – talk about a first impression!

The restaurant features four distinct rooms, each with its own avant-garde decor that’s spectacularly over-the-top. We had lunch in the Glade Room, which was absolutely enchanting and filled with twinkling fairy lights and lush green garlands, complete with a ballerina dancing around for a bit! 

If you wanna enjoy afternoon tea in The Gallery, be sure to book SUPER early – it’s super popular. It’s definitely a pretty penny (one of the priciest afternoon teas in London), but the food is fantastic, the atmosphere is superb, and it’s insanely Instagrammable – especially during Christmas in London.

Psst – if you’re looking for the iconic plush pink room, you won’t find it anymore! They’ve revamped it into a cheerful yellow, and it’s more vibrant than ever (although I was definitely missing the pink!).

Miracle at Henrietta

Miracle at Henrietta is an outrageously over-the-top Christmassy cocktail bar, very similar to those whimsical pop-ups we have in San Francisco. The space is completely decked out with tinsel hanging from the ceiling, gloriously kitschy decor, and an oversized fireplace that screams holiday cheer. Seasonal drinks are served in delightfully tacky mugs – think Santa-themed cups and dinosaurs sporting Christmas hats.

If you’re from a major city in the U.S. like we are, you might want to skip this one since chances are you’ve got something similar back home. You’d be better off spending your time doing uniquely London experiences!

Coppa Club Igloos

I’ve seen these famous heated igloos (with views of the Tower Bridge!) on social media for ages, and I was so excited to go! Only to realize I was a few months too late to snag a reservation (they only have nine igloos, so it’s no surprise, right?).

If you manage to get a spot, you’ll have to let me know how it goes, haha. I’ve heard they can get a bit hot and sticky inside, but I bet the festive decor and holiday drinks make it all worthwhile. Just a heads-up: be prepared for a minimum spend of around £35 per person – though there’s no minimum at breakfast!

Ralph’s Coffee by Ralph Lauren

In front of Cartier on Old Bond Street, you’ll find Ralphs – one of the most festive coffee shops around. And yup, it’s busy busy busy which is honestly to be expected, haha. You can either dine in or simply take a hot beverage to go; we grabbed a coffee and hot chocolate and both were great! 

The Ivy Chelsea Garden

Come for the (good quality) food, stay for the (over-the-top) decor! There’s a few Ivy locations around town, but the one in Chelsea has the most spectacular display (all in a beautiful Georgian building). Plus, the modern British menus have so much to choose from. 

If you can’t get a rez, at least stop by to see the decorations – the facade never disappoints (and it changes every year and is always super impressive).

Churchill Arms

Churchill Arms is one of the oldest pubs in London, and it gets a complete makeover for Christmas! Expect to see dozens and dozens of Christmas trees on the exterior of the building, and lots of lights inside as well! The pub serves Thai food surprisingly, so you can enjoy delicious curries and noodles at the same time that you’re having a pint.

Some other iconic restaurants for Christmas in London: 

  • 34 Mayfair: known to be one of most festive restaurants in London for Christmas, although I heard they’ve recently downgraded their decor quite a bit. 
  • Duck & Waffle: come for a festive brunch overlooking the city from the 40th floor, complete with snow-covered trees, glistening icicles, and glowing lamp posts
  • Dalloway Terrace: celebrate Christmas with a festive afternoon tea or lunch on their al-fresco terrace (don’t worry – there’s heat lamps and an enclosed awning and tons of holiday decorations)
  • Clos Maggiore: A modern French restaurant right in the heart of Covent Garden that’s perfect for a romantic meal with it’s cozy, candle-lit Christmas oasis filled with lots of local and seasonal products
  • Tattu: expect a chic, spacious, and sophisticated dining experience with a festive twist on its contemporary Cantonese classics!
  • Festive Afternoon teas: This is what London’s known for – don’t miss it! I live for all the holiday pastries, scones, and finger sandwiches, and luckily there’s tons of festive options around the city, including The Savoy, One Aldwych, Sweetsmas Tea at Four Seasons, and Sketch.

So who’s heading to London for Christmas this year?! I can’t wait to stand under the dazzling lights and indulge in all the festive treats!



The post Best Things to do in London at Christmas (My Huge London in December Guide) appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/best-things-to-do-in-london-at-christmas/feed/ 0
Christmas in Prague: Festive Things to do in Prague in the Winter https://apassionandapassport.com/christmas-in-prague/ https://apassionandapassport.com/christmas-in-prague/#respond Wed, 18 Sep 2024 05:26:53 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=31309 Headed to the Czech Republic and planning to visit Prague at Christmas?! You’re in the right place! Keep reading for all my favorite things to do in Prague in December, as well as how to get there, what to eat, and tons of other helpful tips. Including, of course, the Prague Christmas markets! Prague atContinue Reading

The post Christmas in Prague: Festive Things to do in Prague in the Winter appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Headed to the Czech Republic and planning to visit Prague at Christmas?! You’re in the right place! Keep reading for all my favorite things to do in Prague in December, as well as how to get there, what to eat, and tons of other helpful tips. Including, of course, the Prague Christmas markets!

Prague at Christmas is pure magic. The medieval streets come alive with twinkling lights, festive decorations, and charming Christmas stalls – the whole city kinda feels like a holiday fairytale! 

The Prague Christmas markets are packed with Old Prague Ham, roasted chestnuts, handcrafted gifts, and sizzling sausages. Towering Christmas trees light up the squares, while cozy cafes and pubs with frosted windows offer the perfect escape to warm up with some Czech beer. 

And let’s be real – Czech food is practically made for winter weather (it’s very hearty and rich and filling). We couldn’t get enough! I swear, Prague just sparkles at Christmas!

We spent our days wandering through the Prague Christmas markets, devouring trdelník (simply the best), and sipping mulled wine as we strolled along the cobblestone streets, soaking in the festive energy.

Prague was actually the first European city we’ve ever visited for the Christmas markets. And what a great introduction it was (I mean, who can say no to hunks of the famous Old Prague Ham and sausages grilling over coals). We’re currently planning our second European Christmas market trip because we loved our first one so much, which I think may become an annual thing now… definitely not complaining!

Get ready for plenty of mulled wine, cozy, fairytale vibes, and stunning Gothic architecture – here’s my Prague Christmas guide. I promise, you won’t regret heading to Prague in December. I mean, the Czech capital is easily one of the most beautiful cities in Eastern Europe, if not the world!

But before we get into all the fun things to do in Prague during the festive Christmas season, I’m sharing a bunch of important logistics first!

Weather During Prague in the Winter

Winter in Prague is crisp and frosty and oh-so magical. Technically, winter in Prague starts in December, and goes through January and February, but it’ll probably still feel like winter in early March. And boy is it chilly – temps below freezing are not uncommon (Prague in December hovers around a chilly 0°C to 2°C) so be sure to bundle up! 

Rainfall is at its lowest during Prague in the winter – instead there’s snow (although it typically doesn’t last for too long). And hot damn – when it snows, it’s absolutely beautiful! Just imagine the Old Town Square covered in a fresh dusting of powder.

Also, prepare for a very early sunset (around 4pm – yes, that early!), so plan to wake up early-ish to really take advantage of daylight hours. We find we love these early nights; there’s more time for festive Christmas market hopping and snuggling up in bed!

December in Prague

December in Prague is cold, with average daytime temps ranging between -1°C and 4°C (30°F to 39°F). Snowfall is possible but never guaranteed, especially early in the month. 

But what’s really exciting is that the Prague Christmas markets start in early December (usually the 1st or 2nd weekend). Meaning this is when you wanna visit if you’re headed to Prague in December… always check when the markets open as it changes slightly from year to year. 

Except a super festive city was Christmas trees towering over the squares, festive lights illuminating the streets, and a magical atmosphere filled with the scents of mulled wine and roasted chestnuts. Sounds kinda picture-perfect, but I swear it’s even better in person.

For reference, we spent our 3 days in Prague in late December, and the city was bustling with holiday cheer and beautiful decorations. We actually arrived on Christmas Day, which was all kinds of crazy, haha.

January

In January, the Christmas markets close by the first week (around January 6th; check exact market dates), and temperatures drop even further. Expect average lows around -5°C (23°F) and highs around 2°C (36°F) – meaning you’ll need to bundle up big time! 

Snowfall is way more likely this month, turning the city into a real-life postcard! However, after mid-January, some tour companies and attractions may shut down until March, so it’s important to check in advance if specific tours or experiences are available before you book your trip.

February

February is often the coldest month in Prague, with daily lows dipping all the way down to -7°C (19°F) and highs struggling to rise above freezing, hovering around 0°C (32°F). Snow is more frequent, and many tourist services remain closed. 

This is the perfect time to experience Prague’s quieter side if you’re not bothered by the chilly weather. Museums and indoor attractions are still open, but outdoor activities might be more limited.

March

March is a transition month as the harsh winter begins to ease. Early March still sees cold temperatures, with averages ranging from 0°C to 8°C (32°F to 46°F), but by the end of the month, you may feel the first signs of spring. 

Snow is less likely, and days become slightly longer, but the weather remains unpredictable – so pack for both winter and early spring!

Is it worth visiting Prague in Winter?

I certainly think so! Especially if you’ll be visiting when the Christmas markets are in full swing – I mean, the whole city feels like a Christmas postcard! While the temperatures drop, sometimes below freezing and sometimes bringing snow, it only adds to the cozy atmosphere. 

Plus, iconic sights like Charles Bridge, Old Town Square, and Prague Castle are much less crowded, giving you more space to explore. Just be prepared for shorter days and some attractions or tours closing by mid-January, but overall, winter in Prague offers a beautiful mix of history, charm, and festive cheer. 

What to Pack for Prague in December

Here’s my winter weather recommendations for what to pack for Prague in the winter:

  • Warm Winter Coat: For those frigid winter days, you’ll really wanna invest in an insulated parka. I’ve got my eye on this North Face parka (I currently wear one from 10+ years ago – it’s about time for a new jacket). Looking for one a bit less expensive? This one’s crazy popular on social media, and with the length and sherpa-lined hood, I can totally see why. However note that it’s only water resistant, not waterproof, so not the best choice for those crazy snowy days.
  • Packable Puffer Jacket: I wear this one – it’s lightweight and water resistant, plus comes in a bunch of fun colors and the pockets are super deep (perfect for storing your phone). It packs down to almost nothing in the little included pouch – perfect for travel! 
  • Fleece Zip-Up: On those absolutely frigid days when you need a little something between your sweater and warm winter coat, a fleece zip-up (like this Columbia full-zip) will come in handy. There’s a reason it’s got 45k positive reviews!
  • Base Layers: I’ve been wearing heat tech long sleeve tees ever since I went to Banff in winter a few years back, and they’ve saved me from those frigid temps! They’re super lightweight and perfect to wear under a sweater, and leave you feeling dry and warm without the bulk!
  • Fleece-lined leggings: I used to layer two pairs of regular leggings, but now that fleece-lined leggings are a thing, I only wear those! They’re just as comfy as regular leggings, but keep your legs staying warm and toasty. I’ve worn these pairs a few times and they’ve been great, and come in a bunch of fun colors! If you’re looking for something to wear under jeans or snow pants, these come highly recommended (although too thin to wear on their own; more like a base layer).
  • Chapstick: Cold and dry air make your lips susceptible to chapping super easily. Ugh, the worst! I’m low-key obsessed with this cocoa butter swivel stick – it makes your lips so super soft and it smells a tad like chocolate! My favorite! It also works wonders on dry, chapped skin. You’ll wanna reapply multiple times throughout the day.
  • Power Bank: Batteries die out faster in the cold, so come prepared with a power bank to recharge your stuff on the go. This compact power bank gives up to 10 full charges! I always throw this tiny one in my bag also, just in case, as a backup. My phone is my life-line (especially when traveling solo), so I like to be extra prepared!
  • Warm Gloves: I like to take a few pairs of gloves with me – loving these wool-blend mittens and this pair that’s super lightweight and waterproof (good enough to go skiing in). Trust me, cheapie cotton gloves just ain’t good enough.
  • Waterproof Snow Boots: Gotta keep your feet warm and dry and comfy on the cobblestoned streets! And THESE Sorel waterproof boots are easily the best ones out there – they’re 100% waterproof, seam-sealed, and actually look pretty cute (unlike most snow boots out there). I practically lived in them 2 weeks straight and got zero blisters! Leave the heeled boots at home – you’ll want comfy flat boots for the cobblestoned streets.

How to dress: Wear multiple layers on both top and bottom. You’ll wanna wear your warmest winter coat, and all the winter weather accessories you can think of. We bundled up and were perfectly fine wandering around, but if not, our Christmas trip to Prague would’ve been downright miserable.

Other FAQs about Christmas in Prague 

Winter in Prague vs. Christmas in Prague

Visiting Prague during Christmas and Prague during winter are two VERY different things. Most people think of winter as synonymous with Christmas, but that’s not always the case! 

Winter weather goes well into March, yet the Christmas festivities end in early January. Meaning there’s at least 2.5 months of true winter Prague weather without all the holiday fun. 

Winter in Prague (after the holidays) is the least touristy time of year, which makes sense since it’s pretty dreary and blustery and these months are very dark. Certainly not everyone’s idea of a holiday. 

So with that being said, if you’re looking for Christmas in Prague, make sure to come when the markets are open. 

When exactly is Christmas in Prague?

Sounds like a silly question, but hear me out! Obviously the actual holiday of Christmas is celebrated on Christmas Day, but the festivities continue until the first week of January! 

Unlike other markets, the Christmas markets in Prague stay open until the very beginning of January, so you can soak up that festive magic well into the new year. 

Is Prague crowded at Christmas?

Well… haha. We actually arrived in Prague on Christmas Day, and decided to head to the markets that first night. And what a mistake that was, haha. It was practically impossible to move – so much so that we got stuck in a massive crowd trying to leave! The streets are pretty narrow in some spots, only adding to the congestion of attempting to navigate Old Town. 

With that being said, Prague can certainly get busy during the holiday season – especially around the main Christmas markets. BUT it’s still more manageable compared to summer. Just don’t visit the Prague Christmas markets on Christmas Day like we did, haha. 

Psst – early mornings and weekdays are best for avoiding crowds in Prague in December. Plan to visit the markets early afternoon instead of at night if you don’t wanna brave the crowds later on.

If you’re visiting Prague in winter after the Christmas markets are over and done with, the city will be way less crowded! We loved Christmas in Prague, so I still think it’s worth it to brave the crowds for all the holiday festivities.

How long to spend in Prague in the winter? 

We spent 3 nights and 2 full days in Prague, and felt it was the perfect amount of time. The city is pretty manageable on foot, with lots of popular tourist attractions close together, meaning you can see and do and especially eat a lot in a short period of time. 

Just remember that daylight hours are exceptionally short, so keep that in mind when planning your days! We could have easily filled up another day, but wanted to head to Cesky Krumlov for a few nights as well.

Where to Stay in Prague at Christmas

First time in Prague? Definitely stay near the Old Town Square in Old Town (Staré Město) – we loved being a few minutes walk from the Prague Christmas markets and festive fairytale buildings. And of course all the cinnamony chimney cakes and pilsner pub hopping, haha. You can also consider staying in the Lesser Town (Malá Strana), close to Prague Castle. 

Note that Christmas in Prague is a super popular time to visit, so hotels in Old Town book up fast. Because of that, I highly recommend booking your accommodations as soon as you know your exact travel dates. 

For reference, we stayed at the GORGEOUS Hotel Maximilian, and thoroughly enjoyed our stay. Not only was the hotel super decked out for Christmas (with the most delicious hot chocolate bar in the lobby), but the service was impeccable and we even got a bottle of wine upon arrival. 

Plus, it’s only a minute from Lokal – a popular Czech Restaurant with the most delicious beef goulash and fried cheese. Easily the best hotel we stayed at during our 2.5 week winter Euro trip. 

Other hotels in Old Town we considered were: The Mozart Prague (a gorgeous family-owned boutique hotel right on the Vltava River next to Charles Bridge), Ventana Hotel Prague (the interiors are just stunning), Hotel BoHo (a small luxury hotel), Josephine Old Town Square Hotel, and Hotel Allure Prague.

What to do on Christmas Day in Prague

As suspected, like most major cities, a lot of stuff is understandably closed on Christmas Day itself. BUT there’s certainly enough to keep you busy and well-fed.

A few things to note:

  • Public Transport on Christmas Day: Public transportation (including trams and buses) usually run on a holiday schedule (find more info on the official website). I’d recommend using your own two feet if you can to get around today.
  • Is everything closed on Christmas? On Christmas Day, many shops, restaurants, and attractions are closed or have reduced hours. Definitely check opening times for any places you want to visit. BUT don’t fret – there’s actually a decent amount open (so no reason not to spend actual Christmas Day in Prague).
  • Christmas Markets Are Open! The Christmas markets in Prague (including Old Town Square and Wenceslas Square) remain open on Christmas Day. Hallelujah! But just remember, since most restaurants are closed, the markets will likely be completely packed. 

Here’s a good plan for Christmas Day in Prague: 

  • Sunrise at Charles Bridge 
  • Prague Castle (will be extremely busy – come early)
  • John Lennon Wall
  • Walk along Vltava River
  • Climb the Prague castle stairs
  • Lunch at Old Town Christmas markets 
  • Astronomical Clock and wander Old Town Prague
  • Climb towers for spectacular views (although check for reduced hours)
  • Dinner at Wenceslas Square Christmas Markets

Things to do during Christmas in Prague

Just because it’s chilly (err, ok freezing, haha), doesn’t mean there’s nothing to do! I was surprised by just how much there was to do in Prague in December – we didn’t even get to everything on my original to-do list!

To be completely honest, we primarily came to Prague in winter for the famous Prague Christmas markets, but were blown away by everything else the city had to offer. With that being said, remember – if you’re visiting after January 6, don’t expect any Christmas cheer!

Stroll the Prague Christmas Markets

Of course the #1 thing to do in Prague in December is to head to the famous Christmas markets! Especially the ones in Old Town Square and Wenceslas Square.

As noted above, we had our first taste of European Christmas markets in Prague, and wow – they blew us away. So much food and festive fun, with tons of mulled wine, gingerbread, and handmade ornaments. And crowds, haha.

I can now happily say that wandering the Prague Christmas markets are by far the best things to do in Prague in December! To say we LOVED them is a massive understatement. 

Must be because Prague’s Old Town Square market is one of the largest in the Czech Republic! Yea, it’s touristy and a bit on the pricier side, but you absolutely need to go! Why?! Because there’s over 100 charming wooden stalls – all overflowing with handcrafted gifts, ornaments, and traditional Czech treats. We loved wandering around and of course eating as much as we could physically handle, haha. Hunks of the famous Old Prague Ham and sweet cinnamony trdelník were our favorites!

But it’s not just the size that steals the show; it’s the jaw-dropping backdrop. Imagine this: the medieval Astronomical Clock ticking away in all its historical glory, the fantastically spiky towers of the Church of Our Lady Before Týn standing guard, and the wedding-cake-esque baroque buildings filling in the gaps. Top it all off with Prague’s tallest Christmas tree, and you’ve got a scene that’s straight out of a fairytale.

Don’t miss climbing the stairs to a small viewing platform to get a better view. It was beyond packed when we went up at night, but super calm the next morning, haha. It all depends when you go!

There’s a few Christmas markets in Prague: 

  • Old Town Square: largest and most popular, open until Jan 6
  • Wenceslas Square: the other main Christmas market in Prague, open until Jan 6
  • Prague Castle Christmas Market: Unfortunately they were canceled when I visited; not sure if this is a permanent closure or if they’ll be back up again in the future. 
  • Republic Square: in front of the Palladium shopping center, closes Dec 30
  • Peace Square (Náměstí Míru) and Tyl Square (Tylovo náměstí): much less touristy and aimed at locals, closes Christmas Eve

For reference, the markets typically start the last week in November/first week of December (whenever the Saturday of the first advent is) and end in early January, typically on the 6th (Three Kings Day). 

And unlike other markets in Europe, they’re open everyday – including Christmas Eve, Christmas Day, New Years Eve, and New Years Day. The markets are typically open 10am to 10pm; although some stalls stay open until midnight! 

The markets are much calmer during the day, but I highly recommend visiting both day and night! They’re very different experiences, just expect to wait in line for most food and drinks as the night goes on. And if you visit on the days surrounding Christmas, expect it to be absolutely mobbed at night – trust me on this one, haha.

To be honest, there was mostly food at the markets, but we did find some traditional Czech crafts like glass ornaments, wooden toys, and embroidered textiles.

The Christmas markets in Prague date back to the 15th century, making them one of the oldest traditions in the city. The market in the Old Town Square has been a festive gathering spot for hundreds of years. So definitely include this on your Prague Christmas itinerary!

What to try at the Christmas markets in Prague:

There’s one rule you can’t forget — always go to a Christmas market hungry! It’d be a shame to miss out on all the delicious Czech treats. Here’s a few to look out for:

  • Trdelníks (chimney cakes): a sweet pastry cooked over an open flame and dusted with sugar and cinnamon. While not originally Czech, it’s super common here and you’ll find them all over the city.
  • Langos: deep fried slabs of dough with cheese and garlic
  • Roasted hazelnuts and chestnuts 
  • Svarak: mulled wine stiffened with plum brandy or rum that makes it a bit more citrusy and less sweet than others
  • punč (punch): a drink made of alcohol, sugar, lemon and spices
  • hot apple juice with cinnamon (my new favorite!)
  • Klobasa grilled sausages
  • Mini pancakes
  • Hunks of the famous Old Prague Ham
  • soft gingerbread cookies (perníčky)

Explore the Prague Castle Complex

Prague Castle is one of the most iconic landmarks in all of Prague, and thankfully, it’s open in winter (unlike the castle interior in Cesky Krumlov).

And Prague Castle isn’t just a single building; it’s a vast complex full of history, culture, and stunning architecture. You could easily spend a full day exploring its many courtyards, hidden nooks, and expansive gardens – there’s just so much to see. We got here early before the crowds and managed to see what we wanted in a mere 2 hours or so. Buy a ticket in advance if you wanna skip the long lines.

Prague Castle is the largest ancient castle complex in the world, and it’s every bit as impressive as you’d imagine. Dating back to the 9th century, it’s been the seat of Czech kings, emperors, and presidents throughout history. The castle itself is a mix of Gothic, Romanesque, and Baroque styles, reflecting the many centuries it has stood as a symbol of power.  

And there’s lots to see – I highly recommend booking a guided tour with a local if you’re truly interested in all the complex has to offer.

Not to miss within the castle complex:

  • St. Vitus Cathedral: Easily the crown jewel within the castle grounds, and by far the most crowded! This Gothic masterpiece boasts stunning stained glass windows, intricate spires, and breathtaking architecture. It’s the largest and most important church in the Czech Republic, home to the tombs of Bohemian kings and Holy Roman Emperors – and took a whopping 600 years to build. Don’t miss the stained glass designed by Alfons Mucha – it’s absolutely gorgeous.
  • Golden Lane: A charming, narrow street lined with colorful, tiny houses, originally built in the 16th century to house castle guards, craftsmen, and alchemists. Franz Kafka briefly lived at No. 22 – peek inside to see antiques that depict what life was like back then. Golden Lane’s got a whimsical, storybook-like vibe, and we loved strolling this cobblestoned street.
  • St. George’s Basilica: One of the oldest and best-preserved buildings in the complex, St. George’s Basilica is a Romanesque beauty dating back to the 10th century. Its stark red façade stands out among the Gothic structures, and it’s known for its simple, austere interior – a contrast to the grandeur of St. Vitus Cathedral. It even hosts classical concerts since its acoustics are so incredible.
  • Old Royal Palace: The Old Royal Palace is where Czech rulers lived for centuries. The highlight is Vladislav Hall, an enormous hall once used for jousting tournaments and coronations. It’s famous for its unique late Gothic vaulting and grand size, one of the largest halls in medieval Europe. You’ll also find the Bohemian Chancellery, the site of the famous 1618 Defenestration of Prague, which ignited the Thirty Years’ War!

Besides the actual castle buildings, I found the views from the castle grounds to be just as  spectacular – I mean the castle towers over the city on a hilltop, so that’s to be expected I guess! I loved the sweeping panoramas of Prague’s red rooftops, the winding Vltava River, and all the way to Old Town Square. So incredibly gorgeous!

And if you’re lucky, you’ll catch the Christmas markets here at the castle! I was super bummed to find out they were canceled when I visited – something about a contract not getting extended. But hopefully they’re up and running in the future!

Psst – be sure to check the castle hours before heading over, as winter hours (November 1 to March 31) are a bit more limited than other times of year. For reference, on my visit, the castle grounds were open from 6am to 10pm, while the buildings were open from 9am to 4pm (with the last entrance around 3:30pm or so). Sadly the gardens are closed in the winter, but you can still explore the rest of the castle complex.

Climb the Prague Castle Stairs (Zamecke Schody)

If you wanna take the scenic route to the Prague Castle (yes, please!), climb up Zamecke Schody, otherwise known as the Prague Castle Stairs. The view is BREATHTAKING from the top of the steps. Safe to say we got an early-morning workout! The views are even better with a dusting of snow (which we sadly did not get, haha).

Stroll around Charming Old Town Square

Old Town is the city’s original medieval settlement. Spend a morning meandering down the cobblestone streets, admiring the Renaissance-style facades and gothic spires, stepping into one (of many!) Czech pubs or cafes, and gazing out onto the terracotta rooftops from the Old Town Hall Tower.

The main highlight of Old Town is easily Old Town Square (Staroměstské náměstí), a bustling hub surrounded by stunning buildings like the Gothic Church of Our Lady before Týn and the Baroque St. Nicholas Church. And yes, this is where the famous Prague Christmas markets are held! 

A few things you won’t wanna miss in Old Town (besides stuffing your face with everything imaginable at the markets, haha):

Prague Astronomical Clock: This is one of the oldest astronomical clocks in the world (built in 1410) and the world’s most famous Medieval clock. There’s even an hourly show (from 9am to 11pm on the hour) featuring animated apostles and other figurines – while impressive, I wouldn’t hang around waiting for it for more than 10 minutes or so.

Church of Our Lady Before Tyn: This striking Gothic church dominates Old Town Square with its two massive spires. And it’s easily one of the most impressive Gothic religious buildings in all of Prague, built from the mid-14th to the early 16th centuries. 

I have to admit we only admired the church from the outside, but I heard it boasts impressive altars and sculptures inside.

Kolacherie: Whatever you do, don’t leave Stare Mesto without trying some traditional Czech kolache pastries! And Kolacherie definitely has the best pastries in town (even locals come here so you know it’s good). 

We tried two – a poppy seed pastry and a blueberry cream cheese pastry with crumble, and both were absolutely delicious. There’s also plenty of vegan options as well. 

Guided Walking Tour: If you’d rather not miss anything and want an insider’s look at Prague and its complex history, take a guided walking tour of Old Town! While we had a great time wandering around (and soaking up the atmosphere), I admit we didn’t really learn too much, and would have preferred to explore with a knowledgeable local guide. 

I mean, the whole area’s brimming with history and stunning architecture – hard to really appreciate if you’re not familiar with the backstory and significance of each landmark.

Climb up Old Town Hall Tower

There’s plenty of towers to climb in Prague (just like in Florence, Italy), but the Old Town Hall Tower was a non-negotiable for me. The 360-degree views of Prague are some of the best in the city, with red rooftops, Gothic spires, colorful houses, and Baroque towers. Plus, you get to see the square with the Christmas markets!

You’ll need to climb up a whole bunch of steps for this view, but I promise you it’s worth it! Psst – go early to beat the crowds and long lines. Also, it’s the only medieval tower in Prague that’s completely wheelchair accessible, so keep that in mind if you’re unable to climb steps. 

We decided to go first thing in the morning, but if I knew, I’d have totally gone at night to see the markets all lit up from above. Something I’m still kicking myself about, but oh well… next time for me if I ever make it back to Prague for Christmas!

Indulge in Some Hearty Czech Cuisine

Czech food is practically made for winter weather (it’s very hearty and rich and filling). Most meals consist of lots of meat and carbs, which is perfect for warming up! Think rich, hearty stews and soups, roast pork, deep-fried cheese, and filled dumplings. Delicious!

Common things you’ll see on a menu at a traditional Czech restaurant:

  • Fried Cheese (Smažený Sýr): Breaded and deep-fried cheese, and OMG it’s SO good
  • Marinated Beef (Svíčová): Marinated beef tenderloin cooked in a creamy vegetable sauce, served with bread dumplings (knedlíky).
  • Goulash (Guláš): Hearty beef stew cooked with onions and paprika, usually served with bread dumplings or bread.
  • Roast Pork with Sauerkraut (Vepřo knedlo zelo): Slow-roasted pork served with tangy sauerkraut and fluffy bread dumplings.
  • Dumplings (Knedlíky): Steamed or boiled bread dumplings that come on the side of many Czech dishes.
  • Czech Beer (Pilsner, Czechvar): famous brands like Pilsner Urquell and Budweiser Budvar are found everywhere in Prague, and EVERYONE drinks tons of it, haha
  • Chimney Cake (Trdelník): A sweet cinnamon pastry that’s been baked over charcoal, often filled with cream or chocolate.
  • Kolaches (Koláče): Soft pastries filled with fruit preserves, sweet cheese, or poppy seeds.
  • Czech Crepes (Palačinky): Thin crepes filled with sweet or savory ingredients, such as fruit, Nutella, or cheese.

Besides the Prague Christmas markets (which we admittedly ate a few meals at), we loved the beer and fried cheese at Lokal (a local favorite pub with a few locations around the city) and goulash with potato dumplings at Mincovna (perfect for a chilly night during Prague in winter).

If you wanna learn all about traditional Czech food (with some sightseeing and history sprinkled in as well), consider signing up for a Prague Street Food Tour! I love taking food tours when I travel, and this one seems right up my alley – lots of foods to try and generous samples! 

Cruise down the Vltava River 

Your feet are probably tired from wandering around all the charming streets, so a relaxing boat ride on the Vltava River is the perfect activity! Winter in Prague is downright freezing, so sitting on the boat for a while was exactly what we needed. Don’t worry, we sat indoors and the boat was heated! Plus we loved getting a different perspective of the city.

You can book your tickets online in advance (what we did!) or at ticket stands near the riverbank. Most cruises depart from docks near the Charles Bridge, like Křižovnické náměstí or Dvořák Embankment.

And there’s lots of different options, from short 45-minute sightseeing cruises to 2-3 hour dinner cruises with meals and live music. We opted for the shorter canal cruise since it was chilly AF out and we didn’t know how warm it’d be on the river (spoiler alert – we were warm and cozy). But if you’re braver than we are, definitely consider a longer evening cruise (the city all illuminated at night is gorgeous)! 

This is the exact tour we booked – and we explored the waterways of old Prague while listening to an audio commentary on a lovely little canal boat. We were given some mulled wine and some gingerbread to snack on, which is always appreciated!

Climb Up More Towers in Prague

No shortage of views here in Prague, I promise! And there’s quite a few towers to head up if you wanna see more of those spectacular vistas yourself! 

  • Old Town Bridge Tower: If you wanna get an up-close perspective of Charles Bridge – and all the people on it, haha, climb up Old Town Bridge Tower (different from the Old Town Hall Tower). We were also able to see the historic buildings of Old Town and Prague Castle in the distance. The tower isn’t far from Old Town, and we were surprised it wasn’t too crowded despite the bridge being completely overrun with tourists. Note that just like the other tower on the bridge, you need to climb up 138 steps and there’s no elevator.
  • Lesser Town Bridge Tower: Located on the other side of the Charles Bridge (in Lesser Town – what the name implies, haha), it has a great view of the bridge, the flowing Vltava River, and the surrounding Lesser Town district. To reach the observation area, you’ll need to climb 138 steps up a spiral staircase to the viewing platform, but the panoramic vistas of the Gothic bridge architecture and the bustling river below make it well worth the effort.
  • Petřín Lookout Tower: Petrin Tower on Petrin Hill offers expansive views of Prague’s cityscape, including landmarks such as Prague Castle and the Vltava River. Yes, there’s more stairs, but you can entirely skip the climb and take a funicular to the base of the hill and then an elevator to the top of the tower! Perfect if your legs are dead tired from walking around Prague in the winter all day, haha. Buy your lookout tower entrance ticket here.

Watch Sunrise at Charles Bridge

Charles Bridge is one of Prague’s most iconic landmarks, an ancient stone bridge connecting Old Town with the Lesser Town, spanning the Vltava River. It’s got stunning views of not only the river, but Prague Castle and the city’s Gothic and Baroque architecture. And because of that, it’s typically beyond FILLED with tourists. Like, filled to the brim, unable to walk, stepping all over the street musicians kinda busy.

Don’t hate me, but if you wanna experience Charles Bridge without the hordes of tourists, you really gotta come early. And by that I mean at sunrise. Yes, sunrise, haha.

But thankfully, sunrise is way later in Prague in December (a little before 8am or so), so you don’t have to wake up as early compared to visiting in summer! And bonus – winter in Prague is way less crowded overall. 

We got an early start and walked over from our hotel in Old Town to the iconic Charles Bridge before all the crowds arrived. And it was such a magical morning – super serene and the colors were perfect for photos. I LOVED the golden glow over the cobblestones and baroque statues, and how the early morning light softened the entire cityscape.

You definitely won’t be completely alone (I was surprised how many people were out for sunrise), but when we walked back over a few hours later, it was beyond packed (as evidenced by photos from the bridge tower).

Come later in the day and it’ll be hard to walk across without bumping into everyone – the bridge is filled with hordes of tourists, street musicians, and people selling art and souvenirs.

Admire the Strahov Library

If you’re looking for a cozy indoor activity during winter in Prague, the Strahov Library is a must-visit. Especially those fascinated by beautiful interiors and historical libraries like myself!

Just outside Malá Strana, this gorgeous library houses over 6,000 rare books dating back to the 10th century. The grand rooms are a sight to behold, especially the one filled with fascinating globes and maps (my personal favorite!). But the true highlights are the breathtaking Philosophical Hall and Theological Hall – both absolutely stunning and sure to leave you in awe.

To be honest, the Strahov Library has *very* mixed reviews since you can’t actually enter the library rooms (only view them from a roped-off entrance) unless you take a tour (which you need to book a few weeks/months in advance). I kind of liked this setup because it meant I could snap photos without crowds getting in the way, haha. But I understand why it feels a bit underwhelming to some people. I still found the rooms to be historically significant and stunning!

Psst – you need to buy a ticket to enter, and you need to buy your ticket from the Strahov Monastery (about 75m away) – there’s no ticket booth at the Strahov Library itself.

Cozy up in Cute Cafes 

Prague in winter is the perfect time to warm up in one of its charming cafes. From rich pastries to warm coffee, these two spots are the perfect place to take a break and soak in the city’s atmosphere (and both are famous and super popular so surely expect a line!).

  • Cafe Savoy: Take a break and have a coffee and/or a late brunch at this elegant cafe. It’s apparently the place to be – so be prepared to wait in line! We were impatient and decided not to wait, haha. If you want something sweet, try a vetrnik – a vanilla cream choux pastry sandwich that’s said to be the best pastry in Prague! I also heard that the strawberry and apricot-filled dumplings are fantastic. 
  • Cafe Louvre: Cafe Louvre is another elegant 100-year-old cafe that’s been an iconic part of the city’s cultural scene since it opened back in 1902. It’s been said as one of the most beautiful cafes in all of Prague, and with its classic Art Nouveau interior, high ceilings, ornate detailing, large windows, and timeless charm, I can totally see why! Go for lunch – you don’t need a reservation then!

Take Pictures at the John Lennon Wall

Head over to the Lennon Wall, a vibrant and ever-evolving mural dedicated to John Lennon and the ideals of peace. This wall is a canvas for colorful graffiti and street art, constantly changing as new messages and artwork are added.

Spray painting isn’t allowed anymore, so if you really feel the need to leave messages, make sure they’re in chalk or pencil. It’s a lively tribute to the Beatles and a beacon of freedom and love in the heart of Prague. And I loved just how colorful it really was!

Warm up at a Medieval Dinner

Looking for a unique dinner experience?! How about stepping back into the Middle Ages – complete with hearty traditional food and lively entertainment! 

Jokes aside, a medieval dinner is one of the most popular dining experiences in Prague, and it’s a fun way to dive into the city’s history. The place is dark and cozy, filled with candles, wooden beams, and iron-wrought chandeliers. Such a vibe!

U Pavouka is one of the best places to go for it. Held in a 13th-century tavern, you’re given a multi-course feast featuring medieval-style dishes like roasted meats (that that fall-off-the-bone tenderness, oh wow!), dumplings, and hearty soups. Plus UNLIMITED beer and wine. Safe to say we didn’t go hungry.

As you’re enjoying your food, there’s all the entertainment to watch. An immersive mix of live music, fire shows, sword fighting, belly dancing, and even duels between knights. We were astounded at how dedicated the performers were, all dressed in period costumes I might add, only adding to the authentic atmosphere. 

I admit it was a bit cheesy, but the show was pretty impressive and the portions were HUGE. I couldn’t finish my meal and still left stuffed! Definitely worth the experience if you’re in the mood for some old-school fun.

Admire the Dancing House 

This is one of the most iconic modern buildings in Prague, and I’m almost positive you’ve seen a photo of it before. Designed by architects Vlado Milunić and Frank Gehry (who also created the Guggenheim Museum in Bilbao), the building is known for its unique, twisting design, making it a striking contrast to Prague’s historic architecture. 

The rooftop terrace has fantastic views of the city, but we simply admired the quirky building from afar (across the street near Jiráskovo Square is the best spot to view it). What a modern architectural marvel it is – and so different from anything I’ve ever seen before!

Other things to do in Prague in the winter 

  • Franz Kafka Rotating Head: A quirky piece of art by David Černý that’s a 42-layer stainless steel sculpture of Kafka’s head, with each layer spinning independently to create a constantly shifting visual effect. It was unfortunately under construction when we visited Prague in December, but when it’s up and running, it’s a must-see (as I heard it’s super mesmerizing)!
  • Stroll around the Jewish Quarter: Also called Josefov (named after the emperor Joseph II), this is a historic area with a deep heritage that stretches back centuries, and it offers a fascinating glimpse into the city’s Jewish history and culture. And there’s lots to see here – The Jewish Museum, Old Jewish Cemetery, and plenty of synagogues. I highly recommend taking a guided tour to gain deeper insights into the history and significance of this area. 
  • Lego Museum: If you’re super into Legos, this is a great spot to warm up for a bit! While we didn’t wanna pay the entrance fee (we aren’t big enough fans, haha), I found the Santa built entirely by legos pretty cool at the front of the shop!

Hope that helps you plan your trip to Prague in December! Are the Prague Christmas markets on your bucket list?!

The post Christmas in Prague: Festive Things to do in Prague in the Winter appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/christmas-in-prague/feed/ 0
3 Days in Prague: The Perfect Long Weekend in Prague Itinerary https://apassionandapassport.com/3-days-in-prague-itinerary/ https://apassionandapassport.com/3-days-in-prague-itinerary/#respond Sun, 15 Sep 2024 08:07:16 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=31188 Headed to the Czech Republic and looking to spend 3 days in Prague? Keep on reading – this Prague itinerary is exactly what you’re looking for. Full of all my favorite viewpoints, local foods to try (kolaches, anyone?!), and of course all the fun things to include on a perfect 3 day Prague itinerary! PragueContinue Reading

The post 3 Days in Prague: The Perfect Long Weekend in Prague Itinerary appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Headed to the Czech Republic and looking to spend 3 days in Prague? Keep on reading – this Prague itinerary is exactly what you’re looking for. Full of all my favorite viewpoints, local foods to try (kolaches, anyone?!), and of course all the fun things to include on a perfect 3 day Prague itinerary!

Prague is a stunningly beautiful European capital home to medieval architecture, the iconic Charles Bridge, and a vibrant cultural scene that includes everything from classic opera to modern art galleries. Plus, there’s the charming Old Town Square, delicious traditional Czech food, and some of the best beers on the planet. It’s the largest city in the Czech Republic and the historical capital of Bohemia. Get ready for the ultimate 3 days in Prague!

Imagine stunning sunrises on the Charles Bridge. Miles of cobblestone streets and grand green spaces. Soaring cathedrals and ancestral city squares. Fairytale architecture with a beautiful river meandering right through the center. This eclectic Czech capital really has it all. There’s a reason it’s known as one of the most beautiful Eastern European cities!

I first visited Prague about 10 years ago – as a bright-eyed 20-something and way before I was an experienced traveler. I arrived in Prague with little to no plans; my new friends and I feasted on trdelnik, partied the nights away at Karlovy Lazne (one of Europe’s largest nightclubs), and crossed the historic Charles Bridge a few times with hundreds of other tourists. Sure, it was fun, but I didn’t really get the proper Prague experience (or I did, depending who you ask, haha).

So on my next visit, I actually did a fair amount of planning, and saw oh so much during my 3 days in Prague! 

So let’s get to it – the most perfect 3 day Prague itinerary coming right up! But first, some important logistics!

3 Days in Prague Itinerary Logistics

3 Days in Prague At-A-Glance

Where is Prague 

Let’s start with the basics! Prague is in the Czech Republic, a landlocked country in Central Europe (bordered by Germany to the west, Poland to the north, Austria to the south, and Slovakia to the east). The city is situated in the Bohemian region along the stunning Vltava River, which is in the western part of the country. 

It’s actually the furthest east I’ve been in Europe, but I’m dying to get to Budapest, so hopefully that changes soon!

Distance from Closest Major Cities:

  • Vienna, Austria: ~300 kilometers (190 miles)
  • Berlin, Germany: ~350 kilometers (220 miles)
  • Wroclaw, Poland: ~330 kilometers (205 miles)
  • Bratislava, Slovakia: ~330 kilometers (205 miles)
  • Budapest, Hungary: ~530 kilometers (330 miles)

How to Get to Prague 

Can’t wait for your 3 days in Prague?! Thankfully, the city is relatively easy to get to. You’ll find options by plane, train, and car.

Flying to Prague

Yes, Prague has its very own modern international airport! Visitors will wanna fly into Václav Havel Airport Prague (previously Prague Ruzyne Airport) – airport code PRG. And thankfully, there’s even nonstop flights from the United States, namely JFK and EWR in New York City and ORD in Chicago. Coming from elsewhere in the states? You’ll most likely need to take a connecting flight.

Václav Havel Airport Prague is well-connected to major cities across Europe, and you can find plenty of nonstop flights to Prague. Since we were already in Europe, we flew from London straight to Prague in less than 2 hours. 

Getting to Prague from the Airport

The airport is located about 10 kilometers (6 miles) west of the city center. Not too far, but you definitely can’t walk!

Since there’s no metro station at the Prague Airport, if you wanna get into the city by public transit, you’ll need to take a bus to the metro. You can either take Bus 59 to Nádraží Veleslavín metro station (line A) or Bus 100 to Zlicin metro station (line B) and then change to the metro.

OR you can simply take a rideshare like we did – both Uber and Bolt are widespread in Prague and shouldn’t cost more than $20 USD. And there’s always a shared shuttle transfer if you’d rather book it beforehand.

Driving to Prague

Planning a road trip through Central Europe? You can certainly drive to Prague! The city is well-connected (with many major highways nearby), meaning it’s easily accessible from neighboring countries like Germany, Austria, Poland, and Slovakia.

However – driving within Prague itself can be challenging! Get ready for lots of narrow streets, many one-way roads, and heavy traffic, especially during peak hours. Parking can be particularly tricky and expensive, with limited spaces available in the city center. 

If you are in fact arriving to Prague by car, don’t fret – I promise you’re not doomed. Plan to park your car in a designated lot or garage for the duration of your stay or, even better, find a hotel with private parking! Just don’t plan to use your car during your 3 days in Prague at all (and if you follow my Prague itinerary, you won’t need it anyways).

Train or Bus to Prague

Traveling to Prague by train or bus is a convenient and scenic option from various European cities. You’ll most likely arrive at Praha hlavní nádraží, Prague’s main train station, which is only a 15 minute walk to Old Town (and 5 to Wenceslas Square). Or you can take metro line C, the tram, or a bus to your hotel.

FlixBus is also popular for getting to Prague from a myriad of spots in Central Europe. You’ll arrive in Florenc station, Prague’s main bus station, and a ~15 minute walk to the city center. We actually hopped on a FlixBus after our 3 days in Prague since we spent a few nights in Cesky Krumlov afterwards.

How to Get around Prague 

Walk

Prague is a walking city; you’ll 100% wanna wear comfy shoes (leave those heels at home)! Most of the main highlights can be seen on foot and walking between them. Just be prepared for lots and lots of walking – I’m pretty sure we got ~20k steps each and every day!

Prague Old Car Tour

Looking for a nostalgic and charming way to see the city?! Book an Old Car Tour of Prague (perfect for when it’s chilly out or your feet hurt)! You’ll get to ride in a classic vehicle like vintage cars, Trabants, or even historic Tatra cars. It’s a great way to see Prague’s historic districts, including unique perspectives of landmarks and neighborhoods that might not be as easily accessible on foot.

Public Transit

If your feet are tired, thankfully Prague has an excellent public transit system, operated by Dopravní podnik hlavního města Prahy (DP). There’s the metro, buses, and even historical trams; they’re all pretty cheap and efficient, so no reason not to use them!

The metro system has three lines covering major areas of the city (the fastest and easiest way to get around), while buses and trams fill in the gaps. The trams, in particular, are a charming way to see the city, reminiscent of the historic trams found in cities like Budapest. 

You’ll probably use the Line A metro (the green line) or tram lines 22 or 23, as these routes cover the primary tourist areas in the city. Whatever you do, make sure you validate your ticket before boarding by stamping it at the yellow machines. You don’t wanna get stuck with a pesky fine!

For transparency’s sake, I didn’t use public transit even once during my 3 days in Prague. I just didn’t need it — we got by with walking and calling the occasional rideshare.

There’s also a Hop-On Hop-Off Bus in Prague like you’ll find in other cities, and this one even includes a river cruise!

Ride Shares

You can also use ride-shares to get around Prague. Although Uber is available, its coverage may be limited. I suggest downloading Bolt, which operates in the same way and offers more extensive service. Perfect if you have luggage or need to travel late at night when public transport is less frequent.

Where to Stay in Prague

I highly recommend first-time visitors to stay near either the Old Town (Staré Město) or the Lesser Town (Malá Strana), close to Prague Castle. This way you’re within walking distance to most of the city’s main attractions, perfect for this weekend in Prague itinerary.

Plus, the city’s probably way less expensive than you’re used to in Europe. Meaning you can get great luxury hotels at a (way-more) affordable price. 

Psst – visiting in summer? Make sure your hotel has air conditioning; not all do!

Old Town (Staré Město)

Old Town is the city’s original medieval settlement. And by staying in the historic heart of Prague, you’ll be oh so close to the iconic Astronomical Clock, Old Town Square, and the vibrant atmosphere of Prague’s medieval streets. Sure, it’s the most touristy area in the city, but you’ll get the quintessential Prague experience. Old Town is super central with lots of restaurants, shops, and cultural sites. 

We stayed at the GORGEOUS Hotel Maximilian, and thoroughly enjoyed our stay. Not only was the decor super chic, but the service was impeccable and we even got a bottle of wine upon arrival. Plus, it’s only a minute from Lokal – a popular Czech Restaurant with the most delicious beef goulash and fried cheese. Easily the best hotel we stayed at during our 2.5 week winter Euro trip.

Other hotels we considered were: The Mozart Prague (a gorgeous family-owned boutique hotel right on the Vltava River next to Charles Bridge), Ventana Hotel Prague (the interiors are just stunning), Hotel BoHo (a small luxury hotel), Josephine Old Town Square Hotel, and Hotel Allure Prague.

Lesser Town (Malá Strana)

Lesser Town is on the other side of the river across the Charles Bridge, and it’s another charming area known for its picturesque steep streets, historic Baroque architecture, regal gardens, and proximity to Prague Castle. It’s definitely quieter than Old Town and a bit less expensive, which is perfect if you’re trying to visit Prague on a budget.

I’ve heard good things about Aria Hotel Prague, Alchymist Prague Castle Suites, and Archibald at The Charles Bridge.

When to Plan your 3 Day Prague Itinerary (Weather and Crowds)

Prague experiences four seasons, each with its own distinct flair. Summer brings crowds and warmth, while winter offers a cozy, snowy charm. The shoulder seasons of spring and fall are generally the best times to visit, as the weather is still pretty good and there’s less tourists.

But I’ve been to Prague twice — once in the heat of summer and the other in the dead of winter, haha. And I had fun both times! They’re obviously very different experiences and all have their pros and cons, but I found the Christmas holiday season in Prague to be oh so festive and charming! Plus, CHRISTMAS MARKETS!

Spring (March to May)

Spring in Prague is like a breath of fresh air. Temps range from 5°C to 15°C (41°F to 59°F), so layering is key – it’s typically chilly in the morning and then warms up throughout the day. Expect lots of blooming flowers, vibrant outdoor cafes, and fewer tourists. Also, some festivals, like Prague Food Festival (May) and Prague Spring International Music Festival (May-June).

Summer (June to August)

Summer is peak tourist mode, so expect some (okay fine, lots of) hustle and bustle, but also long, sunny days ideal for exploring. 

It’s festival season in Prague, and there’s tons going on! Including the United Islands of Prague (June), Prague International Jazz Festival (June), Letní Letná (August), Prague Fringe Festival (May-June), and Prague Shakespeare Company’s Summer Performances (June-August).

Personally, I’d avoid summer if you can. Crowds can be unbearable and so can those intolerable heat waves (temps in the mid-30’s are pretty common). BUT the city just shines in summer – no wonder everyone wants to visit now! 

Note that summer is statistically the wettest season in Prague, but this shouldn’t ruin your trip if you’re visiting Prague for 3 days or so. 

Fall (September to November)

Early fall is still pretty mild, and as the season progresses, the city gets a chic autumn makeover with stunning foliage. It’s a fab time for scenic walks, coffee dates, and avoiding the summer rush. 

Winter (December to February)

Winter in Prague is straight-up magical (if you can handle the chilly temps – which typically drop to -5°C to 5°C/23°F to 41°F) with a chance of snow. A true storybook winter wonderland!

For reference, we spent Christmas in Prague, and it was the perfect way to spend the holidays! We stuffed our faces at the Christmas markets and sipped mulled wine while admiring the festive lights — my kinda cozy! Although I will admit we were pretty freezing at night, haha. Be sure to bundle up!

Additional Prague Itinerary FAQs

Currency: Like elsewhere in the Czech Republic, Prague uses the Czech Koruna (CZK), aka Czech crown. As of August 2024, 1 US Dollar = ~23 Czech Koruna (we simplified it a bit to make conversions in our head easier, and used 100 CZK as ~$4). 

Prague is a pretty affordable trip compared to other European capitals, but it’s not as cheap as it once was. Also, note that it’s typical to tip around 10% at restaurants.

Language: The official language in Prague is Czech. Most people working in the tourism industry speak a decent amount of English so you shouldn’t have any language barriers, but it’s always appreciated if you make an effort to speak the local language a bit! 

Start with “Dobrý den” (Good day) and “Děkuji” (Thank you).

What to eat in Prague: 

  • Fried Cheese (Smažený Sýr): Breaded and deep-fried cheese, often served with tartar sauce and fries or salad.
  • Marinated Beef (Svíčová): Marinated beef tenderloin cooked in a creamy vegetable sauce, served with bread dumplings (knedlíky).
  • Goulash (Guláš): Hearty beef stew cooked with onions and paprika, usually served with bread dumplings or bread.
  • Roast Pork with Sauerkraut (Vepřo knedlo zelo): Slow-roasted pork served with tangy sauerkraut and fluffy bread dumplings.
  • Dumplings (Knedlíky): Steamed or boiled bread dumplings that accompany many Czech dishes.
  • Czech Beer (Pilsner, Czechvar): famous brands like Pilsner Urquell and Budweiser Budvar are found everywhere in Prague, and EVERYONE drinks tons of it, haha
  • Chimney Cake (Trdelník): Sweet, cylindrical pastry coated in sugar and cinnamon, often filled with cream or chocolate.
  • Kolaches (Koláče): Soft pastries filled with fruit preserves, sweet cheese, or poppy seeds.
  • Czech Crepes (Palačinky): Thin crepes filled with sweet or savory ingredients, such as fruit, Nutella, or cheese.

Are 3 Days in Prague Enough? I totally think so! The city is pretty compact, and you can actually see all the main highlights in just two days, including climbing a few towers for amazing views, cruising down the Vltava River, and indulging in an over-the-top medieval dinner.

But I highly recommend adding a third day to your Prague itinerary so you can tack on a day trip to the fairytale town of Cesky Krumlov!

Should you get the Prague CoolPass? The Prague CoolPass has a range of benefits including free or discounted entry to various attractions, guided tours, and even public transportation options. It really depends which activities you wanna do – but if you’re planning to visit a bunch of the included attractions (like Prague Castle, the Old Town Hall, boat rides, and various museums) the pass can save you money and time.

Safety and Scams: While Prague is generally a safe city (and violent crime rates are low), pickpocketing does occur, especially in crowded areas and on public transport. Always keep your valuables secure (in front of your body and zipped up!) and be cautious of distractions. Plus, I’d advise against hailing cabs off the street – some overcharge tourists (use official taxis or rideshares instead).

Try some traditional Czech baked goods: You’ll find trdelník (chimney cakes) all over, and yes they’re delicious. But they’re actually not Czech at all, rather Slovakian or Hungarian! Who knew?! Make sure to try kolaches as well – sweet-bread filled with poppy seeds or fruit jam (look out below for my fave spot to try them!).

Brief History of Prague 

Prague’s history is rich and layered. The area began as a trading settlement in the 9th century and grew into a significant medieval city under the Přemyslid dynasty. In the 14th century, Charles IV made it the capital of the Holy Roman Empire, boosting its influence and wealth. The city faced various upheavals, including the Hussite Wars and the Thirty Years’ War. 

In the 20th century, major events like the Velvet Revolution in 1989 led to the end of communist rule (thankfully!). Today, Prague is just THRIVING as the capital of the Czech Republic, boasting its breathtaking medieval architecture and a cultural scene that’s always buzzing with energy.

Perfect 3 Days in Prague Itinerary

Day 1: Old Town, New Town, and Jewish Quarter 

Morning: Wander Old Town (Staré Město)

Let’s start this 3 day Prague itinerary by exploring the heart of the city – Old Town (Staré Město)!

Spend the morning meandering down the cobblestone streets, admiring the Renaissance-style facades and gothic spires, stepping into one (of many!) Czech pubs or cafes, and gazing out onto the terracotta rooftops from the Old Town Hall Tower.

The main highlight of Old Town is easily Old Town Square (Staroměstské náměstí), a bustling hub surrounded by stunning buildings like the Gothic Church of Our Lady before Týn and the Baroque St. Nicholas Church.

Here’s a few things not to miss in Old Town on Day 1 of your Prague itinerary:

Old Town Hall Tower: There’s plenty of towers to climb in Prague (just like in Florence, Italy), but the Old Town Hall Tower was a non-negotiable for me. The 360-degree views of Prague are some of the best in the city, with red rooftops, Gothic spires, colorful houses, and Baroque towers. 

You’ll need to climb up a whole bunch of steps for this view, but I promise you it’s worth it! Psst – go early to beat the crowds and long lines. Also, it’s the only medieval tower in Prague to be completely wheelchair accessible, so keep that in mind if you’re unable to climb steps. 

Prague Astronomical Clock: This is one of the oldest astronomical clocks in the world! There’s even an hourly show (from 9am to 11pm on the hour) featuring animated apostles and other figurines – while impressive, I wouldn’t hang around waiting for it for more than 10 minutes or so.

Church of Our Lady Before Tyn: This striking Gothic church dominates Old Town Square with its two massive spires. And it’s easily one of the most impressive Gothic religious buildings in all of Prague, built from the mid-14th to the early 16th centuries. 

I have to admit we only admired the church from the outside, but I heard it boasts impressive altars and sculptures inside.

Terasa U Prince: If you don’t feel like climbing/paying for Old Town Hall Tower, head here for a drink/snack overlooking Old Town. There’s spectacular views from this rooftop bar, and it’s easily one of the city’s best photo spots!

St. Nicholas Church: A magnificent Baroque church known for its opulent interior and grand dome. We LOVED the pastel frescos, ornate balconies, and scrolls of sophisticated white stucco. Every inch is covered in intricate details and lavish decoration – a true masterpiece! 

Kolacherie: Whatever you do, don’t leave Stare Mesto without trying some traditional Czech kolache pastries! And Kolacherie definitely has the best pastries in town (even locals come here so you know it’s good). 

We tried two – a poppy seed pastry and a blueberry cream cheese pastry with crumble, and both were absolutely delicious. There’s also plenty of vegan options as well. 

Other things to do in Old Town Prague: You can also check out the Kinsky Palace (a Rococo gem housing the National Gallery), take a quick look at the Jan Hus Memorial (a tribute to the famous Czech reformer and theologian), and/or climb the Powder Tower (a remodeled medieval Gothic city gate standing between the Old and New Town with more gorgeous views).

If you’d rather not miss anything and want an insider’s look at Prague and its complex history, take a guided walking tour of Old Town! While we had a great time wandering around (and soaking up the atmosphere), I admit we didn’t really learn too much, and would have preferred to explore with a knowledgeable local guide. 

I mean, the whole area’s brimming with history and stunning architecture – hard to really appreciate if you’re not familiar with the backstory and significance of each landmark.

Lunch at Lokál

By now you’re probably getting hungry (I don’t blame ya), so next up on this 3 day Prague itinerary is some hearty Czech food! And the best place to go? Lokál! It’s a popular Prague chain with fantastic traditional Czech comfort food and some of the freshest Pilsner beer in the city. There’s locations in both Old Town and New Town (and even Lesser Town), so you can really go whenever you’d like – even tomorrow.

We loved how casual and carefree it was, super no-frills and kinda reminiscent of an old-school Czech pub. The svíčková (braised beef with creamy sauce and dumplings), fried schnitzel, and goulash are all really popular, but whatever you do, don’t miss the fried cheese! 

It’ll probably be pretty busy, so come a bit before your stomach is growling uncontrollably.

Early Afternoon: Jewish Quarter (Josefov)

Up next – the Jewish Quarter in Prague, also called Josefov (named after the emperor Joseph II)! It’s a historic area with a deep heritage that stretches back centuries, and it offers a fascinating glimpse into the city’s Jewish history and culture.

Josefov has been a central hub for Jewish life in Prague for centuries. Despite the hardships faced by the community, such as expulsions and ghettos, the district remains a testament to the resilience and rich cultural heritage of Prague’s Jewish population.

And there’s lots to see here. The Jewish Museum showcases a vast collection of artifacts and historical exhibits, including the Old Jewish Cemetery – one of the oldest and most significant Jewish cemeteries in Europe. The Spanish Synagogue dazzles with its stunning Moorish Revival architecture, while the Old-New Synagogue stands as the oldest active synagogue in Europe, dating back to the 13th century. 

The Pinkas Synagogue serves as a somber Holocaust memorial, with its walls inscribed with the names of victims, and the Jerusalem Synagogue impresses with its striking Art Nouveau design.

You may not have time to visit them all (like us), so pick out a few that interest you the most. We actually decided to visit the Jerusalem Synagogue in New Town – it’s only a few minutes away from Old Town and has the most stunning architecture.

Again, I highly recommend taking a guided tour to gain deeper insights into the history and significance of the Jewish Quarter. Remember that many sites in the Jewish Quarter are places of historical and religious significance, so be respectful of local customs and practices while visiting. All things that a local guide can help you with of course!

Late Afternoon: New Town

Head to New Town (Nové Město) for a taste of modern Prague. It’s an easy walk from Old Town, with a few specific things to see and do (although you can really just stroll around and see what you find).

A few things not to miss:

Dancing House: This is one of the most iconic modern buildings in Prague, and I’m almost positive you’ve seen a photo of it before. Designed by architects Vlado Milunić and Frank Gehry (who also created the Guggenheim Museum Bilbao), the building is known for its unique, twisting design, making it a striking contrast to Prague’s historic architecture. 

The rooftop terrace has fantastic views of the city, but we simply admired the quirky building from afar (across the street near Jiráskovo Square is the best spot to view it). What a modern architectural marvel it is – and so different from anything I’ve ever seen before!

Quirky art installations

  • Franz Kafka Rotating Head: The Franz Kafka Rotating Head by David Černý is one of those quirky pieces of art that totally stands out. It’s a 42-layer stainless steel sculpture of Kafka’s head, with each layer spinning independently to create a constantly shifting visual effect. We were bummed to find it under maintenance during our 3 days in Prague, but when it’s up and running, it’s a must-see (as I heard it’s super mesmerizing)!
  • Slight Uncertainty: Another cool piece is Slight Uncertainty, or the Hanging Umbrella Man, by Michal Trpák. This sculpture features a man suspended in mid-air, dangling from an umbrella. Spot it floating above Národní třída street and check out this unique piece of Prague’s art scene!

Cafe Louvre: Pop in for a coffee/tea break and grab a pastry or two! Cafe Louvre is an elegant 100-year-old cafe that’s been an iconic part of the city’s cultural scene since it opened back in 1902. 

It’s been said as one of the most beautiful cafes in all of Prague, and with its classic Art Nouveau interior, high ceilings, ornate detailing, large windows, and timeless charm, I can totally see why! 

Yes, prices are understandably a bit higher than a normal cafe you’ll find on the street, but hey, you’re sitting in a spot where famous intellectuals, artists, and writers were regular customers – notably Franz Kafka and Albert Einstein (!!!). Similar to how J.K. Rowling supposedly worked on her Harry Potter books in Majestic Cafe in Porto!

Note that Cafe Louvre has a full breakfast, lunch, and dinner menu, but since we had already eaten, we didn’t get any proper food, haha. Try the hot chocolate with cream – it’s legendary! Also, if you plan to come for dinner, definitely make a reservation.

Wenceslas Square: This bustling square is a major commercial and cultural hub, filled with modern shops, restaurants, and historic buildings. 

I honestly didn’t even realize it was a square at first because it stretches over 750 meters long! At its southern end stands the National Museum, a grand structure with a richly decorated facade that houses extensive collections of Czech history and natural history. The square is also home to the statue of Saint Wenceslas, the patron saint of Bohemia, which is a focal point of the area. 

We kinda wandered down to Wenceslas Square by accident one night after perusing the Christmas markets in Old Town – I didn’t even realize it was a major tourist attraction! Goes to show you there’s always something to see in Prague!

Night: Medieval Dinner at U Pavouka

Looking for the perfect way to wrap up the first day of your Prague itinerary? How about stepping back into the Middle Ages – complete with hearty traditional food and lively entertainment! 

Jokes aside, a medieval dinner is one of the most popular dining experiences in Prague, and it’s a fun way to dive into the city’s history. The place is dark and cozy, filled with candles, wooden beams, and iron-wrought chandeliers.

U Pavouka is one of the best places to go for it. Held in a 13th-century tavern, you’re given a multi-course feast featuring medieval-style dishes like roasted meats (that that fall-off-the-bone tenderness, oh wow!), dumplings, and hearty soups. Plus UNLIMITED beer and wine. Safe to say we didn’t go hungry.

As you’re enjoying your food, there’s all the entertainment to watch. An immersive mix of live music, fire shows, sword fighting, belly dancing, and even duels between knights. We were astounded at how dedicated the performers were, all dressed in period costumes I might add, only adding to the authentic atmosphere. 

I admit it was a bit cheesy, but the show was pretty impressive and the portions were HUGE. I couldn’t finish my meal and still left stuffed! Definitely worth the experience if you’re in the mood for some old-school fun.

Day 2: Lesser Town and Castle District 

Sunrise: Charles Bridge 

Charles Bridge is one of Prague’s most iconic landmarks, an ancient stone bridge connecting Old Town with the Lesser Town, spanning the Vltava River. It’s got stunning views of not only the river, but Prague Castle and the city’s Gothic and Baroque architecture.

And the best time to visit? At sunrise – and I suggest that’s when you go!

We got an early start and walked over from our hotel in Old Town to the iconic Charles Bridge before all the crowds arrived. And it was such a magical morning – super serene and the colors are perfect for photos. I LOVED the golden glow over the cobblestones and baroque statues, and how the early morning light softened the entire cityscape.

You definitely won’t be completely alone (I was surprised how many people were out for sunrise), but when we walked back over a few hours later, it was beyond packed (as evidenced by photos from the bridge tower).

Come later in the day and it’ll be hard to walk across without bumping into everyone – the bridge is filled with hordes of tourists, street musicians, and people selling art and souvenirs. 

If you don’t wanna wake up for sunrise, no sweat – you can totally come a bit later. Just know as the morning goes on it gets even more and more crowded. Since I visited Prague in the winter, sunrise was just before 8am so not too too early.

Morning: Prague Castle and Surroundings

After sunrise at Charles Bridge, quickly stroll through Mala Strana over to the Castle complex. Don’t worry, you’ll be coming back to Mala Strana afterwards – but get over to Prague Castle ASAP in order to beat the crowds. There’s a reason it’s one of the most popular places on everyone’s Prague itinerary, and it gets busy, and fast.

If you wanna take the scenic route, take the stairs to Zamecke schody on the way towards the castle – the view is BREATHTAKING from the top of the steps. Safe to say we got an early-morning workout!

Prague Castle isn’t just a single building; it’s a vast complex full of history, culture, and stunning architecture. You could easily spend a full day exploring its many courtyards, hidden nooks, and expansive gardens, BUT there’s still lots to see on this Prague itinerary, so I recommend simply spending the morning here.

Prague Castle is the largest ancient castle complex in the world, and it’s every bit as impressive as you’d imagine. Dating back to the 9th century, it’s been the seat of Czech kings, emperors, and presidents throughout history. The castle itself is a mix of Gothic, Romanesque, and Baroque styles, reflecting the many centuries it has stood as a symbol of power.  And there’s lots to see – I highly recommend booking a guided tour with a local if you’re truly interested in all the complex has to offer.

Not to miss within the castle complex:

  • St. Vitus Cathedral: Easily the crown jewel within the castle grounds, and by far the most crowded! This Gothic masterpiece boasts stunning stained glass windows, intricate spires, and breathtaking architecture. It’s the largest and most important church in the Czech Republic, home to the tombs of Bohemian kings and Holy Roman Emperors – and took a whopping 600 years to build. Don’t miss the stained glass designed by Alfons Mucha – it’s absolutely gorgeous.
  • Golden Lane: A charming, narrow street lined with colorful, tiny houses, originally built in the 16th century to house castle guards, craftsmen, and alchemists. Franz Kafka briefly lived at No. 22 – peek inside to see antiques that depict what life was like back then. Golden Lane’s got a whimsical, storybook-like vibe, and we loved strolling this cobblestoned street.
  • St. George’s Basilica: One of the oldest and best-preserved buildings in the complex, St. George’s Basilica is a Romanesque beauty dating back to the 10th century. Its stark red façade stands out among the Gothic structures, and it’s known for its simple, austere interior – a contrast to the grandeur of St. Vitus Cathedral. It even hosts classical concerts since its acoustics are so incredible.
  • Old Royal Palace: The Old Royal Palace is where Czech rulers lived for centuries. The highlight is Vladislav Hall, an enormous hall once used for jousting tournaments and coronations. It’s famous for its unique late Gothic vaulting and grand size, one of the largest halls in medieval Europe. You’ll also find the Bohemian Chancellery, the site of the famous 1618 Defenestration of Prague, which ignited the Thirty Years’ War!

Besides the actual castle buildings, I found the views from the castle grounds to be just as  spectacular – I mean the castle towers over the city on a hilltop, so that’s to be expected I guess! I loved the sweeping panoramas of Prague’s red rooftops, the winding Vltava River, and all the way to Old Town Square. So incredibly gorgeous!

A few other tips:

  • Timing is everything. And by that, I mean arrive early (preferably early in the morning right after sunrise at Charles Bridge). Prague Castle is high up on everyone’s Prague itinerary and gets exceptionally crowded, especially during peak summer season. Come at opening and skip the intense crowds.
  • Changing of the Guard: The ceremonial changing of the guard takes place every hour, but the full pomp and ceremony happens at noon in the First Courtyard, complete with a fanfare and flag ceremony. Since we visited first thing in the morning, we sadly missed this. 
  • Ticket Options: There’s a few different ticket types to choose from depending on what you wanna see (the complex truly is huge, so don’t feel like you need to see it all). The most popular is Circuit B, which includes access to St. Vitus Cathedral, the Old Royal Palace, St. George’s Basilica, and Golden Lane. Buy your skip-the-line ticket here (especially useful in prime summer months and if you don’t plan to be there at opening).
  • Free Areas: Yup, you can wander some parts of the complex, like the courtyards and gardens (which are closed in winter, just FYI), for free. However, you’ll need a ticket to enter the main buildings.

Afternoon: Malá Strana (Lesser Town)

Next up – a post-castle stroll in Mala Strana, one of Prague’s most picturesque and historic neighborhoods! It’s not far from Prague Castle (nestled right at its foot actually), and separated from the Old Town by the Vltava River. We loved wandering down Nerudova Street – it’s super charming with tons of baroque architecture, narrow cobblestone streets, and beautiful squares. 

A few must-do’s in Mala Strana:

Cafe Savoy: Take a break and have a coffee and/or a late brunch at this elegant cafe. It’s apparently the place to be – so be prepared to wait in line! We were impatient and decided not to wait, haha. If you want something sweet, try a vetrnik – a vanilla cream choux pastry sandwich that’s said to be the best pastry in Prague!

Prague’s Narrowest Alley: Experience the narrowest alley in Prague – it’s so slim, there’s actually a traffic light system to manage pedestrian flow! This skinny passageway is wedged between two buildings, and you have to wait for the light to change before you can squeeze through. 

It’s a quirky little spot that’s definitely worth a quick visit just to marvel at how tiny it really is!

Lennon Wall: Head over to the Lennon Wall, a vibrant and ever-evolving mural dedicated to John Lennon and the ideals of peace. This wall is a canvas for colorful graffiti and street art, constantly changing as new messages and artwork are added.

Spray painting isn’t allowed anymore, so if you really feel the need to leave messages, make sure they’re in chalk or pencil. It’s a lively tribute to the Beatles and a beacon of freedom and love in the heart of Prague.

Strahov Library: A must-visit for anyone fascinated by beautiful interiors and historical libraries! Located just outside Malá Strana, this stunning library boasts a collection of rare books and impressive rooms, including one with a fascinating array of globes and maps (my favorite!). 

The Strahov Library has *very* mixed reviews since you can’t actually enter the library rooms (only view them from a roped-off entrance) unless you take a tour (which you need to book a few weeks/months in advance). I kind of liked this setup because it meant I could snap photos without crowds getting in the way, haha. But I understand why it feels a bit underwhelming to some people. I still found the rooms to be historically significant and stunning!

Note that you need to buy a ticket to enter, and you need to buy your ticket from the Strahov Monastery (about 75m away) – there’s no ticket booth at the Strahov Library itself.

St. Nicholas Church: Here you’ll find a Baroque masterpiece with a breathtaking dome and intricate interior designed by architect Kilian Ignaz Dientzenhofer – think beautiful frescoes, a beautifully crafted altar, and ornate chandeliers! It’s a must-visit landmark in Lesser Town, and free to enter (although donations are always appreciated). 

And since the acoustics are so good, the church often hosts classical music concerts – look out for tickets if you’re interested.

Psst – don’t confuse St. Nicholas Church with the other one in Old Town; they’re different!

Climb for Some Fantastic Views: While you’re over in this part of town, may as well get more views! And there’s lots to choose from – can’t go wrong with any! 

  • Lesser Town Bridge Tower: Located on the other side of the Charles Bridge (in Lesser Town – what the name implies, haha), it has a great view of the bridge, the flowing Vltava River, and the surrounding Lesser Town district. To reach the observation area, you’ll need to climb 138 steps up a spiral staircase to the viewing platform, but the panoramic vistas of the Gothic bridge architecture and the bustling river below make it well worth the effort.
  • Old Town Bridge Tower: Out of all the options in this area we chose to climb up the Old Town Bridge Tower. Why? Because I wanted to get an up-close perspective of Charles Bridge – and all the people on it, haha (what we avoided by going at sunrise!). We were also able to see the historic buildings of Old Town and distant Prague Castle. The tower isn’t far from Old Town, and we were surprised it wasn’t too crowded despite the bridge being completely overrun with tourists. Note that just like the other town on the bridge, you need to climb up 138 steps and there’s no elevator.
  • Petrin Tower: Not technically in Mala Strana (but nearby!), Petrin Tower on Petrin Hill offers expansive views of Prague’s cityscape, including landmarks such as Prague Castle and the Vltava River. Yes, there’s more stairs, but you can entirely skip the climb and take a funicular to the base of the hill and then an elevator to the top of the tower! Perfect if your legs are already tired from the day (which I totally get). This is the tower to choose if you’re feeling tired from all the activities on your Prague itinerary, haha. Buy your lookout tower entrance ticket here.

Canal Ride on the River: Your feet are probably tired by now; it’s the perfect time for a relaxing boat ride on the Vltava River!  By this time in the day, I swear we already had over 20k steps, so sitting on the boat for a while was exactly what we needed. And plus we loved getting a different perspective of the city.

You can book your tickets online in advance (what we did!) or at ticket stands near the riverbank. Most cruises depart from docks near the Charles Bridge, like Křižovnické náměstí or Dvořák Embankment.

And there’s lots of different options, from short 45-minute sightseeing cruises to 2-3 hour dinner cruises with meals and live music. We opted for the shorter canal cruise since it was chilly out and we didn’t know how warm it’d be on the river. But if you’re visiting in summer, definitely consider a longer evening cruise (the city all illuminated at night is gorgeous)! 

This is the exact tour we booked – and we explored the waterways of old Prague while listening to an audio commentary on a lovely little canal boat. We were given some mulled wine and some gingerbread to snack on, which is always appreciated!

Night: Dinner in Old Town

We headed back to Old Town for dinner since I had so many restaurants here on my list. We obviously didn’t get to try them all since we only had a weekend in Prague, but these were the ones I was most excited for:

  • Restaurace Mincovna: Real Czech food! We ate dinner here one night, and it was the perfect way to warm up after a chilly winter day – a super satisfying hearty meal. Try the goulash with potato dumplings – those bread dumplings really soak up all that good sauce. And definitely good value for money considering how close the restaurant is to Old Town Square.
  • Restaurace Cerveny Jelen (Red Stag): A traditional Czech pub set in an old bank with really good food and really good Wagyu steaks (from Japan and Australia)! Here with a few friends? Try the Wagyu degustation platter to sample them all!
  • La Degustation Boheme Bourgeoise: We actually discovered this fine-dining restaurant our first night as it was literally next to our hotel. It’s pretty pricey (and fancy!), so perfect if you’re celebrating a special occasion – or just wanna treat yourself (you are on vacation after all!). Expect an upscale restaurant with a modern menu inspired by dishes from 19th-century Czech cuisine. Elevated Czech food if you will! Make a reservation in advance – this place fills up quickly (we sadly missed out). 

Optional Evening Activity: Czech Beer Experience

If you’re not too tired after all that running around (I swear, we walked 25k+ steps every day of our 3 days in Prague), experience some Czech beer culture! To be completely honest, we’re not huge beer drinkers, so we went back to the Prague Christmas markets for more mulled wine, haha. BUT I couldn’t not include these activities because Prague is HUGE on beer after all!

  • Soak in a Beer Bath: Yes, you read that right — a beer bath! I mean, when else are you gonna soak in a private beer bath and drink unlimited beer at the same time?! Beer baths have actually been around since the Middle Ages, known to cleanse the pores, increase pulmonary circulation, regenerate skin and hair, and revitalize the nervous system. What a unique experience! Read reviews here.
  • Prague Pub Crawl: Wanna get a taste for​​ Prague’s nightlife? On this pub crawl you get 2 hours of unlimited Czech beer, wine, vodka, and Bohemian absinthe shots, plus welcome shots at two other bars, and then VIP entrance into Karlovy Lazne – an epic 5-story nightclub. Learn more here.
  • Pilsner Urquell Experience & Beer Tasting: Wanna learn about the world’s first golden beer? Sign up for an immersive 90-minute self-guided tour of discovery into the origin and making of Pilsner Urquell, the Czech Republic’s favorite beer. And if you book with this GYG link, you even get a personalized bottle with your name as a gift. 

Day 3: Day trip to Cesky Krumlov 

Time to get outta the city! On the third day of your Prague itinerary, head down to Cesky Krumlov, which I’m dubbing Czechia’s medieval fairytale town! It sits right on the banks of the Vltava River, winding its way through charming cobblestone streets and pastel-colored houses.

Plus, it’s a UNESCO World Heritage Site, so you know it’s gonna be gorgeous. It’s easily one of the best preserved medieval towns in Europe (like Bruges in Belgium, San Gimignano in Italy, Dubrovnik in Croatia, Colmar in France, Rothenburg-ob-der-Tauber in Germany, and the entire country of San Marino… to name a few, haha), and we just loved it.

The place is straight outta a fairytale, with its serious old-school vibes, medieval architecture, picturesque streets, and the epic Český Krumlov Castle. No wonder it’s a popular tourist destination! It’s a total gem nestled in the South Bohemian Region of the Czech Republic. 

I actually recommend spending at least a night in Cesky Krumlov, but if all you’ve got is 3 days in Prague, a day trip will suffice (the town is pretty tiny)! Especially if you’re visiting in summer when the days are long. 

How to get to Cesky Krumlov

Guided Day Trip: This is by far the most popular way to get to Cesky Krumlov from Prague if you’re only visiting for the day. Guided tours leave in the early morning, so you get max time in Cesky. Most tours include transportation, a guide, and sometimes even a few extras like lunch or entrance to the castle. Perfect for when you’re looking for something hassle-free and wanna make the most of your visit.  

Check out these popular day trip options from Prague:

By Coach Bus: Not feeling a guided tour? You can also take a FlixBus or RegioJet Bus direct to Cesky Krumlov, which will take about 3 hours or so. Buses depart from Central Bus Station Florenc and the Na Knížecí station. 

To be honest, we found the bus station really confusing and almost missed our bus (we headed to Cesky for two nights since we had more time), so I recommend just taking a guided day tour if you’re not familiar with the station in Prague, haha.

By Train: While you can technically take a 3-4 hour train journey from Prague to Český Krumlov, there’s nothing direct. Expect to switch lines/transfer at České Budějovice. Note that the train station in Cesky Krumlov is much further away from the city center (a 35 minute walk) than the bus station, so you’ll need to either take a taxi or add a long walk to your time in Cesky.

To be completely honest, I’d just book a guided day trip so you don’t need to worry about transportation. Why stress on your vacation?!

Things to do in Cesky Krumlov for the day

There’s enough to keep you busy, but not TONS of attractions to check off. The beauty of Cesky Krumlov kinda lies in its medieval streets, so wandering really is the best way to see the little town.

Explore Cesky Krumlov Castle: This is the one main attraction in Cesky Krumlov… so don’t miss it! It’s practically the crown jewel of the entire town with its towering spire and sprawling grounds. And it’s HUGE – the castle complex is one of the largest in Central Europe, with over 40 buildings, five courtyards, and a beautifully preserved Baroque theater. 

You can check out the lavishly decorated rooms and intricate frescoes on a tour inside, as well as walk the grounds, climb the tower, see the controversial bears, and wander the gardens. Don’t miss the view from the Cloak Bridge – it was my favorite!

Wander the Latran District: This area is right near the castle, and actually where the castle’s servants once lived. Today, there’s picturesque streets lined with colorful, centuries-old houses, quaint shops, cozy cafes, and traditional restaurants.

Stroll through Svornosti Square: This is the main square of Cesky Krumlov surrounded by colorful, historic buildings and boasts the 14th-century town hall and striking plague column. 

If you’re visiting Cesky Krumlov in the winter, be sure to pick up a trdelnik and sip some svařák (mulled wine) at the Christmas markets – they’re located right here in the square.

Admire St. Vitus Church: One block from the main square, with Gothic architecture, intricate stonework, detailed frescoes, and towering pink spires. We popped in for a few minutes and loved the stunning stained glass windows.

Views from Seminární Zahrada: A park (translating to Seminar Garden) with the most popular view in all of Cesky Krumlov. The terrace has a gorgeous 180° view over the roofs and streets, with the castle behind them and the river in the middle. 

Find this spot directly across the street from Hotel Ruze.

Hope this helps you plan out your perfect 3 days in Prague itinerary! Send me a postcard from the charming streets of Malá Strana!

The post 3 Days in Prague: The Perfect Long Weekend in Prague Itinerary appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/3-days-in-prague-itinerary/feed/ 0